Date post: | 01-Mar-2018 |
Category: |
Documents |
Upload: | arpitrathi |
View: | 362 times |
Download: | 3 times |
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 1/148
PRINT FROM SAP HELP PORTAL
Document:Business Functions (SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP 6.0)
URL:http://help.sap.com/erp2005_ehp_05/helpdata/en/42/e34e3131023ee1e10000000a1553f6/content.htm
Date created: August 19, 2013
© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the expresspermission of SAP AG. The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice. Some software products marketed by SAP AG and i ts distributors contain proprietary
software components of other software vendors. National product specifications m ay vary. These materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies ("SAP Group") for
informational purposes only, without representation or warranty of any kind, and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials. The only
warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services, if any. Nothing herein
should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as thei r respective logos are trademarks or
registered trademarks of SAP AG in G ermany and other countries. Please see www.sap.com/corporate-en/legal/copyright/index.epx#trademark for additional trademark information
and notices.
Note
This PDF document contains the selected topic and its subtopics (max. 150) in the selected structure.Subtopics from other structures are not included.The selected structure has more than 150 subtopics. This download contains only the first 150 subtopics. Youcan manually download the missing subtopics.
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 1 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 2/148
Business Functions (SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP6.0)
Introduction: Enhancement Packages and Business Functions
Enhancement packages and business functions enable you to considerably simplify the process of introducing and using new developments for SAP Business
Suite. This technology enables you to selectively introduce individual new developments and to optimize selected business processes.
Enhancement packages are offered for the following applications of the SAP Business Suite:
SAP CRM
SAP ERP
SAP SCM
SAP SRM
There are also enhancement packages available for SAP NetWeaver. These enhancement packages form the basis for the enhancement packages of the
applications of the SAP Business Suite, but follow different principles. Therefore, the statements made in this documentation do not apply for the enhancement
packages of SAP NetWeaver.
Nonetheless, there are some bus iness functions in your SAP NetWeaver system. With very few exceptions, these are business functions that you can use
only in conjunction with one or more applications of the SAP Business Suite. You can find notes about these dependencies in the description of the given
business function.
This documentation provides you with an initial overview of the technology involved and the principles behind the enhancement packages. For detailed information
for technical consultants related to the concept, installation, and maintenance of enhancement packages, see the enhancement package pages of each
application on the SAP Service Marketplace.
Enhancement Packages
With the enhancement package delivery technology, we provide you with new developments and enhancements of applications for your existing SAP Business
Suite installations. To take advantage of these new developments and enhancements, you can install enhancement packages on your existing installations on full
release levels on your SAP Business Suite applications. The business function technology makes it possible for you to pick and choose only those new
developments and enhancements you want to have, and to introduce these in your company. This delivery concept allows you to use new developments offered
by SAP for your business processes at your own pace and according to your own requirements.
Prerequisites
You are using the related full release and you have set up the business processes there that are relevant for your business.
You are using SAP Solution Manager.
Before beginning the installation of the enhancement package, you have informed yourself about which new developments are relevant for your business
processes. Then based on that information, you imported the relevant software component versions and content packages.
You imported all Support Package Stacks that are necessary for the enhancement package into your system for your applications of the SAP Business Suite
and SAP NetWeaver.
It is possible for you to first import the necessary Support Package Stack into your system, and then import the enhancement package in the next step.
However, we recommend that you combine the import of the enhancement package with the import of the current Support Package Stack. This approach
offers synergy effects for the testing process and when you are adapting your software modifications. See the notes, dependencies, and prerequisites
described in the Master Guide for the respective enhancement package.
FeaturesEnhancement packages contain functional enhancements, new user interfaces, and enterprise services that you can use to optimize your business processes.
The technology of enhancement packages offers the advantage that changes to interfaces and business processes only take effect for the applications that you
have also activated in the system. There is no change to the system behavior and the user interfaces of the other applications.
Note
Recommendation
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 2 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 3/148
This delivery concept offers you the following advantages:
It provides you with long-term planning security on a stable platform but does not mean that you cannot take advantage of innovations and new developments.
You can provide individual departments with new developments at any time while other departments can continue to work and there is no change to the system
behavior or the user interfaces. Using the comprehensive documentation and presentations available about the contents of each enhancement package, you
can get the information you need before actually installing the enhancement package. This information about the scope of the new functions assists you in
selecting the new developments that are of interest for your company at a given point in time.
Since implementation activities are only necessary for the new features, this considerably reduces the efforts and time required for the implementation of new
applications and functions. No activities are necessary for the bus iness processes that remain uninfluenced by the new features.
Your employees and users only need training for those applications and functions that you have actively decided to use.
It provides tools that simplify the installation and implementation of new developments considerably. These include the following functions:New installation tools are available for enhancement packages. These tools considerably simplify the installation of the technical components and the related
Support Packages. You also receive detailed information about which technical components you have to install.
You use business functions to activate all changes in your ABAP-based systems. You can decide for each individual business function if you want to use
the new developments that it contains. Each business function also contains information about which additional technical components you have to install to be
able to use the business function.
For each business function, we provide test case templates that make it easier for you to test the new developments. This also reduces efforts required for
the test. You only have to test the applications of the business processes that you have actively decided to optimize by activating a business function.
It provides you with analyses that tell you, for each business function, which user interfaces for which roles and users are affected by the activation of a
business function. You can use this information to calculate your costs in advance for training users to use the new functions.
The new developments and enhancements are only active once you have performed the following activities:
You have decided to use a business function.
You have installed the technical components and contents required for using the business function.
You have activated the required business functions in your ABAP-based sys tem.
More InformationFor more information about the upgrade and the installation of industry business solutions (SAP ERP only), see the Master Guide for the given enhancement
package.
Business Functions
With business functions, SAP provides new features and enhancements in self-contained units for your existing SAP installations. This enables you to use
spec ific new features and enhancements for your various business processes.
Business function X is delivered with an enhancement package. This business function contains functions that allow you to more efficiently run a given
business process. At this moment in time, you are not interested in other functions of the enhancement package.
Therefore, you install only those technical components that you need in order to use business function X. After you install those technical components, other
business functions are also available that were also part of the technical components you installed. But you activate only business function X.
After you activate business function X, the functions you want to use are then available. No other implementation activities are needed for all of your other
business processes and applications; users can continue to work in them as they always have.
Prerequisites
Before installing the enhancement package, you obtained information about the business functions that you want to use for your business processes.
You have implemented the relevant technical components in your SAP installations dependent on the business function you chose.
Features
The business function concept has two aspects:
The business function as a self-contained entity comprising new software developments. This aspect also includes comprehensive material that you can use
ahead of time to get information about the new developments, along with the technical components that have to be installed.
The business function as a technical object in your ABAP-based system. Along with this object, you also activate the new developments in your ABAP-based
system using transaction SFW5.
The business functions are only v isible in transaction SFW5 if you have implemented the related software component versions.
You cannot undo the activation of a business function in a live system. Deactivating a specific, ac tive business function is p ossible only for test purposes.
For more information, see Deactivating Business Functions.
The processes that run in the background when you activate a business function need a certain amount of time. This means that you cannot see the
changes in the system immediately after you activate the business function. You must also schedule a short downtime of approximately one half hour to an
hour in the respective system.
You call transaction SFW5 in your ABAP-based system from the first Customizing activity in your Implementation Guide. It provides a series of functions that
simplify the use of the new developments for you:
When you have activated a business function, the following changes and new developments are visible:
Example
Note
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 3 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 4/148
New menu entries
New fields on the user interfaces
Customizing activities required for the implementation
New table entries in Customizing tables and system tables
Business Configuration Sets (Switch BC Sets) are also delivered with the business functions; these are unpacked automatically when you activate a
business function. For more information, see SAP Notes 337623 and 877008.
Transaction SFW5 gives you the following options for getting information about business functions and for scheduling their implementation:
Navigation to the business function description
Navigation to the release notes relevant for the business function
Navigation to the sample test catalogs for the business function
For more information, see Working with Test Case Templates
Notes about the dependencies between business functions
For some business functions you must also activate additional business functions. For notes about doing so, see the related description and the
Dependencies column in transaction SFW5. It is not technically possible to activate business functions that exclude each other.
Analysis of the effects on your users of activating a business function. For more information, see Analysis of the Effects on the Users.
From a technical view, the business functions consist of individual switches that can be used to activate coding strings, menu entries, and Customizing activities
in the Implementation Guide. For more technical information about the business functions and transaction SFW5, see Switch Framework.
If you implement your own customer enhancements at the explicit enhancement options that SAP defined with the statements ENHANCEMENT-POINT or
ENHANCEMENT-SECTION, these can be made ineffective by a subsequent release or enhancement package, or they can cause errors. Therefore we
strongly recommend that you not use the enhancement options provided by SAP and defined with ENHANCEMENT-POINT or ENHANCEMENT-SECTION for
your own customer enhancements. SAP does not guarantee that the interfaces and the existence of these explicit enhancement options will remain stable in
the source code.
We recommend that you use , for example, Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) or implicit enhancement options instead. For more information, see Enhancement
Framework.
More Information
For more information about activating business functions, see SAP Note 908007.
Deactivating Business Functions
Activating and using the contents of a business function stores data on databases, executes process s teps, changes user interfaces, sets statuses, and much
more. Therefore, for technical reasons, it is not possible to reverse the activation of a business function, since this can lead to irreparable data inconsistencies in
the system. This is especially the case for live systems.
Nonetheless, it would be helpful in many cases to be able to first test a business function without having to build a separate system for the test. For this reason,
SAP delivers some business functions for which it is possible to reverse their activation. This type of business function is called reversib le.
You can reverse the activation of business functions only in development and test sys tems. Reversal is not possible in live systems.
Features
In transaction SFW5, you can see that business functions are reversible based on the following information:
The system disp lays a double arrow symbol for the business function instead of a light bulb symbol.
Status of Business Function Symbol
Reversible Business Function (Double Arrow )
Business Function Switched Off (Light Bulb Switched Off )
Business Function Switched On (Light Bulb Switched On)
When you activate the business function, the Planned Status checkbox remains visible.
For business functions that are not reversible, this checkbox is no longer displayed once the business functions are activated. Instead, the sys tem displays
the information Business func. will remain switched on.
Business functions have to meet certain requirements before SAP can set them to being reversible. They are not allowed to be business functions that
irretrievably change the system, or that change it so that inconsistencies can arise. Therefore, to ensure the highest possible level of security in your
systems, there are always a small number of business functions that are not reversible.
Note
Caution
Caution
Note
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 4 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 5/148
If the activation of a business function is a prerequisite for activating another business function, then you cannot deactivate the prerequisite business function
once the dependent business function is activated. This applies even if the prerequisite business function is designated as being reversib le.
The following example assumes that the activation of business function BF1 is the prerequisite for activating business function BF2. The following scenarios
are possible:
Is BF1 Reversible? Is BF2 Reversible? Deactivation Possible?
Yes Yes You can deactivate both business functions.
No No You cannot deactivate either of the business
functions.
No Yes You can deactivate business function BF2, but
not business function BF1.
Yes No After business function BF2 is activated, you
cannot deactivate business function BF1, even
though it is reversible.
Reason: Once you have activated business
function BF2, you cannot deactivate it. If you were
to deactivate business function BF1, then the
prerequisites for business function BF2 would no
longer be met.
We strongly recommend that you also test reversible business functions in a separate test client that is set up solely for that purpose. Proceed as follows:
1. Create a test client, for instance using a client copy.
2. Activate the busines s function in the test client.
The activation of the business function is cross-client.
In the business function documentation, check if the activation of the business function has an effect on other integrated systems (such as BI system,
SCM system, and so on). If this is the case, we strongly advise you to set up an own test client in each of these systems. Configure the systems in
such a way that the relevant test clients are connected to one another.
3. Test the activated functions of the business function in the test client.
Make sure that the activated functions of the business function are not tested in any other client of the test system.
4. Depending on how satisfied you are with the test results, proceed as follows:
If you decide based on the test to use the business function, then leave it activated. If you have another business function to test, you can test it in the
same test client.
If you decide based on the test not to use the business function, then proceed as follows:
1. Deactivate the business function by deselecting the Planned Status checkbox and then choosing Activate Changes.
2. Delete the test clients that have been created.
3. If you need to test further business functions, create a new test client.
Importing Technical Components
For each business function, we have defined which individual parts of the enhancement packages you have to implement in your system landscape to be able to
use the content of the business function.
Features
Enhancement Packages
The new features in the enhancement packages build on the underlying SAP product instances. The enhancement packages are delivered by means of new
versions of individual components of your SAP product instances.
Therefore, you need to import only a specific part of the delivery scope of an enhancement package into your system landscape. The specific individual technical
components and contents that you need in order to use a business function are fixed. These are described in the documentation.
The individual enhancement packages build on one another, and therefore all enhancement packages are numbered according to the sequence in which they
appeared. In each enhancement package, you can also use the business functions of earlier enhancement packages.
Example
Recommendation
Caution
Caution
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 5 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 6/148
Special installation tools are available for installing the enhancement packages, and these simp lify the import considerably.
When you import a new enhancement package or upgrade to a higher full release, the business functions that you have already activated and the related settings
in your ABAP-based system remain in place. After the installation, the business functions that you previously activated are activated automatically.
Technical Usage
For installation purposes, the technical components and contents are summarized in the technical usage. Each business function is assigned to a technical
usage, and this means that you select the components and contents required for a business function by selecting the technical usage for the installation.
Based on the technical usage you select and the current system status, SAP Solution Manager Maintenance Optimizer provides you the with the technical
components you need for the installation. These include any Support Packages that are required, and the necessary SAP NetWeaver enhancement package.
It may be the case that, for some business functions, you need further technical components in addition to the content of the technical usage, for example,
special SAP NetWeaver components or third-party products. This information is provided in the description of the business function.
Technical Components
The following technical components and contents contain new developments and enhancements that are available for a business function.
Software component versions of the ABAP-based system
Software component versions for Java-based applications
Portal content
A business function can cover new or enhanced portal roles. Therefore, new versions of the business packages are available for the enhancement packages:
The version of an enhanced business package covers the following portal roles:
Portal roles in the version that was available for the previous full release (for example, SAP ERP 6.0)
Changed portal roles that are used in a business function. In addition to new iViews, the new version of a portal role can also cover iViews that were already
part of the portal role of the full release.
Business content (BI content)
In your BI system, new or changed objects in the enhancement packages are stored in their own separate InfoAreas. In addition, the documentation of the
individual objects contains information about the enhancement package starting in which the objects are available and for which business function they are
available.
Process Integration Content (XI Content)/Enterprise Services Repository Content (ESR Content)
Along with the enhancement packages, you receive additional enterprise services. The implementations of these enterprise services are in the software
component versions of your ABAP-based system. In the XI system, these enterprise services are grouped in their own software components and namespaces
for the enhancement packages. For information about these enterprise services, see the documentation of the business function and the related release note.
Overview
The following figure shows an overview of the relationships between business functions, technical usages, and technical components.
More Information
For information about the technical components required for a business function, see the documentation. For more information, see the Business Function
Documentation and the Master Guide for the enhancement package.
Note
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 6 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 7/148
Business Function Documentation
The documentation of the new or enhanced applications in the enhancement packages is oriented on the content of the business functions. This applies for the
system documentation and the SAP Library.
Features
SAP Library
In the SAP Library, the documentation of the business functions consists of two areas: The description of the business functions themselves and the related
application documentation.
Business Function Description
The descriptions give you an initial overview of which new functions SAP offers with the enhancement packages. The description provides a point of entry to the
more detailed documentation and helps you to decide whether you might want to use the business function.
Related application documentation
In most cases, there is extensive application documentation in addition to the description of the business function.
You can access the descriptions of the business functions that are delivered with the enhancement packages as follows:
You can get information using the SAP Help Portal at http://help.sap.com in the SAP Library for the given SAP app lication under Business Functions
(SAP Enhancement Package ...). All business functions are described there. Using the links to the application documentation contained in the documentation
of the business functions, you can get detailed information about the content of the business functions.
In transaction SFW5 in your ABAP-based system, use the links to the descrip tions of the individual business functions. Using these links, you can call up the
descriptions of the business functions in the SAP Help Portal. From there, you can use all links to further documentation.
The original for business functions can be in different software layers, and they can be delivered in different enhancement packages. For example, there
are business functions that are in SAP NetWeaver, in the layer for reusable processes and tools for the SAP Business Suite, or in the application layer. For
technical reasons, business functions are always displayed in relation to their original assignment. Therefore, keep the following special considerations in
mind:
Example: If you call the description of a business function that is in SAP NetWeaver, then the SAP Help Portal structure displays only those business
functions that also are in the same enhancement package of SAP NetWeaver.
If you call the description of a business function of an application, then the structure displays the descriptions of all business functions available in
transaction SFW5 of the given enhancement package of that application.
You can use the SAP Library connected to your ABAP-based system to get information about the content of the business functions. You install the the SAP
Library on your server using the business functions. In doing so, you update only those parts of your SAP Library that contain information about the new
developments in a given business function. You can therefore update your SAP Library dependent on the parts of the software you have installed and activated.
This means that your SAP Library reflects the level of the software that you have installed and use.
For information about installing the SAP Library in the context of the enhancement packages, see the documentation DVD that is part of the software
delivery (“Readme” text) or 1066110.
When you call the SAP Lib rary that is on your server, you can display the descriptions of all business functions. However, the links from a b usiness
function description to further application documentation only function correctly if you have also installed the application documentation for this business
function. Only if you have installed the application documentation can you ensure the following:
You can execute all links from the business function description to the application documentation.
All links from the business function description to the application documentation disp lay the current version of the appl ication documentation that
corresponds to the software when the business function is active.
Note that activating a business function does not automatically lead to the installation of the related application documentation. You have to install the
application documentation on your server in addition to activating the business function.
Business function descriptions contain technical data. The most important technical data is explained below.
Note
Note
Caution
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 7 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 8/148
Explanation of the Technical Data in the Business Function Description
Technical Name of Business Function Unique Technical Name of Business Function
You can see the technical name in transaction SFW5 in the Business Function
column.
Type of Business Function Information about whether the business function is an enterprise extension, an
enterprise b usiness function, or an industry business function
This information is mainly relevant for SAP ERP. For more information, see
Types of Business Functions in SAP ERP.
Available As O f Number of enhancement package from which the business function is
available
Technical Usage Grouping of software components and contents of SAP enhancement package
that have to be installed together in order for you to be able to use the contents
of a specific business function
In most cases, the technical usages have a c learly understandable name
from which you can recognize the business applications contained in them.
Application Component App lication component for which the new functions in the business function
were developed
Based on this information, you can see if additional efforts are required for the
implementation, for example, if you are not yet using this application
component.
Prerequisite Business Function Business functions that have to be activated in addition to the business
function described in order for you to be able to use the new functions
Note that only the directly prerequisite business functions are listed in the
documentation. If you need a complete overview of the dependencies that need
to be considered, use the respective links in the documentation. Once you
have installed the corresponding software components, you can get information
about the complete dependency chain of a business function using transaction
SFW5.
Software Component Software components of your ABAP-based system that you have to import to
be ab le to use and activate the business function
SAP NetWeaver SAP NetWeaver component that is not necessary for the full release, but that
is required for the use of the business function
Portal content Version of the business package that you need to be able to use the business
function or individual functions of the business function
BI Content Release version of the business content (BI content) that you need to be able
to use the business function or individual functions of the business function
XI/ESR Content Release version and namespace of the enterprise services that you can use
for the business function
Third-Party Product Non-SAP application that you can connect with, for example, using interfaces
System documentation
The system documentation for the functions that belong to the scope of a business function is only active and visible in your ABAP-based system if you have
activated the business function.
This does not include the release notes. Irrespective of the whether or not the business functions are active, you can see all release notes in the software
component that you have installed in your system. You can judge the relevance of a release note for a specific business function from the technical name of the
business function in the title. The business function is also named in the text of the release note.
Working with Test Case Templates
Test case templates are available for the business functions that are delivered with enhancement packages. These test case templates help you to reduce the
implementation time and efforts. With the test case templates you can test the new functions that belong to the scope of a business function. The use of test case
templates gives you the following advantages:
Using the test case description, you can find out how to test the new functions and what you have to consider.
You can plan your tests using the test case templates and calculate the efforts accordingly.
You can prepare the content of the tests,for example, by creating the test data required.
For more information about using test cases, see SAP NetWeaver Library under Test Workbench.
FeaturesThe test case templates delivered give you examples that show you how to test the new functions. You can add further test cases.
You can access the test case templates in transaction SFW5. From there you can navigate to the related SAP test catalog for each business function.
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 8 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 9/148
Activities
Proceed as follows to look at the SAP test catalog for the individual business functions:
1. Call transaction SFW5. You access this transac tion in Customizing under Activate Business Funct ions.
2. In the Test Catalog column, select the test catalog that you want information about.
The application Display Test Catalog <topic> appears.
3. Open the descriptions for the respective test cases.
Proceed as follows to copy and provide the test catalog for your tests:
Proceed in exactly the sequence that is described in this procedure.
1. Call transaction SFW5. You access this transac tion in Customizing under Activate Business Funct ions.
2. In the Test Catalog column, select the test catalog that you want to use.
The application Display Test Catalog <topic> appears.
3. Make a note of the name of the highest node.
4. In the SAP Easy Access menu, choose Tools ABAP Workbench Test Test Workbench Test Organizer Test Catalog Management .
5. Choose the input help for the Test Catalog field.
6. Enter the name of the test catalog that you noted and want to use, and choose Start Search. If necessary, remove the language from the selection criteria.
7. Add the entry to your list of favorites. Choose Favorite.
8. Select the new entry and choose Test Catalog Copy .
9. Give your test catalog a new name, choose Continue, and specify the package in which the new test catalog is to be saved.
Your new test catalog is now in the list of favorites.
10. Select your new test catalog and choose Test Catalog Display .
11. Choose View Hierarchy Display Title and Key .
12. Open a new window.
13. In the SAP Easy Access menu, choose Tools ABAP Workbench Test Test Workbench Test Tools CATT .
The Computer Aided Test Tool application appears.
14. In the Test Case field, enter the technical key of a test case from your test catalog and copy the test case.
15. Copy all further test cases and add them to your favorites list.
16. Go back to the Test Catalog Management app lication.
17. In your copy of the test catalog, replace the individual test case templates from SAP with your copies of the test cases as follows.
1. Add the copy of your test case behind the original.
2. Delete the original from the test catalog.
Analysis of the Effects on the Users
Using the Impact Analyzer, you can analyze the user interfaces that are affected and find out which roles and users are influenced if you activate a business
function.
This enables you to answer the following questions before you activate a business function:
Which training material is affected?
To what extent does the training material have to be adjusted?
Which users have to be informed and may need delta training courses or materials?
Prerequisites
The Impact Analyzer analyzes information from the Role Maintenance transaction (PFCG). Therefore, in order to be able to use the Impact Analyzer fully, you
must have created roles to which the related transactions and users are assigned.
Features
The Impact Analyzer determines all roles (roles of the transaction PFCG) in which applications are entered that change when the business function is activated.
Using the roles, it determines the assigned users. For each business function, the Impact Analyzer shows which roles and users and which tasks and
transactions are affected by changes to the interfaces or processes.
The Impact Analyzer evaluates the following user interfaces:
Transactions
Portal i-Views and portal roles
Reports/programs of the ABAP-based sy stem
WebDynpro ABAP applications
You have the following selection options for the analysis:
Evaluation of all business functions planned for the activation
Choose Impact Analyzer Planned BFs .
This may take a few minutes due to the dataset to be evaluated.
Evaluation of an individual business function planned
Recommendation
Note
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 9 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 10/148
In SFW5, select a business function and choose Impact Analyzer Planned BFs
Selection of one or more business functions with own selection options
Choose Impact Analyzer Free Selection . There you have several options for selecting the business function and can choose the layout of the output
list.
You can call up this function independently of transaction SFW5 using the report SFW_IMPACT_ANALYZER.
The Impact Analyzer provides both an overview and a detailed view.
Business functions that exist for information purposes only and do not switch anything from a technical point of view cannot be evaluated using the Impact
Analyzer. For information, see the description of the given business function.
Special Features of Individual Applications of SAP BusinessSuite
Enhancement Packages for SAP ERP
For SAP ERP there are a number of special features in relation to enhancement packages.
Features
In SAP ERP there are several types of business functions available. In addition, you can use transaction SFW5 to activate certain industry business solutions.
For more information, see Types of Business Functions in SAP ERP and Industry Business Solutions of SAP ERP.
The SAP ERP Central Component (SAP ECC) consists of multiple software components containing the various business applications of SAP ERP. To make
the installation easier for you, and to reduce the amount of time for the installation, you only need to import certain new software component versions for each
business function to your ABAP-based system. The software component versions needed in each case are part of the technical usages that are available to
you for installing the business functions.
You should always import the most current version of an enhancement package so that, for example, you can directly use any corrections or further
developments in further business functions for this area.
For SAP ERP 6.0 system, you do not want to use the business functions for Human Capital Management . In that case, you leave your ECC software
component versions SAP_HR and EA-HR at level 600.
For your SAP ERP 6.0 system, you want to use a business function that was developed for enhancement package 2 for the Employee Interaction
Center area. In that case, you nonetheless install the newest version of the technical usage Human Capital Management with the software component
versions SAP_HR 60x and EA-HR 60x (for example SAP_HR 604 and EA-HR 604), even if you are only interested in a bus iness function from
enhancement package 2.
You can find extensive information on enhancement packages on the SAP Service Marketplace. This information assists you in selecting business functions
and in installing enhancement packages:
On the SAP Service Marketplace under http://service.sap.com/erp-ehp, you can find overview information about enhancement packages and
new developments for the individual application areas of SAP ERP.
On the SAP Service Marketplace under http://service.sap.com/ehp-inst, you can find detailed information about installing enhancement
packages.
On the SAP Help Portal under http://help.sap.com/erp SAP ERP Enhancement Packages ERP Central Component Enhancement Package
<number> Business Functions (SAP Enhancement Package <number> for SAP ERP 6.0 , you can find detailed information about the individualbusiness functions and links to the appropriate application documentation.
Types of Business Functions in SAP ERP
For SAP ERP, you have access to some special features in transaction SFW5. Here you have access to enterprise business functions, enterprise extensions,
and industry business functions.
Features
Business Functions
For SAP ERP, transaction SFW5 covers the following types of business functions:
Enterprise Extensions
Example
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 10 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 11/148
These business functions are available for full releases of SAP ERP (up to SAP ERP 6.0). You use them to activate a number of industry-independent and
industry-specific applications and business processes for each business function.
Enterprise Business Functions
Using these business functions, you can activate software developments that SAP provides within the framework of enhancement packages. For a description
of how the enterprise business functions work, see Business Functions.
SAP ERP contains both industry-independent and industry-specific enterprise business functions. The enterprise business functions are grouped together in
the general business function set BLANK.
Industry Business Functions
The industry business functions contain functions that belong to the industry enhancements introduced with SAP ERP 6.0, along with the new developments
from the enhancement packages. The industry business functions are part of the industry business function sets.
Business Function Sets
The business functions are grouped in business function sets in your ABAP-based SAP ERP system. There are two types of business functions sets:
For most industry business solutions, there is one business function set for each industry. You use this set to change over a client of your SAP ERP system to
the applications and solutions tailored for the particular industry. A bus iness function set includes all industry b usiness functions that can be used exclusively
for an industry solution on one system or one instance. These industry-specific contents and modifications are also available with SAP ERP, without your having
to install an add-on.
In addition to the industry-specific business function sets, there is a general business function set. This contains the enterprise business functions and the
enterprise extensions. These contain functions for the standard applications of Accounting, Logistics, Human Capital Management, and some additional
industry-specific applications.
The technical name of the general business function set is BLANK. The enterprise business functions and enterprise extensions contained in it are also
included in the industry business function sets. Therefore, you can also use the functions that are not industry-specific, if you have set up your system for a
certain industry.
A business function set is activated when you activate at least one of the related business functions. We therefore recommend that you activate the business
function set when you start configuring your system, since the required industry-specific or non-industry-specific view of your Implementation Guide is not created
until you have activated the related business function.
After an upgrade, the business function sets that you previously activated are automatically activated again.
You cannot activate industry business functions of an industry bus iness function set in an ABAP-based system or an ABAP-based instance, in parallel with the
industry business functions of another industry business function set. You can only activate one business function set for each instance. You cannot reverse
the activation. Therefore, some business function sets are available where the requirements of several industries are linked with one another, for example, the
SAP Oil and Gas with Utilities bus iness function set.
Industry Business Solutions of SAP ERP
With SAP ERP, you have a series of industry business solutions available to support your business processes. You can use the majority of the Industry
Business Solutions by activating industry b usiness function sets. You use the industry business function sets to assist you in adapting your SAP ERP Central
Component system (SAP-ECC system) to the requirements of the industry business solution. However, SAP also delivers other forms of industry solutions.
Features
Within SAP ERP, the following forms of industry solutions are available:
Industry business solutions available as business function sets (industry enhancement)
These business function sets are available with SAP ECC; you do not have to install any additional technical components.
Industry solutions delivered as central components
These industry solutions are delivered using an industry-specific product instance.
Industry-speci fic bus iness p rocesses or industry solutions delivered as enterprise extension or enterprise b usiness functions.
Industry business solutions delivered as add-ons.
You have to install these industry solutions separately.
Business Functions in SAP NetWeaver
CA Employee Qualifications for Concurrent/Global Employment
Note
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 11 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 12/148
Technical Data
Technical Name of Business Function CA_PA_CE_GE_QUALI
Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function
Available As O f SAP NetWeaver 7.0 SPS14 (recommended: SAP enhancement package 4
for SAP ERP 6.0)
Technical Usage Human Capital Management
Application Component Qualifications and Requirements (CA-GTF-QR)
Directly Dependent Business Function You Need to Activate Human Capital Management (EA-HR)
You need the EA-HR enterprise extension to use all of the functions of this
business function.
In this business function, a new relationship between qualifications and the central person is available.
All of the prerequisites and functions of the business function that are described in the following only app ly if you implement the business function within SAP
ERP Human Capital Management.
If you implement SAP ERP Human Capital Management, you can use this business function to edit qualifications for concurrent or global employees. After you
activate the business function, the qualifications are assigned directly to the employees instead of to their personnel assignments or personnel numbers as before.
The concurrent or global employees, their superiors, or the HR Administrators can thus edit the qualifications more quickly and easily. They also receive more
exact information about which qualifications are stored for an employee.
For more information, see SAP Library for SAP ERP 6.0 with enhancement package 4 and choose SAP ERP Central Component Human Resources
Personnel Management Concurrent Employment Personnel Management for Concurrent Employment Employee Qualifications for Concurrent
Employment/Global Employment .
Integration
The functions of this business function are enhanced with elements of the following application components in SAP ERP:
Concurrent Employment (PA-CE)
Management of Global Employees (PA-GE)
PrerequisitesYou have installed the following components as of the version mentioned:
Type of Component Component Only Required for the Following Functions
Software Component SAP_ABA 700
To use all of the functions of the business
function, you also need the following software
components:
SAP_HR (Recommendation:SAP_HR 604)
EA-HR (Recommendation:EA-HR 604)
You have activated the Human Capital Management (EA-HR) enterprise extension.
In Customizing for Personnel Management or Payroll, you have activated Concurrent Employment and/or Global Employment for the clients in your ERP system
in which you want to use the functions of this business function. For more information, see Employee Qualifications for Concurrent Employment/Global
Employment in the section "Implementation Considerations".
In the appropriate client of your ERP system, you use the application component Personnel Development and not the infotype Qualifications (0024) to store
qualifications for employees.
In the appropriate client of your ERP system, you use the application component Personnel Development and not object maintenance (transaction PP01) to
edit qualifications.
In customer applications (for example, a customer program or a customer iView for creating qualifications), you use the central function modules that provide the
application component Personnel Development to edit qualifications.
You have checked whether the relationship between qualifications and personnel assignments/personnel numbers can be easily converted into a relationship
between qualifications and the central person in the appropriate client of your ERP system. To do this, you start the conversion program Conversion of
Qualification Relations from Assignment to Person (RHPE_CCE_CONVERT_RELATION) in test mode. For more information, see the program documentation.
When you activate the business function, the conversion program Conversion of Qualification Relations from Assignment to Person (XPRA)(RHPE_CCE_CONVERT_RELATION_XPRA) is automatically started. For more information, see the program documentation.
Note
Caution
Note
Note
Caution
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 12 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 13/148
If you only activate Concurrent Employment/Global Employment after you have activated this business function in a client, you have to run the
RHPE_CCE_CONVERT_RELATION conversion program manually. Make sure that you start it directly after activating Concurrent Employment/Global
Employment.
You have specified how the ERP system responds when converting the relationships if different proficiencies are stored for the same qualification for an
employee in different personnel assignments.
You use the Business Add-In (BAdI) Merging Proficiencies for a Qualification in a Period (HRCCE_INTG_PROF). For more information, see the documentation
on the BAdI. For the BAdI, see Customizing for Cross-Application Components by choosing General Application Functions Generic Functions of the SAP
Business Suite Qualifications for Concurrent Employment/Global Employment .
As required, you have adjusted the distribution of the master data from Human Resources between various systems.
This is necessary if you distribute the data from a system in which the qualifications are linked to the central person into a system in which the qualifications are
linked to the personnel assignments, or vice versa.
You do not use the app lication component Defense Forces & Pub lic Security.
As the component Defense Forces & Public Security does not use the central function modules for the application component Personnel Development to
edit qualifications, you may not activate this business function if you use the component Defense Forces & Public Security.
Features
The qualifications are stored for the employee and not for the employee's individual personnel assignments.
The time consuming multiple entry of qualifications for the individual personnel assignments of a concurrent or global employee is thus not required.
All authorized persons (such as the employee, his or her manager, or an employee from the HR department) can access all of the employee's qualifications,
regardless of the personnel assignment.
If you create, change, delimit, or delete a qualification, this change takes effect for all of the employee's personnel assignments.
The transactions and reports for editing or reporting on qualifications show the qualifications at the level of the person ID.
For example, this enables a profile matchup for a concurrent or global employee.
CA, Appraisals, Evaluations, and Surveys 01
Technical Data
Technical Name of Business Function CA_HAP_CI_1
Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function
Available as of SAP NetWeaver 7.01 SAP enhancement package 1
SAP enhancement package 4 for SAP ERP 6.0
Technical Usage HCM Self Services
Orig inal Software Component of Business Function SAP_ABA 7.01
ECC Software Component EA-HR 604
ECC Application Component Objective Settings and Appraisals (PA-PD-PM)
Portal Content Business Package for Manager Self-Service 1.41
Business Package for Employee Self-Service 1.41
Business Package for Talent Management Specialist 1.40
Use outside of SAP ERP Human Capital Management is not intended by SAP and is not covered by the terms of the license. Related application components
in SAP Library can therefore only be installed if you implement SAP ERP Human Capital Management .
You can use this business function to optimize appraisal processes. You do this by implementing Web-based user interfaces based on Web Dynpro for ABAP
technology.
You can create and edit the documents used in appraisal processes more efficiently using the relevant tool. You can implement the cross-application Tool for
Appraisals, Evaluations, and Surveys in the application component Performance Management (Objective Setting and Appraisals).
During the yearly appraisal process, managers as well as employees can process employee appraisal documents to conduct annual negotiations as well as
the performance appraisal for the employee.
For more information, see:
Documentation for business function HCM, Performance Management 01 (HCM_OSA_CI_1)
SAP Note 1239427
Caution
Caution
Example
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 13 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 14/148
Integration
The user interfaces from the Performance Management (Objective Setting and Appraisals) application component is available to you in the following portal roles:
Portal Role: Manager in Business Package for Manager Self-Service 1.41
Portal Role: Employee in Business Package for Employee Self-Service 1.41
Portal Role: Talent management specialist in Business Package for Talent Management Specialist 1.40
More Information
For more information, see SAP Library for SAP enhancement package 4 for SAP ERP 6.0 under SAP ERP Central Component Human Resources Talent
Management Objective Setting and Appraisals (Performance Management) .
Periodic Key Replacement for Payment Card Encryption
Technical Data
Technical Name of Business Function PCA_KEYV
Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function
Available As O f Enhancement package 1 for SAP NetWeaver 7.0
Technical Usage Central App lications
Application Component Payment Card (AP-BP-PCA)
Payment Cards (SD-BIL-IV-PC)
You can use this b usiness function to increase security for payment card handling in your system.
You use this bus iness function if you manage payment card data in your system.
Prerequisites
Type of Component Component Is Needed Only for the Following Features
Software Component SAP_ABA 7.01
You activated the Periodic Key Replacement for Payment Card Encryption (PCA_KEYV) bus iness function.
Features
By activating this bus iness function you can:
Replace the keys used for payment card encryp tion on a periodic basis
Delete keys that are no longer used
Data Archiving: Standardization of Archiving Objects
Technical Data
Technical Name of Business Function DA_ARCHOJB_STANDARD_1
Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function
Available As O f SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP NetWeaver 7.0
Technical Usage Central Applications (if Used with SAP ERP)
Application Component BC-CCM-ADK
Directly Dependent Business Function Requiring Activation in
Addition
Information Lifecycle Management (ILM)
However, this business function is only relevant if you want to implement a
standardized archiving object together with SAP NetWeaver Information
Lifecycle Management.
You can use this b usiness function to use archiving objects with write programs whose characteristics and use have been standardized.
This business function documentation adds information about standardization to the documentation for the relevant archiving objects.
Standardization ensures that the write programs for the adjusted archiving objects have the same basic functions, therefore harmonizing the use of these
programs. This means that you can configure and expedite archiving projects for which these archiving objects are used more efficiently.
Note
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 14 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 15/148
In addition to the changes to the write program, further improvements and enhancements have been made to some archiving objects where necessary. For an
overview of the possible changes, see SAP Note 577847 .
Prerequisites
You have installed the following components as of the version mentioned:
Type of Component Component Is Needed Only for the Following Functions
Software component SAP_BASIS 702
SAP_ABA 702
SAP_APPL 605
Software component IS-OIL 605 Archiving in SAP for Oil & Gas
Software component IS-U 605 Archiving in SAP for Utilities
You have activated this business function in your back-end sy stem.
When you activate this business function, a switch BC set ensures that the new adjusted write programs for the standardized archiving objects are entered in
transaction AOBJ. The old write programs can then no longer be used. In the case of the archiving object LO_CHVW, the delete program is also replaced. The
preprocessing program was replaced in the archiving objects ISU_BILL and ISU_BILLZ only. When you activate the business function, the programs for all
the archiving objects in the switch BC set are copied; individual archiving objects cannot be selected.
If you are implementing the standardized archiving objects as part of an ILM project with SAP NetWeaver Information Lifecycle Management, the following
prerequisite must also be met:
You have activated the Information Lifecyc le Management (ILM) business function in your back-end system. For more information, see the Business Function
Documentation.
SAP NetWeaver Information Lifecycle Management is a licensed product. The standard functions for data archiving without the ILM enhancements are still
available as part of the standard system and do not have to be licensed separately.
Features
The standardized archiving objects are characterized by the following new or changed features compared to the non-standardized archiving objects:
Selection scr een of write program
On the selection screen for the write program under Processing Options, you can specify whether the program is started in test or production mode. For more
information, see Variant Maintenance for Archiving Jobs.
In the section for the log settings, you can define the type of log to be issued (complete detailed log or partial log) and the log output. You can also still enter a
short text for the archiving session. For more information, see Logs.
If you are implementing the archiving object as part of SAP NetWeaver Information Lifecycle Management and the prerequisites have been met (for example,
the corresponding business functions have been activated), the ILM Actions group box is also displayed. You can use these actions to archive data, for
example. During archiving, the retention periods entered in the Information Retention Manager are evaluated. You can continue to create snapshots (copies) of
data or destroy data that meets the prerequisites.
The following standardized archiving objects for the specified SAP applications (where used) are provided by this business function:
Note
Note
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 15 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 16/148
Archiving Object Description New Write Program
SAP ERP
CO_ALLO_ST Completely cancelled documents CO_ALLO_ST_WRI
CO_CEL_RCL Reconciliation ledger: totals and line items CO_CEL_RCL_WRI
CO_KSTRG Controlling documents CO_KSTRG_WRI
CO_ORDER Master and transaction data for internal orders CO_ORDER_WRI
CO_PROCESS Data for activity-based costing CO_PROCESS_WRI
CV_DVS Document Management CV_DVS_WRI
FI_SCHECK FI check data FI_SCHECK_WRI
FT_VEIAV Intrastat documents FT_VEIAV_WRI
FT_VEXAV Extrastat documents FT_VEXAV_WRI
LO_CHVW Batch where-used data CHVW_WRI
MM_ASMD Service master MM_ASMD_WRI
MM_HDEL History records for inventory value tables MM_HDEL_WRI
PI_PLAN Master recipe PI_PLAN_WRI
PP_PLAN Routings PP_PLAN_WRI
PP_WKC Work centers PP_WKC_WRI
PP_BKFLUSH Document log PP_BKFLUSH_WRI
RL_LINKP System inventory records RL_LINKP_WRI
RL_LINV Inventory history RL_LINV_WRI
RL_LUBU Posting change notices RL_LUBU_WRI
RL_LSEG Stock movements RL_LSEG_WRI
SAP IS Utilities
ISU_BBP Budget billing plan REAR_ARCH_BBP_ILM
ISU_BCONT Business partner contacts (contract accounts
receivable and payable)
REARCH_BCONT_WRITE_ILM
ISU_BILL Billing document header REAARCH_READ_HEAD
ISU_EABL Meter reading results RELARCH_ARCH_EABL_ILM
ISU_INSPEC Campaigns for inspection list RE_INSP_ARCH_ARCHIVE_ILM
ISU_PRDOCH Print document header REPDAR_ARCH_HEAD_ILM
ISU_PRDOCL Print document line item REPDAR_ARCH_LINES_ILM
SAP IS Oil & Gas
OIH_LICENC Excise duty licenses OIH_LICENC_WRI
OIG_SHPMNT Bulk shipment OIG_SHPMNT_WRI
More Information
For more information on SAP NetWeaver Information Lifecycle Management, see the SAP Library under SAP ERP SAP ERP Central Component SAP ERP
Enhancement Packages ERP Central Component Enhancement Package 5 Cross-Application Functions in SAP ERP Cross-Application Components
Information Lifecycle Management .
Information Lifecycle Management
Technical Data
Technical Name of Business Function ILM
Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function
Available As O f SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP NetWeaver 7.0
Technical Usage Central Applications (if Used with SAP ERP)
Application Component SAP NetWeaver Information Lifecycle Management (BC-ILM)
Directly Dependent Business Function Requiring Activation inAddition
Not relevant
Prerequisites
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 16 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 17/148
You have purchased the license for SAP NetWeaver Information Lifecyc le Management .
You have installed the following components:
Type of Component Component (as of version) Note
Software Component SAP_BASIS 702
SAP_ABA 702
SAP NetWeaver BW SAP_BW 702 For queries about data in Retention Warehouse
(lifecycle management of data from
decommissioned sys tems)
Features
This business function enhances the SAP system with ILM-specific functions for data storage and data retention that complies with the law.
For more information, see Information Lifecycle Management (ILM) in the SAP System
ILM: Retention Warehouse Content for Product Liability
Technical Data
Technical Name of Business Function ILM_RWC_PRODUCT_LIABILITY
Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function
Available As O f SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP NetWeaver 7.0
Technical Usage Central Applications (if Used with SAP ERP)
Application Component Retention Warehouse (BC-ILM-RW)
Prerequisite Business Function Information Lifecycle Management (ILM)
Prerequisites
You have installed the following components as of the version mentioned:
Type of Component Component Remarks
Software Component SAP_BASIS 702
SAP_ABA 702
SAP NetWeaver SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP
NetWeaver 7.0
BI Content SAP NetWeaver 7.0 BI Content Add-On 5
(BI_CONT 705)
SAP NetWeaver Portal Core SAP NetWeaver 7.0 Only For Calling BI Reports from the Portal
Portal Content Business Package for Retention Warehouse
Product Liability Audit 1.50
Only For Calling BI Reports from the Portal
If you run SAP NetWeaver ILM and SAP NetWeaver BW in separate sys tems, you have activated this business function for product liability in both systems.
You have made the Retention Warehouse system available and extracted the data from the legacy system to be decommissioned.
For more information, see Making SAP NetWeaver ILM Available
Features
This business function enables archiving (in the legacy system) in compliance with ILM and the querying of product liability-relevant data in the Retention
Warehouse system.
In a decommissioned ERP system, the activation of this business function results in the assignment of production-related archiving objects to the audit area
Product Liability . In the Retention Warehouse system, the activation of the business function enables you to convert the archive files transferred from a legacy
system that is to be decommissioned in an ILM-compliant manner. Only ILM-compliant data is available for evaluations in the audit area.
The Retention Warehouse content delivered for the product liability topic provides a basis that enables you to display data from a decommissioned SAP ERP
system in SAP NetWeaver BW in case of a product liability issue. You can enhance this content as required.
When you activate the business function and the BW InfoAreas, you receive the following objects:
The Product Liability (PRODLIABIL) audit area with entries for ILM objects and structures (set to active)
The Product Liability (PRODLIAB_PAT_1) audit package template with entries for structures and views (set to active)
By activating the InfoAreas: InfoObjects, VirtualProviders, queries and report-report interfaces
To be able to display your data in SAP NetWeaver BW , you create an audit package for product liability to which you assign the audit package template we
provide. Based on the audit package, you then generate additional objects in SAP NetWeaver BW that you need for displaying the data.
If you want to add to the content provided, then modify the provided audit area and audit package template as needed.
For more information, see Managing Information from Legacy Systems in Retention Warehouse
More Information
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 17 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 18/148
Information Lifecycle Management (ILM) in the SAP System
ILM: Retention Warehouse Content for Tax Auditing
Technical Data
Technical Name of Business Function ILM_RWC_TAX
Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function
Available As O f SAP enhancement package 2 for SAP NetWeaver 7.0
Technical Usage Central Applications (if Used with SAP ERP)
Application Component Retention Warehouse (BC-ILM-RW)
Directly Dependent Business Function You Need to Activate Information Lifecycle Management (ILM)
Prerequisites
You have installed the following components as of the version mentioned:
Type of Component Component Remarks
Software Component SAP_BASIS 702
SAP_ABA 702
SAP NetWeav er Busines s Warehouse SAP_BW 7 02
Business Intelligence Content SAP NetWeaver 7 .0 BI Content Add-O n 5
(BI_CONT 705)
SAP NetWeaver Portal Core SAP NetWeaver 7.0 Only For Calling BW Reports from the Portal
Portal Content Business Package for Retention Warehouse Tax
Audit 1.50
Only For Calling BW Reports from the Portal
If you run SAP NetWeaver ILM and SAP NetWeaver BW in separate sys tems, you have activated this business function in both sys tems.
You have made Retention Warehouse available and extracted the data from the legacy system to be decommissioned.
For more information, see Making SAP NetWeaver ILM Available
Features
You can use this business function to establish the basis for displaying data in the ILM Retention Warehouse system that is relevant to tax auditing.
The Retention Warehouse content delivered for the tax auditing topic provides a basis that enables you to display tax auditing data from a decommissioned
SAP ERP system in SAP NetWeaver BW . You can enhance this content as required.
When you activate the business function and the BW InfoAreas, you receive the following objects:
The Tax Law (TAX) audit area with entries for IRM object types and structures (set to active)
The Tax Audit (TAX_PATTERN_1) audit package template with entries for structures and views (set to active)
By activating the InfoAreas: InfoObjects, VirtualProviders, queries and report-report interfaces
To display your data in SAP NetWeaver BW , after activating the business functions and the InfoAreas, c reate an audit package for tax auditing by assigning the
audit package templates we provide. Based on the audit package, you then generate additional objects in SAP NetWeaver BW that you need for displaying the
data.
If you want to add to the content provided, then modify the provided audit area and audit package template as needed.
For more information, see Managing Information from Legacy Systems in Retention Warehouse
More Information
Information Lifecycle Management (ILM) in the SAP System
ILM: Retention Warehouse Content for Tax Auditing in Oil andGas
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 18 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 19/148
Technical Data
Technical Name of Business Function ILM_RWC_TAX_IS_OIL
Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function
Available As O f SAP enhancement package 2 for SAP NetWeaver 7.0
Technical Usage Oil&Gas
Application Component BC-ILM-RW
Directly Dependent Business Function You Need to Activate ILM: Retention Warehouse Content for Tax Auditing (ILM_RWC_TAX)
Prerequisites
You have installed the following components:
Type of Component Component (as of version)
Software Component SAP_ABA 702
You have made Retention Warehouse available and extracted the data from the legacy system to be decommissioned.
For more information, see Making SAP NetWeaver ILM Available
Features
You can use this business function to enable SAP NetWeaver Information Lifecyc le Management (ILM) functions for archiving tax-relevant Oil and Gas data.
The archived data can be made available for reporting and analysis at a later date. This business function also activates predefined Retention Warehouse and
Business Warehouse content for tax audits of Oil and Gas data in SAP NetWeaver Information Lifecycle Management.
Activating the business function has a different effect in the ERP application system to be decommissioned and in the Retention Warehouse (RW) system):
If you activate the business function in the Retention Warehouse System, you can convert the data that was transferred from a decommissioned legacy system
to a Retention Warehouse system in an ILM-compliant manner. Only the ILM-compliant data is available for the queries that are part of checks.
If you activate this Business Function in the ERP app lication system, the sys tem assigns the IS-OIL archiving objects listed below to the audit area TAX.
To archive data using the ILM-enabled archiving objects, you must first define the appropriate retention policies for the audit area TAX.
The following archiving objects are activated for the audit area TAX:
OIG_SHPMNT
OIH_LICENC
SN_ISOIH
The IS-OIL objects audit area OIH_LICENC, OIG_SHPMNT, and SN_ISOIH belong to the audit area TAX. For this audit area, you can use the delivered audit
package templateTAX_ISOIL to build your own audit packages.
More Information
Information Lifecycle Management (ILM) in the SAP System
ILM: Retention Warehouse Content for Tax Auditing in IS-U
Technical Data
Technical Name of Business Function ILM_RWC_TAX_IS_U
Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function
Available As O f SAP enhancement package 2 for SAP NetWeaver 7.0
Technical Usage IS-U
Application Component BC-ILM-RW
Directly Dependent Business Function You Need to Activate ILM: Retention Warehouse Content for Tax Auditing (ILM_RWC_TAX)
Prerequisites
You have installed the following components as of the version mentioned:
Type of Component Component
Software Component SAP_ABA 702
You have made Retention Warehouse available and extracted the data from the legacy system to be decommissioned.
For more information, see Making SAP NetWeaver ILM Available
Note
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 19 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 20/148
Features
You can use this business function to enable SAP NetWeaver Information Lifecyc le Management (ILM) functions for archiving tax-relevant Utilities data. The
archived data can be made available for reporting and analysis at a later date. This business function also activates predefined Retention Warehouse and
Business Warehouse content for tax audits of Utilities data in SAP NetWeaver ILM .
Activating the business function has a different effect in the ERP application system to be decommissioned and in the Retention Warehouse (RW) system):
If you activate the business function in the Retention Warehouse System, you can convert the data that was transferred from a decommissioned system in an
ILM-compliant manner. Only the ILM-compliant data is available for the reporting and analysis purposes that are a part of checks.
If you activate this business function in the ERP app lication system, the sys tem assigns the Utilities archiving objects listed below to the audit area TAX.
To archive data using the ILM-enabled archiving objects, you must first define the appropriate retention policies for the audit area TAX.
The following archiving objects are activated for the audit area TAX:
ISU_BBP (Budget Billing Plans)
ISU_BILL (Billing Document Headers)
ISU_BILLZ (Billing Document Line Items)
ISU_PRDOCH (Print Document Headers)
ISU_PRDOCL (Print Document Line Items)
ISU_SETTLB (Settlement Documents)
ISU_SWTDOC (Switch Documents)
More InformationInformation Lifecycle Management (ILM) in the SAP System
Enable SAP StreamWork ABAP Integration
Technical Data
Technical Name of Business Function BC_SRV_STW_01
Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function
Available As O f SAP NetWeaver 7.02 Support Package Stack 11SAP NetWeaver 7.30 Support Package Stack 07
Technical Usage Not relevant
Application Component StreamWork ABAP Library (BC-SRV-STW)
Directly Dependent Business Function Requiring Activation in
Addition
Not relevant
Prerequisites
SAP StreamWork ABAP integration requires the enterprise edition of SAP StreamWork. Learn more about SAP StreamWork enterprise edition and pricing at
http://www.sapstreamwork.com/enterprise.
You have installed the following components:
Type of Component Component (as of version) Note
Software Component SAP_BASIS 730 Support Package Stack 07
Features
By activating the business function you enable the SAP StreamWork ABAP integration. This activates additional IMG nodes under the path Application
Services Basis Services Collaboration StreamWork Integration . Here you have to customize connectivi ty settings in order to enable applications to access
SAP StreamWork.
Enable SAP StreamWork ABAP Integration 2
Note
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 20 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 21/148
Technical Data
Technical Name of Business Function BC_SRV_STW_02
Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function
Available From SAP NetWeaver 7.02 Support Package Stack 13
SAP NetWeaver 7.30 Support Package Stack 09
Technical Usage Not relevant
Application Component Social Media ABAP Integration Library (BC-SRV-STW)
Directly Dependent Business Function Requiring Activation in
Addition
BC_SRV_STW_01
By switching on the business function, you enable the activation of additional Customizing activities under Application Services Basis Services
Collaboration .
You can make the system settings for sending SAP NetWeaver Gateway notifications to SAP StreamWork. Additional customer enhancements (Business Add-
Ins) are also available for user mapping and for the enhancement of the StreamWork Integration Library.
Prerequisites
You have installed the following components:
You have activated the business function Enable the Integration of SAP StreamWork with ABAP (BC_SRV_STW_01).
You have installed the following components:
Type of Component Component (as of version) Note
Software Component SAP_BASIS 730 Support Package Stack 09
Features
The following additional functions of the Social Media ABAP Integration Library (SAIL) are available:
You can send SAP NetWeaver Gateway notifications to a collaboration platform that works as a feed aggregator at the same time. The additional Customizing
enables you do determine for which OData service notifications will be sent.
SAIL needs an e-mail address to link user names between the backend and SAP StreamWork. You can use the BAdI: E-Mail Addresses for Backend Users
to define the mapping between the backend user name and the e-mail address (and vice versa). The default implementation of the BAdI that has been
delivered uses a BAPI to read the e-mail address from the user profile in the backend.
The object factory creates SAP StreamWork objects. You use the BAdI: StreamWork Item Factory to add the support connection for new object types that
SAIL does not yet recognize.
You use Customizing to differentiate between the application contexts. You use the application contexts to separate concurrent implementations. The entries
serve as the check table for the SCOPE filter value of the BAdI: StreamWork Item Factory . Therefore you may need a new entry as the prerequisite for your
BAdI implementation.
Enable Social Media ABAP Integration 3
Technical Data
Technical Name of Business Function BC_SRV_STW_03
Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function
Available From SAP NetWeaver 7.02 Support Package Stack 13
Technical Usage All
Application Component Social Media ABAP Integration Library (BC-SRV-STW)
Required Business Function Not relevant
You can use this business function to integrate SAP Jam in SAP ABAP applications. SAP Jam is the social collaboration platform from SAP. For integration, you
use the Social Media ABAP Integration Library (SAIL) delivered with this business function.
Integration
SAIL is an API library with several features providing the integration with SAP Jam. The features can be used by each SAP application in the ABAP
environment. The integration with SAIL is already available in some SAP applications, for example:
SAP Customer Relationship Management (SAP CRM)
For more information, see SAP Library for SAP CRM on SAP Help Portal at http://help.sap.com/crm702 Application Help . In SAP CRM Library,
choose Business Functions for SAP Customer Relationship Management Basic Functions and Performance Integration of SAP Jam with SAP CRM .
SAP Supplier Lifecycle Management (SAP SLC)
For more information, see SAP Library for SAP Supplier Lifecycle Management on SAP Help Portal at http://help.sap.com/slc113 Application
Help . In SAP Supplier Lifecycle Management Library, choose Technical Concepts Business Functions SLC, Integration with SAP StreamWork (to
use in compatibility mode with SAP Jam).
SAP ERP Human Capital Management (SAP ERP HCM)
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 21 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 22/148
For more information, see SAP Library for SAP ERP on SAP Help Portal athttp://help.sap.com/erp-addons under SAP ERP Central Component
Human Resources Personnel Management (PA) Personnel & Organization Landing Page Creating the Landing Page .
As the SAP Jam integration is also available with the Collaboration CHIPs in s ide panels for SAP Business Suite, it can be added to each SAP Bus iness Suite
application.
For more information, see SAP Library of SAP ERP on SAP Help Portal athttp://help.sap.com/erp under SAP ERP Central Component SAP ERP
Cross-Application Functions Cross-Application Components Side Panel for Business Suite .
Prerequisites
You have installed the following components with a minimum of one of the versions mentioned:
Type of Component Component (as of version) Required for the Following Features Only
Software Component SAP_BASIS 702 Support Package Stack 13
Software Component SAP NetWeaver Gateway 2.0 SP05 Send Gateway notifications
To use this business function, the following prerequisites also have to be met:
After activating the business function Enable Social Media ABAP Integration 3 (this business function), we recommend deactivating the following business
functions (if active) as the new business function also contains all of their features:
Enable SAP StreamWork ABAP Integration 1 (BC_SRV_STW_01)
Enable SAP StreamWork ABAP Integration 2 (BC_SRV_STW_02)
You need access to SAP Jam as SAP Jam integrations with SAP applications require the SAP Jam Enterprise Edition. For more information, contact your
account executive.
You have made the required settings in Customizing for the application components that you use. For additional information on specific Customizing for this
business function, see the following release notes:
BC_SRV_STW_03: Business Function Enable Social Media ABAP Integration (New)
BC_SRV_STW_03: Social Media ABAP Integration - Compatibility Mode (New)
Features
ABAP Integration with SAP Jam
By switching on the business function, additional Customizing activities are available under Application Services Basis Services Collaboration . These
Customizing settings are the prerequisites for applications using the programming interface of the Social Media ABAP Integration Library (SAIL) for SAP Jam.
ABAP Integration with SAP StreamWork for SAP Jam (Compatibility Mode)
You can also use the ABAP integration with SAP StreamWork for SAP Jam in a compatibility mode. As SAP Jam is the successor platform to SAP StreamWork,
you can continue to use SAIL with the new SAP Jam platform. Those applications that already provide the Social Media ABAP Integration with SAP StreamWork
will also run with SAP Jam as the platform.
Gateway Notifications
You can send SAP NetWeaver Gateway notifications to a collaboration platform, as SAP Jam also works as a feed aggregator. The additional Customizing
enables you to determine for which OData service notifications will be sent.
User Mapping
SAIL needs an e-mail address to link user names between the back end and SAP Jam. You can use the BAdI: E-Mail Addresses for Back-End Users to define
the mapping between the back-end user name and the e-mail address (and vice versa).
More Information
For more information about Gateway notifications, see SAP Library for SAP NetWeaver Gateway on SAP Help Portal at
http://help.sap.com/nwgateway Application Help . In SAP NetWeaver Gateway Library , choose SAP NetWeaver Gateway Developer Guide
OData Channel . Then choose the following paths:
Advanced Features Subscription and Notification Flow Subscription and Notification Flow for Push Oriented Scenarios
APIs and Coding OData Channel APIs OData Channel Push APIs
For more information about SAP Jam, see http://www.successfactors.com/jam.
Business Functions in SAP Business Suite Foundation
General Business Functions for SAP Business Suite
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 22 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 23/148
FND, Integration with SAP NetWeaver Identity Management
Technical Data
Technical Name of the Business Function FND_IDM_1
Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function
Available as of SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP Business Suite Foundation
(SAP_BS_FND 702)
Technical Usage All
Application Component User and Authorization Administration (BC-SEC-USR-ADM)
Directly Dependent Business Function Requiring Activation in
Addition
Not relevant
This business function contains information regarding the integration of SAP Business Suite 7.0 applications with SAP NetWeaver Identity Management 7.1.
Integration scenarios are available for automated user and authorization administration within a system landscape. The following applications of SAP Business
Suite 7.0 offer either new or enhanced integration scenarios:
Transfer of contact person data (for suppliers) from SAP Supply Network Collaboration to SAP NetWeaver Identity Management for creating or changing
identities.
Transfer of contact person data (for partners) from SAP Customer Relationship Management to SAP NetWeaver Identity Management for creating or changing
identities.Transfer of contact person data (for suppliers or bidders) from SAP Supplier Relationship Management to SAP NetWeaver Identity Management for creating or
changing identities.
Transfer of student data from SAP Student Lifecycle Management to SAP NetWeaver Identity Management for creating or changing identities.
Features
Transfer of c ontact person data (for suppliers) fr om SAP Supply Network Collaboration
SAP Supply Network Collaboration (as of SAP Enhancement Package 1 for SAP Supply Network Collaboration 7.0) can transfer contact person data (for
suppliers) to SAP NetWeaver Identity Management for creating or changing identities. This transfer supports both an initial load and also a continuous delta load.
From the identities, SAP NetWeaver Identity Management is able to trigger the creation and change of users with corresponding authorizations in the target
systems. Similarly, users can be locked and unlocked, roles reassigned, and passwords reset. You have the option of automating this procedure in SAP
NetWeaver Identity Management.
Transfer of contact person data (for partners) from SAP Customer Relationship Management
SAP Customer Relationship Management (as of SAP Enhancement Package 1 for SAP Customer Relationship Management 7.0) can transfer contact person
data (for partners) to SAP NetWeaver Identity Management for creating or changing identities. This transfer supports both an initial load and also a continuous delta
load.
From the identities, SAP NetWeaver Identity Management is able to trigger the creation, change, and deletion of users with corresponding authorizations in the
target systems. You have the option of automating this procedure in SAP NetWeaver Identity Management.
Transfer of contact person data (for suppliers or bidd ers) from SAP Supplier Relationship Management
SAP Supplier Relationship Management (as of SAP Enhancement Package 1 for SAP Supplier Relationship Management 7.0) can transfer contact person data
(for suppliers or bidders) to SAP NetWeaver Identity Management for creating or changing identities. This transfer supports both an initial load and also a
continuous delta load.
From the identities, SAP NetWeaver Identity Management is able to trigger the creation, change, and deletion of users with corresponding authorizations in the
target systems. You have the option of automating this procedure in SAP NetWeaver Identity Management.
Transfer of student data from SAP Student Lifecycle Management
SAP Student Lifecycle Management (as of SAP Enhancement Package 1 for SAP Student Lifecycle Management 7.0) can transfer student data to SAP
NetWeaver Identity Management for creating or changing identities. This transfer supports both an initial load and also a continuous delta load.
From the identities, SAP NetWeaver Identity Management is able to trigger the creation, change, and deletion of users with corresponding authorizations in the
target systems. You have the option of automating this procedure in SAP NetWeaver Identity Management.
Integration
These new or enhanced integration scenarios supplement the existing scenarios for a standardized user and authorization management (with the option to
automate) within a system landscape from SAP systems.
Prerequisites
For the prerequisites for the individual integration scenarios, see the scenario documentation.
More Information
For additional information about all of the integration scenarios, see the SAP Libaray under Processes and Tools for Business Applications (CA-EPT) User
Administration and Distribution with SAP NetWeaver Identity Management .
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 23 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 24/148
More information about SAP NetWeaver Identity Management can be found on the SAP Help Portal at http://help.sap.com/netweaver SAP
NetWeaver Identity Management 7.1 .
FND, SAP Workflow & Alert Management (Mobile)
Technical Data
Technical Name of Business Function FND_MOBILEINBOX_WF_1
Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function
Available As O f SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP Business Suite Foundation
(SAP_BS_FND 702)
Technical Usage Any Stack inc luding BS_FND
Application Component BS_FND
Directly Dependent Business Function Requiring Activation in
Addition
Human Capital Management (EA-HR)
You can use this business function to react to workflow and alert messages by performing the required activities directly from your smartphones.
Prerequisites
You have installed the following software components as of the version mentioned:
SAP_BS_FND 702
SAP_ABA 702
SAP_BASIS 702
You have made the appropriate settings regarding roles and authorizations.
Features
SAP Workflow
Approve or reject workflow items (for example, travel and leave requests)
Receive notifications of missed workflow-related deadlines
Alert Management
Display alert messages
Set alert messages to status complete
FND, SAP Document Builder
Technical Data
Technical Name of Business Function /IPRO/FND_DOCUMENT_BUILDER
Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function
Available As O f SAP Enhancement Package 2 for BS Foundation
Technical Usage Any Stack inc luding BS_FND
Application Component SAP Business Foundation (SAP_BS_FND)
Directly Dependent Business Function Requiring Activation in
Addition
Not relevant
You can use this business function to create legally compliant documents using a customer-defined, standardized process, reducing the risk and cost of legal
actions resulting from inconsistent or nonstandardized processes and documents. Using cockpits, reviews, reports, and workflows, SAP Document Builder
streamlines procurement processes and makes them transparent throughout the document generation process. The standardization and streamlining of processes
increases compliance with internal and external standards, rules, and regulations while cutting the cost of producing complex documents. SAP Document Builder
also eliminates the need for a third-party document authoring solution and associated integration maintenance costs. SAP Document Builder offers both automatic
and manual document generation, as well as both single and mass document generation.
Prerequisites
You have installed the following software components as of the version mentioned: SAP_BS_ FND 702, SAP_ABA 702, and SAP_BASIS 702.
Depending on what forms you want to integrate, you must install the following:
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 24 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 25/148
If you want to integrate Microsoft Word 2003 forms, you must install Microsoft Word 2003. If you want to edit clauses using Microsoft Word, you must also install
the Microsoft DSO Framer ActiveX Control.
If you want to integrate Adobe forms, you must install the SAP NetWeaver-based Adobe LiveCycle Designer.
If you want to combine PDF forms with text-based clauses to form an assembled legal document, you must use Adobe LiveCycle PDF Generator or a similar
third-party product.
You make the Customizing settings for this function in Customizing for SAP Document Builder under the following structure nodes:
SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Cross-Application Components Document Builder Basic Functions
SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Cross-Application Components Document Builder Regulation Sets and Elements
SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Cross-Application Components Document Builder Document Management
SAP Customizing Implementation Guide Cross-Application Components Document Builder Business Add-Ins
Features
Document Generation
You can create simp le and complex documents using customer-defined formats, templates, and c lause content. SAP Document Builder dynamically creates
legally compliant documents based on templates or business rules, enabling standardized content, formats, and process flows. Centralized templates and content
allow more visibility into processes from start to finish thanks to the traceability of actions and versions. Processes are streamlined and legal review time is saved.
Document accessib ility is controlled using roles, tailoring the user exp erience to your needs.
FND_SOA_REUSE_1: Improvements for SOA Reuse Functions
Technical Data
Technical Name of Business Function FND_SOA_REUSE_1
Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function
Available As O f SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP Business Suite Foundation
(SAP_BS_FND 702)
Technical Usage Any stack including BS_FND
Application Component Enterprise SOA (CA-SOA)
Directly Dependent Business Function Requiring Activation in
Addition
Not relevant
You can use this business function to take advantage of cross-application tool improvements that facilitate the deployment of enterprise services. These include
enhancements to existing tools (Service Mapping Tool, Error and Conflict Handler), as well as new functions for categorizing error messages and asynchronous
point-to-point communication.
Prerequisites
You have installed the following components as of the version mentioned:
Type of Component Component
Software Component SAP_BS_FND 702
SAP_ABA 702
SAP_BASIS 702
Features
Service Mapping Tool
The Service Mapping Tool (SMT) enables you to fill target structures by using sets of source structures. For example, you can use it to convert enterprise service
data into an SAP-internal format, and vice versa. This business function adds the following features to the configuration component:
On the configuration user interface, you can toggle between the internal ABAP structure view (generated proxy structure) and the external representation
originating from a service interface (element names).
You can sort the tree display of a source or target structure alphabetically by field name.
You can assign the source field to the corresponding target field by dragging and dropping within the configuration user interface.
You can generate a where-used list of the relevant configuration entities (such as condition, transformation, conversion, and field check class) for a given
package group.
A where-used list is available for mapping s teps that are used by enterprise services. You can see all the service interfaces and operations that use a
specific mapping step.
You make the Customizing settings for this function under Cross-Application Components Processes and Tools for Enterprise Applications Enterprise
Services Develop Enterprise Services Create and Edit Mappings.
For more information, see SAP Library for SAP ERP on SAP Help Portal at http://help.sap.com/erp SAP ERP Enhancement Packages ERP
Central Component Enhancement Package 5 Processes and Tools for Enterprise Applications Mappings for Enterprise Services.
Error and Conflict Handler (Forward Error Handling)
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 25 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 26/148
You can use the Error and Conflict Handler (ECH) to process errors that are detected during the execution of asynchronous enterprise services. It enables you to
resolve errors and conflicts on the provider side, either automatically, or with the involvement of a business user. This business function adds the following features
to the Error and Conflict Handler:
You can use your own settings to overwrite the settings for the standard business processes for forward error handling.
You can define your own business processes for forward error handling in the Postprocessing Office.
You can register for enterprise services that support forward error handling.
Usability and user interface improvements are available for the Payload Editor.
You make the Customizing settings for these features under Cross-Application Components Processes and Tools for Enterprise Applications Enterprise
Services Error and Conflict Handler.
For more information, see SAP Library for SAP ERP on SAP Help Portal at http://help.sap.com/erp SAP ERP Enhancement Packages ERP Central Component Enhancement Package 5 Processes and Tools for Enterprise Applications Error and Conflict Handler (CA-FS-ECH).
Error Categorizer
You can use the Error Categorizer to classify error messages that are displayed when service operations are processed. This enables you to override the fixed
assignment of error categories to error messages.
You make the Customizing settings for this component under Cross-Application Components Processes and Tools for Enterprise Applications Enterprise
Services Error Categorizer.
In the enhancement spot ES_BS_SOA_ERR_CAT, the Business Add-In (BAdI) BSSOA_ERR_CAT_BADI is available. You can use this to change the results
determined by the Error Categorizer.
Asynchronous Point-to-Point Communication
This business function includes additional features that enable you to trigger asynchronous enterprise services through the Web service protocol, without using a
mediator (such as SAP NetWeaver Process Integration):
The Response Receiver Correlation Manager enables you to register an incoming request or query. This registration can be picked up in the correspondingconfirmation or response message to control how the response message is routed.
In-app lication sequencing ensures that incoming messages are p rocessed in the correct order at application level. If a new message arrives, but a p receding
message is missing, it places the new message in a queue until the missing message arrives.
You can assign the point-to-point enabled services to service groups, and use this group definition to configure the services in the SOA Manager component. A
new wrapper class for outgoing service calls bundles the logical ports generated through this group configuration.
You make the Customizing settings for these features under Cross-Application Components Processes and Tools for Enterprise Applications Enterprise
Services Point-to-Point Enablement for Asynchronous Enterprise Services.
In addition, you need to set up endpoints for your point-to-point enabled enterprise services, and configure the corresponding logical port in another client of your
ABAP system. You make these settings using transaction SOAMANAGER. For more information, see SAP Library for SAP NetWeaver on SAP Help Portal at
http://help.sap.com/netweaver SAP NetWeaver 7.0 (2004s) SAP NetWeaver 7.0 including Enhancement Package 2 and search for Working with
the SOA Manager.
FND, Visual Business
Technical Data
Technical Name of Business Function FND_VISUAL_BUSINESS
Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function
Available As O f SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP 6.0
Technical Usage Any Stack inc luding SAP_BS_FND 702
Application Component CA-GTF-VBZ
Directly Dependent Business Function Requiring Activation in
Addition
Not relevant
You can use this business function to take advantage of SAP Visual Business applications that visualize data from SAP and external data sources on a single
screen. Visual Business applic ations not only combine different types of content, but also include interactive graphics that visualize and combine enterprise data
with geographical or three-dimensional real-world scenes. SAP app lications integrate Visual Business applications to depict their business processes visually.
You can use the business function to configure Visual Business applications. Once the applications are configured, they can be executed within the integrating
applications.
Prerequisites
You have installed the following components as of the version mentioned:
Type of Component Component Is Needed Only for the Following Features
Software Component SAP_BS_FND 702
3rd Party Framework Microsoft .NET Framework 3.5 SP1
Front-End Component SAP Visual Business 1.1
To use this business function, you have to activate it.
Features
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 26 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 27/148
After you activated the business function, Customizing for configuring Visual Business app lications becomes available. Make the corresponding settings in
Customizing for Cross-Application Components under Processes and Tools for Enterprise Applications → Visual Business :
Maintain Default Proxy Settings
Assign Map Products to Visual Business Applications
Note that the Visual Business applications can be executed within the integrating applications only if they are configured.
More Information
For general information about SAP Visual Business see:
SAP Library at http://help.sap.com → SAP Business Suite → Processes and Tools for Enterprise Applications (CA-EPT) → SAP Visual Business
For information about the features realized in a particular integrating application, see the corresponding documentation in SAP Library.
Master Data Governance, Generic Functions
Technical Data
Technical Name of Business Function MDG_FOUNDATION
Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function
Available From SAP enhancement package 2 for SAP Business Foundation 7.0
Technical Usage None
Application Component Master Data Governance (CA-MDG)
Directly Dependent Business Function Requiring Activation in
Addition
None
This business function enables you to use basic functions, including the following:
Enterprise-wide centralized managing of master data using SAP Business Workflow
Safeguarding of data quality
Replicating of master data in target systems
Documenting of master data changes
This provides your enterprise with the following benefits, which reduce your total cost of ownership (TCO):
More efficient master data management
Improved compliance with the fundamentals of adequate enterprise governance
Automated, secure, and documented replication of master dataThis business function is a prerequisite for using the following business functions with their preconfigured data models:
Master Data Governance for Financials, Organizational Units (FIN_MDM_ORG)
Master Data Governance for Material (MDG_MATERIAL)
Master Data Governance for Supplier (ERP) (MDG_ERP_SUPPLIER)
This business function enables you to customize the preconfigured data models to meet your requirements and create your own data models without a template.
Integration
Once the business function is activated, you can make the following settings in Customizing under Cross-Application Components Processes and Tools for
Enterprise Applications Master Data Governance General Settings .
In the target systems, you activate the business functions that are relevant to your applications. For example, if you use the business function
MDG_ERP_SUPPLIER in the central system, you can activate the bus iness functionCA_SUPPLIER_SOA in the target system.
Prerequisites
You have installed the software component SAP Business Suite Foundation (SAP_BS_FND), version 702 or later.
If you have activated the business function Financial Master Data Management: Charts of Accounts (FIN_MDM_ACC), you need to make some changeovers (for
example, from UI models to UI configurations) before you can activate the given business function. For more information about the changeovers, see the Release
Note MDG_FOUNDATION: Master Data Governance, Generic Functions.
Features
When you activate this business function, the following functions from the Master Data Governance (CA-MDG) component become available:
Generic Basic Functions
Enhance Existing Master Data Models or Create Your O wn
You can enhance the data models delivered by SAP (for example, by adding custom fields) and you can create your own data models and use them in the
change processes.
Change Request
You use change requests to change master data using workflow-based change processes. Q uality assurance reports on the change process are available.
You also can process change requests using SAP Interactive Forms by Adobe.
Data Replication Framework ( DRF)
The DRF is the technical platform for replicating the master data processed in a change request. You can use filters to make unrestricted and very granular
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 27 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 28/148
data selections, for example, to replicate the data of certain company codes in very specific systems.
Key Mapping
Function for mapping values determined at runtime (for example, business partner IDs or material numbers) in the central system and target system.
Value Mapping
Function for mapping values determined at the time of design. While configuring the central system (in Customizing), you define, for example, country codes
and map these to their counterparts located in the target system. The application-spec ific enterprise services use value mapping.
Changing and Replicating of Master Data
Master Data Governance enables you to change master data in workflow processes. You can assign authorizations to these workflow processes. The workflow
processes are documented for reviewing purposes.
The system manages and documents all change steps in a change request.
You can access and edit the change requests from within a worklist in the portal.
You can replicate master data changes from the central system, in which you make and manage the changes, to the target systems. The DRF enables the
automated replication of data. You can run such replications either on a regular basis or on demand. When doing so, you can use filters to determine which
objects are to be replicated in which systems. In addition to IDocs and enterprise services, you also can use upload and download functions to replicate the
master data changes to the target systems.
Business Foundation for Services for Supplier
Technical Data
Technical Name of Business Function CA_SUPPLIER_SOA
Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function
Available As O f SAP Business Suite Foundation 7.02 (SAP_BS_FND 702)
Technical Usage Any Stack inc luding BS_FND
Application Component CA-MDG-BP
Directly Dependent Business Function Requiring Activation in
Addition
Not relevant
You can use this b usiness function to activate the BAdIs for customer specific mapping of the supp lier replication services.
Prerequisites
You have installed the following components as of the version mentioned:
Type of Component Component Is Needed Only for the Following Features
Software Component SAP_BS_FND
Features
With this business function BAdIs are offered to implement a customer specific mapping to override the standard mapping of the listed services
Enhancements for Business Suite Analytics
Technical Data
Technical Name of the Business Function FND_ANALYTICS_TOOLS
Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function
Available as of SAP Business Foundation 7.02 (SAP_BS_FND 702)
Technical Usage Any Stack inc luding BS_FND
Application Component BTD0000132 (CA-EPT-ANL-ACT)
Directly Dependent Business Function Requiring Activation in
Addition
Not relevant
With this business function you can use new tools for working with BI Content:
The BI Content activation workbench enables you to activate BI Content bundles according to business criteria.The scalability level configuration allows you to define the method used by the system to access data during the execution of a BW query.
You can use the Analytics List Component generic user interface building b lock (GUIBB) in Floorplan Manager (FPM) to embed analytical and p lanning
content into transactional applications without development effort, thereby reducing total cost of deployment (TCD).
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 28 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 29/148
Prerequisites
You have installed the following components as of the version specified:
Type of Component Component Only Required for Following Functions
Software Component SAP_BS_FND 702
Features
BI Content activation workbench
You can use the BI Content activation workbench to activate and search the BI Content that is provided by SAP and grouped according to various business
categories. The BI Content bundles provided contain all BI objects that are needed to analyze a particular business area.
For more information, see BI Content Activation Workbench
Scalability level configuration
The scalability level configuration helps you to determine the method used by MultiProviders to access data during the execution of a BW query. You can define
the default access type at MultiProvider or query level and can also define the access type assigned to certain InfoProviders.
Make these settings before you use configured queries in the Query Monitor (transaction RSRT), for example.
For more information, see Scalability Level Configuration
Analytics List Component
You can use the Analytics List Component generic user interface building block (GUIBB) in Floorplan Manager (FPM) to embed analytical and planning content
into transactional applications without development effort, thereby reducing total cost of deployment (TCD).
An application based on the Analytics Lis t Component is availab le for simple lis t reporting. The report displays data based on a BI query selection in SAP List
Viewer (ALV) format. You can enter the BI query as an application parameter or at runtime. In addition to the SAP List Viewer (ALV) basic functions, for example,
data display in Crystal Reports format or export to Microsoft Excel, the simple list report supports navigation to other targets using the report-report interface (RRI).
You can change the application configuration to meet your requirements. Such changes are modification-free.
You can also build your own applications using the Analytics List Component in any Floorplan Manager application. For example:
Advances analytical app lications with multiple simple list components and using the search component for variable input
Advanced planning applications, including planning functions (for planning-enabled BI queries in BI-integrated planning, the analytics lis t component becomes
input-enabled)
Analytics and planning appl ications embedded into transactional app lications
For more information, see Analytics List Component for Floorplan Manager .
FND, Business Context Viewer Main Application
Technical Data
Technical Name of Business Function /BCV/MAIN
Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function
Available From SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP
Technical Usage Any Stack inc luding BS_FND 70 2
Application Component Business Context Viewer (CA-EPT-BCV)
Required Business Function Not relevant
Incompatible Business Function Not relevant
You can use this business function to activate Business Context Viewer (BCV) in your system. Business Context Viewer (BCV) is a framework that allows all
SAP Business Suite applications to integrate different kinds of additional information into the context of their applications. This information can be then analyzed
according to the user's business needs. You can display the analytic information in the form of charts, forms, pictures, and tables. You can integrate Xcelsius
dashboards into BCV.
Business Context Viewer (BCV) offers a configuration center where you can configure the way the system retrieves and displays the business data that you want
to perform analyses on. The configuration center is a single point of entry for all of the activities that a regular user and administrator of BCV might need. In addition,
you can use the configuration center to perform and display analyses of your business data for testing purposes.
BCV offers the side panel which is embedded into the application that you use BCV from. By opening the side panel you can access your query views, elements
on the Overview accordion item, query view hierarchies, dashboards, and favorites directly from the app lication using BCV.
Integration
Being a successor application to Product-Centric View (PCV) that was part of enhancement package 4 for SAP ERP 6.0, Business Context Viewer is integrated
with SAP Product Lifecycle Management (SAP PLM) 7 .01.
Note
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 29 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 30/148
Since BCV is part of the Business Suite Foundation (BS_FND) software layer, it can b e integrated into any application using Web Dynpro ABAP.
Prerequisites
You have installed the following components as of the version mentioned:
Type of Component Component Required for the Following Features Only
Software Component BS_FND 702
Portal Content Business Package for Common Parts 1.5
Features
Configuration Center
You use the configuration center to set up search connectors, BCV queries, and query views, and execute these objects for testing purposes. Furthermore, you
can perform administrative activities, such as checking the consistency of BCV objects, testing BCV queries and search connectors, grant authorizations, and so
on. For more information, see Configuration Center .
Side Panel
The side panel provides access to BCV directly from the application that uses it. For more information, see Side Panel.
Authorization Concept
BCV has a flexible authorization concept that allows authorizations to be granted and taken away at different levels. For more information, see AuthorizationConcept in Business Context Viewer (BCV).
Business Content
The applications using BCV deliver predefined business content that you can use as it is, or change according to your business needs. For more information, see
Business Content for Business Context Viewer .
FND, Multiple Back-End Capabilities for Inbox
Technical Data
Technical Name of the Business Function FND_IBO_MULTIBE_1
Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function
Available As O f SAP Business Foundation 7.02 (SAP_BS_FND 702)
Technical Usage Any Stack inc luding BS_FND
Application Component Suite Inbox (CA-EPT-IBO)
Required Business Function Not relevant
You can use this b usiness function to process work items from multiple back -end systems, for example, SAP Supplier Relationship Management (SAP SRM)
and SAP ERP, in a single POWL-based inbox. With a single inbox, you have a better overview of all the work items you need to process.
If you deactivate this business function, the data stored in Customizing is not deleted and you can reuse it if you decide to activate the business function again.
When you activate/deactivate the business function, you must do the following:
1. Log off from the sys tem and log on again.
2. Restart the inbox.
Only then the activation/deactivation of the business function will be taken into account.
Prerequisites
You have installed the following components as of the version specified:
Type of Component Component Only Required for Following Functions:
Software Component SAP_BS_FND 702
You have performed the following activities in Customizing under Cross-Application Components Processes and Tools for Enterprise Applications Inbox
:
Define Exceptions
Note
Note
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 30 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 31/148
Assign Connected Back-End Sys tems to Inbox
You have assigned the following roles to your users:
Workflow Inbox APIs: End User for Workflow Functionality (SAP_BC_BMT_WFM_INB_API_END_USR)
This enables users to receive work items from a remote system via the workflow Application Programming Interface (API).
Workflow Inbox APIs: Service User for Remote Accesses (SAP_BC_BMT_WFM_INB_API_SRV_USR)
This enables the workflow Application Programming Interface (API) to handle work items of users to which this role has been assigned via remote function
calls.
You must assign the above roles to the users if you want them to receive work items from the back-end systems. If you omit this step, the users will not receive
any work items from the back-end sys tems.
Features
You use a single inbox for multiple back-end sys tems.
You can deploy the inbox with or without SAP NetWeaver Portal.
For more information, see Inbox (CA-EPT-IBO).
Specific Business Functions for SAP ERP
PSM, Budget Period
Technical Data
Technical name of the business function PSM_GEN_BUDPER_1
Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function
Available as of SAP enhancement package 4 for SAP ERP 6.0
Technical Usage Public Sector Accounting
Application Component Funds Management Government (PSM-FM)
Directly Dependent Business Function Requiring Activation In
Addition
EA-PS
You can implement this business function to take advantage of a new master data entity called the budget period, which supplies modules in public sector
accounting.
The new entity allows recording the time of budget and its execution, independent of fiscal year considerations.
Prerequisites
You have installed the following components as of the version mentioned:
Type of Component Component Is Needed Only for the Following Features
Software Component EA-PS 604
FI-CA 604
IS-PS-CA 604
SAP_APPL 604
Business Intelligence Content From SAP NetWeaver 7 .0 BI Content Add-O n 4
Features
The business function offers the following features:
Budget period as separate master data entity in Public Sector Management (PSM)
This new master data object is made available in the Budget Control System (BCS) and in many budget execution processes. It is recorded in budget and
commitment/actuals figures in Funds Management (FM) and can serve as a balancing entity in the new General Ledger (G/L). Expiry and cancellation date
functions have been moved from the fund to the budget period.
Enhanced budgeting and active availability control if you are using BCS
A field for the new entity has been added to all relevant user interfaces in BCS. This includes, but is not limited to, the central budget document transaction
FMBB. Budgets can be distinguished by means of the budget period, enabling you to have a budget from the same account assignment cycle, valid for more
than one fiscal year.
Enhanced financial and budgetary accounting
Existing user interfaces that display the FM account assignments (such as fund and funds center) have been enhanced to include the new assignment budget
period in the area of MM, SD, RE, FI, AM, CO, HR, FM. This includes all places where the coding block is used.
Enhancements to the US Federal Government solution
All Federal-specific functions that display the FM account assignments have been enhanced to include the new budget period account assignment element.
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 31 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 32/148
More Information
Read the budget period documentation to obtain detailed information on where and how the budget period is used.
PSM, Budget Period 2
Technical Data
Technical Name of Business Function PSM_GEN_BUDPER_2
Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function
Available as of SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP Business Suite Foundation 702
(SAP_BS_FND 702)
Technical Usage Any stack including BS_FND
Application Component Funds Management (PSM-FM)
Directly Dependent Business Function Requiring Activation in
Addition
PSM, Budget Period (PSM_GEN_BUDPER_1)
With this business function you can use the master data entity of the budget period that populates the modules in Public Sector Accounting. With the budgetperiod introduced with business function PSM, Budget Period (PSM_GEN_BUDPER_1), you can move the date controls from the fund to the budget period. This
makes master data maintenance and reporting much easier. With this business function, the budget period is also now available in Travel Management (FI-TM),
Controlling (CO), Grantor Management (PSM-GM-GTR) integrated with accounts receivable or accounts payable management, and in Enterprise Services for
Human Capital Management (HCM).
Prerequisites
You have installed the following components as of the version given:
Type of Component Component Is Needed Only for the Following Features
Software Component SAP_BS_FND 702
You activated the PSM, Budget Period 2 bus iness function.
You activated the PSM, Budget Period bus iness function.
Features
Budget period in Controlling (CO)
The budget period was added to the transactions of Overhead Cost Controlling (CO-OM) where account assignments of Funds Management (fund, functional area,
grant) are displayed. This includes the activity allocation, overhead costs and planning transactions.
You can now enter the corresponding budget period as the account assignment directly in a document in these transactions instead of just deriving it. The
complete account assignment is then updated in Financial Accounting (FI) and in Funds Management (FM).
The following transactions and functions were enhanced accordingly:
CO commitment: The budget period is now also contained in the commitment data in CO.
Activity allocation: The budget period is now available in the following transactions:
Direct activity allocation (see Cost Center Accounting/internal orders/project system Controlling: Actual postings activity allocation ), CATS and
confirmations
Indirect activity allocation posting (see Cost Center Accounting/internal orders/project system Controlling: Actual postings activity allocation posting
)
Actual clearings: In the wake of the enhancement of activity allocation with the budget period, the following actual clearings were also adjusted accordingly (see
Cost Center Accounting/internal orders/ project system Controlling: Period-end c losing Individual functions )
Indirect activity allocation in actual
Target=actual-activity allocation
Template clearing in actual
Price calculation including revaluation
Overhead rates in actual (periodic and real-time) were also enhanced with the new budget period dimension. These are the following transactions (see Cost
Center Accounting/internal orders/project system Controlling: Period-end c losing Individual functions ):
Actual overhead calculation:cost centers/activity types
Commitment-overhead calculation:cost centers/activity types
Actual-overhead calculation: Order
Actual-overhead calculation: Business processes
Commitment-overhead calculation: Project, WBS element, network
Actual-overhead calculation: Project, WBS element, network
CO manual planning:
You can now also use the budget period in the following CO planning transactions (see Cost Center Accounting/Internal Orders/Project System
Controlling: Planning )
Planning cost elements/activity input
Statistical k ey figures
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 32 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 33/148
To be able to use the budget period in CO planning, use the new planning profile SAPFFB CO planning with budget period . We recommend that you import
these layouts using transaction OKBF ( Controlling General Controlling Production Start-Up Preparation Transport System Settings Transport
Settings for Planning Import Standard Planning Layouts ) from client 000 into the current clients. This refers to the following layouts: 1-101FFB, 1-
102FFB, 1-301FFB, 1-302FFB, 1-401FFB, 1-401FFB-T, 1-402FFB, 1-402FFB-T, 1-403FFB, 1-403FFB-T, 1-601FFB, 1-701FFB, 1-701FFB-T, 1-
702FFB, 1-702FFB-T, 1-703FFB, 1-703FFB-T, 1-901FFB.
The above-mentioned planning profile is designed for dimensions fund, budget period, and functional area; it does not include grant. If you want to use the
grant, we recommend copying the required layouts and adding the grant as a selection criterion.
Periodic p lan clearings, planning aid:
The following plan clearings and planning aids were enhanced with the new account assignment dimension budget period (see activity allocation/internal
orders/Project System Controlling: Planning ):
Planning distribution, p lanning assessment, periodic transfer posting in plan
Indirect activity allocation in plan
Overhead rates in p lan (see above also: Overhead rates in actual)
Plan-settlement
Copy Planning
Plan-revaluation
Template clearing in p lan
CO general:
Both the plan BAPIs and the corresponding ALE methods now contain the budget period.
The CATS transfer was also enhanced with the budget period.
You can now also use the budget period in the actual settlement order (transaction KO88).
Budget Period in Grantor Management (PSM-GM-G TR)
The budget period is applied during invoicing to accounts receivable/accounts payable accounting. For this, the following integration scenarios are available:
Integration with PSM Earmarked Funds:
When an earmarked fund is created, PSM account assignment derivation is used to determine the budget period from the CRM approval. When this business
function has been activated, invoicing to accounts receivable/accounts payable accounting app lies the budget period from the earmarked funds and c reates
the FI document.
No Integration with PSM Earmarked Funds:
When this business function has b een activated, invoicing to accounts receivable/accounts payab le accounting derives the budget period using PSM account
assignment derivation and enters the budget period in the FI document created.
The budget period is available immediately for grantor management, including in cases using rule-based account assignment distribution:
You can use the budget period as a condition field in the definition of the program profile.
You can use the budget period as a field in the definition of rule-based account assignment distribution.
Budget period in SOA Services of Human Capital Managements (HCM)
The budget period is now available in several HCM SOA services, including services for business objects Employee Time Sheet and Work Agreement .
Human Capital Master Data Management
Cancel Accounting Coding Block Distribution Rule
Find Accounting Coding Block Distribution Rule By Employee
Create Accounting Coding Block Distribution Rule
Update Accounting Coding Block Distribution Rule
Time & Labor Management (Employee Time Sheet)
Change Time Sheet
Complete Employee Time Sheet
Find Employee Time Sheet By Employee
Check Change Time Sheet
Time & Labor Management (Employee Time)
Find Times For Employee Time Sheet By Elements
Read Employee Time By Employee
Time & Labor Management (Employee Time Agreement)
Create Time Recording Completion Rule
Read Time Recording Completion Rule
Time & Labor Management (Employee Time Sheet Configuration)
Read Employee Time Sheet Configuration
Budget period in Travel Management
You can now enter the corresponding budget period as the account assignment directly in a document instead of just deriving it.
The budget period was added to transactions in Travel Management in which Funds Management account assignments (fund, functional area, funds center, and
so on) are disp layed. This includes infotype 0017 (travel p rivileges), distribution in travel request, the travel plan and the travel expenses sheet. You can hereby
enter the corresponding budget period as the account assignment directly in a document instead of just deriving it. The complete account assignment is then
updated in Financial Accounting (FI) and in Funds Management (FM).
More Information
For more information, see the documentation on Budget Period and Budget Period in Human Capital Management.
Note
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 33 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 34/148
Embedded Search in SAP ERP
Technical Data
Technical Name of the Business Function ERP_ENTERPRISESEARCH
Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function
Available as of SAP Business Suite Foundation 7.01
Technical Usage Central applications
Application Component Processes and Tools for Business Applications (CA-EPT)
Directly Dependent Business Function Requiring Activation in
Addition
Not relevant
You can use this business function to implement a faster and safer search function for business objects in SAP ERP (for example, materials or orders). This
search function supports both a full text search and a fuzzy search, and, by means of the authorization concept, ensures that only authorized persons have
access to your data.
For more information about Embedded Search, see Search.
Prerequisites
You have installed the following components from the version specified:
Type of Component Component Only Required for Following Functions
Software Component SAP_BS_FND 701 Technical requirement for the Embedded Search
function; installation of this software component is
mandatory
SAP_APPL 604 Use of these software components depends on the
business process; installation of the software
components is optionalEA-APPL 604
EA-HRGXX 604
PLMWUI 700
IS-MEDIA 604
In the Enterprise Search Cockpit (transaction ESH_COCKPIT), you have activated the search using Embedded Search for the required business objects. To do
this, on the SAP Easy Access sc reen, choose Tools Administration Monitor Search Engine Enterprise Search Cockpit .
See SAP Note 965097 if you want to use the Embedded Search function.
ERP, PDF-Based Forms
Technical Data
Technical Name of the Business Function ERP_ALL_PDF_FORMS
Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function
Available as of SAP Enhancement Package 4 for SAP ERP 6.0
Technical Usage Dependent on required business area
Business function requir ing activation in addition Not relevant
With this business function you can provide your SAP ERP users with forms in output format PDF. With the new technology you can optimize and standardize
your internal and external communication and your business processes, based on the output format PDF, which is available internationally.
You can use PDF-based forms for display in the application, as well as for printing. You receive additional options for layout, the forms have a contemporary
appearance, and make handling simpler for the users.
This business function is different to other business functions as follows:
The PDF-based forms are provided via Customizing, and not via this business function. Therefore you cannot activate this business function.
There is no test catalog available for this business function.
Integration
Note
Note
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 34 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 35/148
The PDF-based forms are available for most applications of SAP ERP. Some country versions are an execption.
Prerequisites
You have installed the following components from the version specified:
Type of Component Component Only Required for Following Functions
Software Component Dependent on required business area
SAP NetWeaver Adobe Document Services
SAP NetWeaver Adobe Lifecycle Designer 7.1*
SAP NetWeaver SAP NetWeaver 7.0: JDK 1.4.2
SAP NetWeaver 7.1: JVM based on 5.0 Standard
Third-Party Product Adobe Reader®**
* Adobe Livecycle Designer must be installed on all computers on which reports are c reated at design time.
** Adobe Reader ® must be installed on all computers on which the forms are to be displayed. You can download it from the Adobe™ Homepage.
Features
You can introduce the PDF-based forms in your company dependent on your requirements. This means that you can activate the PDF-based forms dependent
on the business process or department that you want to support. You do this by importing the relevant ECC software component versions, and by activating the
forms for each application component in Customizing. The system changes the user interfaces over when you activate an application component. For more
information see the Implementation Guide under Cross-Application Components Processes and Tools for Enterprise Applications PDF-Based Forms for
SAP ERP Activate PDF-Based Forms.
For an overview of all forms provided from SAP Enhancement Package 4 for SAP ERP 6.0, use the report RERP_EHP_SHOW_FORM_LIST. If you have to
postprocess the forms before implementing them, from the output list of the report you can navigate to the related activity of the Implementation Guide or the
corresponding transaction. The prerequisite is that you have imported the corresponding ECC software component version (for example, EA-HR 604) for the
business area.
The PDF-based forms offer the following advantages:
With PDF, you can run you internal and external company communication with forms in a recognized industry standard. In addition, they offer a uniform
appearance across all areas of your company.
You have extended options for the layout of a form. This means that, with the PDF-based forms, you can map existing templates pixel for pixel or integrate
digital signatures. Setting the layout of a PDF-based form is also usually simpler and more cost-effective and you only need one technology to design your
forms.
You receive enhanced, uniform print functions that meet the requirements of different business areas.
You can archive PDF-based forms easily and uniformly.
You can send the form as an e-mail.
You can convert a display/print form into an interactive form.
ERP, New Interface for ABAP Lists
Technical Data
Technical Name of the Business Function ERP_ALL_LISTS
Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function
Available as of Enhancement Package 4 for SAP ERP 6.0
Technical Usage Central applications
Application Component Cross-application Components (CA)
Business Function Requiring Activation in Addition Not relevant
You can use this b usiness function to standardize and harmonize the user interaction with ABAP l ists. Many lis ts already delivered will be replaced b y (mainly
ALV) lists that improve the user-friendliness and usability. This enables you to reduce training costs.
Prerequisites
You have installed the following components as of the version specified:
Type of Component Component Only Required for Following Functions
Software Component SAP_BS_FND 701
To use this business function, you have to activate it. The switch used is a simple soft switch. The switch can be reversed; no coding is changed.
FeaturesVarious ABAP lists already delivered have received a new interface. Many of the lists delivered by SAP have very individual graphic disp lay and interaction
options. With the new interface, these display options are harmonized and standardized so that the user can take advantage of the capabilities of the list without
knowing the individual functions of each list.
When you activate the business function, the new interface will be used as standard for ABAP lists. For some of these lists, you can subsequently define (mostly
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 35 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 36/148
at report level), whether you want to use the new interface or one of the ABAP lists previously delivered.
This might make sense for the following reasons:
The users may know the appearance of a list well and not want a new interface.
In some cases, the standardization of specialized user interfaces means you then have to do without individual functions. Users may prefer to retain individual
functions and accept that interfaces are not standardized.
For more information, see SAP Note 1180432.
There is no test catalog available for this business function.
There is no object list available for this business function. However, a list of groups of functions in question is available. The attributes of these groups depend
on the respective application area. You can display the list in the VERPSOFTSWITCHES view (Group ID ALLISTS). In this view, you can activate or
deactivate the switch for each individual group.
Example
ERP, New User Interface for ABAP Lists
Technical Data
Technical Name of Business Function ERP_ALL_LISTS_2
Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function
Available As O f SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP 6.0
Technical Usage Central applications
Application Component Cross-application Components (CA)
Directly Dependent Business Function Requiring Activation in
Addition
Not relevant
You can use this b usiness function to standardize and harmonize the user interaction with ABAP l ists. Several lists already delivered will be replaced by (mainly
ALV) lists that improve the user-friendliness and usability. This enables you to reduce training costs.
Prerequisites
You have installed the following components as of the version mentioned:
Type of Component Component Is Needed Only for the Following Features
Software Component SAP_BS_FND 702
To use this business function, you have to activate it.
Features
New User Interface for ABAP Lists
Various ABAP lists already delivered have received a new interface. Many of the lists delivered by SAP have very individual graphic disp lay and interaction
options. With the new interface, these display options are harmonized and standardized so that the user can take advantage of the capabilities of the list without
knowing the individual functions of each list.
When you activate the business function, the new interface will be used as standard for ABAP lists. For some of these lists, you can subsequently define (mostly
at report level), whether you want to use the new interface or one of the ABAP lists previously delivered.
This might make sense for the following reasons:
The users may know the appearance of a list well and not want a new interface.
In some cases, the standardization of specialized user interfaces means you then have to do without individual functions. Users may prefer to retain individual
functions and accept that interfaces are not standardized.
For more information, see SAP Note 1302424.
The former business function ERP_ALL_LISTS is still valid. For more information on ERP_ALL_LISTS, see SAP Note 1180432.
There is no test catalog available for this business function.
Note
Note
Note
Note
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 36 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 37/148
ERP, Roles for SAP NetWeaver Business Client
Technical Data
Technical Name of the Business Function ERP_NWBC_ROLES
Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function
Available As O f SAP enhancement package 2 for SAP Business Suite Foundation 7.0
Technical Usage Dependent on required business area
Application Component See documentation for the individual roles
Required Business Function See documentation for the individual roles
This business function does not activate any functions. It is for information purposes only.
As of SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 6.0, you can use the following roles in SAP NetWeaver Business Client (NWBC):
Expenditure Certification
Automotive Dealer Portal for Spare Parts
Automotive Dealer
Portal for Vehicle Management
Automotive Dealer Portal for Warranty
Business Consolidation
Business Unit Analyst
Buyer
Cash Manager
Closing Cockp it
Course Administrator
Credentials Manager (Insurance)
Credit Manager
Defense Forces & Public Security
Dispute Manager
In-Store Merchandise and Inventory Management
Financial MDM
Generic EAM Functions
Instructor/Tutor
Internal Sales Representative
Maintenance Technician
Maintenance Worker
Manager Self-Service
Master Data Governance for Supplier
Material Governance
Perishables Procurement
PLM Web User Interface
Production Supervisor
Quality Inspector
Recycling Administration
Reorganization Management
Retail - Power Lists
Retention Warehouse Adminis tration
Retention Warehouse Product Liability Audit
Retention Warehouse Tax Audit
Sales Compensation Analyst (Insurance)
Sales Representative (Insurance)
Simplified Reporting
Student Lifecycle Management
Supplier-Managed Inventory
Tax Officer (Public Sector)
Transportation Planner
Takeover/Handover of Technical Objects
Warehouse Operations
Warehouse Operation Manager
These roles only contain applications and services that are also contained in the corresponding roles delivered for the SAP NetWeaver Portal. However, note that
some of the roles offer fewer functions than the corresponding Portal roles.
For more information about the features offered by these roles and their technical prerequisites, see the application documentation for the corresponding role (see
links under “Features”).
The new roles are only available if you use SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 6.0.
Note
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 37 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 38/148
Features
For documentation on the individual roles for SAP NetWeaver Business Client, see SAP Library for SAP ERP under SAP ERP Cross-Application Functions
Roles Roles in SAP NetWeaver Business Client .
Financial Master Data Management: Charts of Accounts
This business function is obsolete (and can no longer be activated). Activate the business function Master Data Governance for Financials, Organizational
Units (FIN_MDM_ORG).
Technical Data
Technical Name of Business Function FIN_MDM_ACC
Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function
Available From SAP enhancement package 4 for SAP ERP 6.0
Technical Usage Strategic Enterprise Management
Application Component MDG for Financials (CA-MDG-APP-FIN)
Directly Dependent Business Function Requiring Activation in
Addition
Not relevant
You can use this business function to centrally manage and make changes to the financial master data of your enterprise. The approval process is guided via a
workflow and you have the option of distributing the master data changes to your transactional systems via enterprise services.
Integration
This business function enables you to distribute the master data for the application components General Ledger ( FI-GL) and Business Consolidation (FIN-SEM-
BCS).
PrerequisitesYou have installed the following components as of the version given:
Type of Component Component Is Needed Only for the Following Features
Software Component SAP_BS_FND 701
Software Component FINBASIS 604 Complete List of Features
Software Component SAP_APPL 604 Import of master data into General Ledger (FI-GL)
Software Component SEM-BW 604 Import of master data into Business Consolidation
(FIN-SEM-BCS)
Portal Content Business Package for Financial MDM 1.40 Complete List of Features
SAP Enterprise Services FINBASIS 604, namespace
http://sap.com/xi/FINB/Global2 and
SEM-BW 604, namespace
http://sap.com/xi/SEM-BW/Global2 or
SAP APPL 6.04, namespace
http://sap.com/xi/APPL/Global2
Distribution of Master Data Using Enterprise
Services
Business Intelligence content SAP NetWeaver 7 .0 BI Content Add-O n 4 Reports Ab out Master Data Changes
To be able to distribute the master data of the chart of accounts, you need to have made the necessary Customizing settings for General Ledger.
To be able to distribute the master data of the group chart of accounts, you need to have made the necessary settings for Business Consolidation. For more
information, see Workbench for Customizing.
You have made the required settings in Customizing under Cross-Application Components Processes and Tools for Enterprise Applications Financial
Master Data Management .
Features
The following functions become available when you activate this business function:
Approval Process for Master Data Changes
You can use a workflow to perform the approval process for changing master data, and document the approval process for reviewing purposes. The process
begins with a request for a change, which can b e evaluated and commented by various p ersons. Once the request has been evaluated, considered and
approved, the system executes the changes. The changes then undergo a final check and are either approved or rejected. Change requests document and
Caution
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 38 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 39/148
manage all steps in the approval process.
Master Data Change
You can access and change the master data from within a worklist in the portal. For more information, see the documentation of the business package.
Versioning of Master Data
The changes are stored in editions. Editions let you display past values of the master data at any time and define future values. Change documents document
when master data was changed and by whom the changes were made. You also can display the approval process and review the reasoning behind the
changes.
Replication of Master Data
You can distribute the master data changes from the system in which you centrally made the changes to the transactional systems: You can use enterprise
services to distribute new and changed chart of accounts master data. You also can download the master data as files for upload into the transactional systems.
Data Modeling
In the standard delivery, the business function contains a data model for changing charts of accounts. You can adjust the data model to suit your master data.
Integration FI-CA/CRM Dispute Management
Technical Data
Technical name of business function FICA_FSCM_CRM_DISPUTE
Type of business function Enterprise business function
Available as of SAP Business Suite Foundation 7.01 (SAP_BS_FND 701)
Technical Usage Utilities/Waste&Recycl./Telco
Application Components Financials Basis (FIN-FB)
Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable (FI-CA)
Directly dependent business function requiring activation in addition FSCM Functions (FIN_FSCM_CCD)
With this b usiness function, you can use the functions that are available in SAP D ispute Management with Release SAP ERP 6.0, Enhancement Package 4.
You can thereby integrate your exis ting processes in the process flows of SAP Disp ute Management.
Prerequisites
You have installed the following components as of the version given:
Type of Component Component Is only required for the following functions
Software Components SAP_BS_FND 7.01
EA-APPL 6.04
SAP_APPL 6.04
FI-CA 6.04
IS-UT 6.04
If you want to manage dispute cases in an external component, such as Customer Relationship Management (CRM), activate the business function Integration FI-
CA/CRM Disp ute Management (FICA_FSCM_CRM_DISPUTE). You can either create dispute cases in this external component, or you can create them in
Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable (FI-CA) or in SAP Biller Direct, and then send them to this external component.
The prerequisite for using the business function Integration FI-CA/CRM Dispute Management (FICA_FSCM_CRM_DISPUTE) is the business function FSCM
Functions (FIN_FSCM_CCD). This business function in turn requires the business function FSCM Integration (FIN_FSCM_INTEGRATION). However, to be
able to use the functions of the business function FI-CA/CRM Dispute Management (FICA_FSCM_CRM_DISPUTE) you are not required to activate the
business function FSCM Integration (FIN_FSCM_INTEGRATION).
Features
Using the bus iness function Integration FI-CA/CRM Dispute Management , you can:
Transfer dispute cases of SAP Dispute Management from Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable to external applications for further processing
Transfer dispute cases, which you created in an external application, to Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable, thereby providing process integration with
the functions of Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable (payments, dunning)
One possible implementation of this integration is the integration of dispute cases of SAP Dispute Management in FI-CA with dispute management in SAP
Customer Relationship Management (SAP CRM) (see Dispute Case).
Caution
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 39 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 40/148
HCM, Roles for SAP NetWeaver Business Client
Technical Data
Technical Name of Business Function HCM_NWBC_ROLES
Type of Business Function Enterprise business function
Available As O f SAP enhancement package 2 for SAP Business Suite Foundation 7.0
Technical Usage Human Capital Management
Application Component E-Recruiting (PA-ER)
HR Administrative Services (PA-AS)
Talent Management (PA-TM)
SAP Learning Solution (PE-LSO)
Business Package for Manager Self-Service (HR) (EP-PCT-MGR-HR)
Enterprise Compensation Management (PA-EC)
Objective Setting and Appraisals (PA-PD-PM)
Personnel Cost Planning and Simulation (PA-CP)
Travel Management (FI-TV)
Required Business Function Not relevant
This business function does not activate any functions; it is for information purposes only. However, the roles Course Administrator and Instructor/Tutor are an
exception since you use this bus iness function to activate them.
As of SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 6.0, you can use the following roles in SAP NetWeaver Business Client (NWBC):
Recruiter
Recruiting Administrator
HR Administrator
Talent Management Specialist
Course Administrator
Instructor/Tutor
Manager Self-Service
These roles contain only applications and services that are also contained in the corresponding roles provided for SAP NetWeaver Portal. Note, however, that the
following roles provide less features than the corresponding portal role:
Manager Self-Service
Instructor/Tutor
For more information about the features of these roles, see the application documentation for the relevant role (see references under “Features”).
You only have the new roles available if you implement SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 6.0.
Integration
You can use the bus iness function HCM, ESS on Web Dynpro ABAP (HCM_ESS_WDA_1) to additionally use the Employee Self-Service role in SAP
NetWeaver Business Client for HTML. For more information, see SAP Library for SAP ERP and choose Business Functions Business Functions in SAP
ERP Enterprise Business Functions Human Capital Management HCM, ESS on Web Dynpro ABAP .
The following roles use the inbox for work items, alerts, and notifications based on Web Dynpro for ABAP, which is available as of SAP Business Suite
Foundation 7.01 SP06:
Recruiter
HR Administrator
Manager Self-Service
For more information, see the release note Inbox (New) and Inbox (CA-EPT-IBO).
Prerequisites
You have installed the following components as of the version mentioned:
Type of Component Component Only Required for the Following Functions
Software component SAP_BS_FND 702
Software component ERECRUIT 605 Recruiter
Recruiting Administrator
Software component SAP_HRGXX 604, EA-HRGXX 605 HR Administrator
Talent Management Specialist
Course Administrator
Instructor/Tutor
Manager Self-Service
SAP NetWeaver SAP NetWeaver Business Client v3.0 for Desktop
or SAP NetWeaver Business Client v3.0 for
HTML1
Note
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 40 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 41/148
1 For more information about this NWBC version, see SAP NetWeaver Library and choose Business Client Versions. For more information about the required
installation and configuration steps, see SAP NetWeaver Library and choose Installation and Client Configuration.
To use all of the features of the roles, depending on the required role, you must also activate the following business functions:
Recruiter : HCM, SAP E-Recruiting 4 (HCM_ERC_CI_4)
Recruiting Administrator : HCM, SAP E-Recruiting 4 (HCM_ERC_CI_4)
HR Administrator : HCM, Administrative Services 03 (HCM_ASR_CI_3)
Talent Management Specialist: HCM, Core Processes in Talent Management (HCM_TMC_CI_1)
If in the Talent Management Specialist role, you want to use the enhancements that are available with the business function HCM, Core Processes in
Talent Management 02 (HCM_TMC_CI_2) (for example, launchpad with access to BI Content and other reports, enhancements, and usability
improvements for the talent assessment and calibration grid), you also need to activate this business function.
Course Administrator : HCM, Learning Solution 02 (HCM_LSO_CI_2)
If you want to use the BI Content available in the launchpad in the Course Administrator role, you also need to activate the business function HCM,
Learning Solution 03 (HCM_LSO_CI_3).
Instructor/Tutor : HCM, Learning Solution 02 (HCM_LSO_CI_2)
Manager Self-Service:
For services from E-Recruiting (PA-ER): HCM, SAP E-Recruiting 4 (HCM_ERC_CI_4)
For services from HR Administrative Services (PA-AS): HCM, Administrative Services 03 (HCM_ASR_CI_3)
For services from Talent Management (PA-TM): HCM, Core Processes in Talent Management (HCM_TMC_CI_1)
For services from SAP Learning Solution (PE-LSO): HCM, Learning Solution 02 (HCM_LSO_CI_2)
For services from Enterprise Compensation Management (PA-EC): HCM, Enterprise Compensation Management 02 (HCM_ECM_CI_2)
For services from Objective Setting and Appraisals (PA-PD-PM):
CA, Appraisals, Evaluations, and Surveys 01 (CA_HAP_CI_1)
HCM, Performance Management 01 (HCM_OSA_CI_1)
HCM, Performance Management 02 (HCM_OSA_CI_2)
For services from Personnel Cost Planning and Simulation (PA-CP): HCM, Personnel Cost Planning and Simulation (HCM_HCP_CI_1)
For services for managing time and labor data: HCM, ESS with Web Dynpro ABAP (HCM_ESS_WDA_1)
For visual representation in services with organizational charts: HCM, PD UI Visualization 01 (HCM_PD_UI_1)
For services from Travel Management (FI-TV): Travel Management (FIN_TRAVEL_1)
For more information about these business functions, see the relevant business function description and release note.
You have made the Customizing settings for the relevant application.
For more information, see the release note for this business function and the application documentation for the relevant role (see references under “Features”).
Features
The following roles are available for SAP NetWeaver Business Client.
Recruiter
For more information, see SAP Library for SAP ERP and choose Cross-Application Functions in SAP ERP Roles Roles in SAP NetWeaver Business Client
Recruiter in SAP NetWeaver Business Client .
Recruiting Administr ator
For more information, see SAP Library for SAP ERP and choose Cross-Application Functions in SAP ERP Roles Roles in SAP NetWeaver Business Client
Recruiting Administrator in SAP NetWeaver Business Client .
HR Administrator For more information, see SAP Library for SAP ERP and choose Cross-Application Functions in SAP ERP Roles Roles in SAP NetWeaver Business Client
HR Administrator in SAP NetWeaver Business Client .
Talent Management Specialist
For more information, see SAP Library for SAP ERP and choose Cross-Application Functions in SAP ERP Roles Roles in SAP NetWeaver Business Client
Talent Management Specialist in SAP NetWeaver Business Client .
Course Administrator
For more information, see SAP Library for SAP ERP and choose Cross-Application Functions in SAP ERP Roles Roles in SAP NetWeaver Business Client
Course Administrator in SAP NetWeaver Business Client .
Instructor/Tutor
For more information, see SAP Library for SAP ERP and choose Cross-Application Functions in SAP ERP Roles Roles in SAP NetWeaver Business Client
Instructor/Tutor in SAP NetWeaver Business Client .
Manager Self-Service
For more information, see SAP Library for SAP ERP and choose Cross-Application Functions in SAP ERP Roles Roles in SAP NetWeaver Business Client
Note
Note
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 41 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 42/148
Manager Self-Service in SAP NetWeaver Business Client .
HCM, Cross Analytics 1
Technical Data
Technical Name of Business Function HCM_ANALYTICS_1
Type of Business Function Enterprise business function
Available From SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 6.0
Technical Usage Central applications
Application Component Personnel Administration (PA-PA)
Talent Management (PA-TM)
Enterprise Compensation Management (PA-EC)
SAP Learning Solution (PE-LSO)
Required Business Function Not relevant
You can use this bus iness function to perform comprehensive, cross analyses and benchmarking of various HCM processes for Personnel Administration and
Talent Management, for Compensation, and for all of your employees training activities.
This business function does not activate any functions; it is for information purposes only. The full range of BI Content features on which this business function
is b ased is only available to you if you have implemented SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 6.0 as well as SAP NetWeaver 7.0 BI Content Add-
On 5 and Extension for SAP NetWeaver 7.02 BI Content Add-On. You must also have activated the business functions mentioned in the Prerequisites
section.
Integration
All queries and dashboards that are provided with SAP NetWeaver 7.0 BI Content Add-On 5 (queries) and Extension for SAP NetWeaver 7.02 BI Content Add-On
(dashboards) for HCM are available for the portal role Talent Management Specialis t in the Business Package for Talent Management Specialist 1.51 in the
workset Reports in a reporting launchpad (iView Reports). See also Reports in Talent Management.
Furthermore, the query and the dashboards of SAP Learning Solution are available for the portal role Course Administrator in the Business Package for Course
Administrator 1.51.
Prerequisites
You have installed the following components as of the version mentioned:
Type of Component Component Only Required for the Following Functions
SAP NetWeaver SAP NetWeaver Business Warehouse
Software component SAP_BS_FND 702
Software component EA-HRGXX 605
Portal content Business Package for Talent Management
Specialis t 1.51
For calling HCM queries and dashboards in the
portal role Talent Management Specialist
Portal content Business Package for Course Administrator 1.51 For calling the LSO query and dashboards in the
portal role Course Administrator
BI Content SAP NetWeaver 7.0 BI Content Add-On 5 SP01 BI Content
BI Content Add-on Extension for SAP NetWeaver 7.02 BI Content
Add-On
Xcelsius Dashboards
To use the full range of BI Content features and of Xcelsius dashboards, you must also activate the following business functions:
HCM, Core Processes in Talent Management 02 (HCM_TMC_CI_2)
HCM, Enterprise Compensation Management 02 (HCM_ECM_CI_2)
HCM, Learning Solution 03 (HCM_LSO_CI_3)
Since cross-HCM-component BI Content is the basis for the new analyses on which this business function is based, you should activate all business
functions mentioned above for this BI Content. In any case, you should at least activate the business function HCM, Core Processes in Talent Management
02 (HCM_ECM_CI_2). This business function provides basic key figures that are used for the analyses of the learning activities and of the compensation of
your employees. If required, you can also activate one of the other two business functions.
The following prerequisites also apply:
To display the provided Xcelsius Dashboards, you require Adobe Flash Player Version 9. Note also the license terms for SAP Bus inessObjects.
To create your own dashboards, you require SAP BusinessObjects Xcelsius Enterprise 2008 (SP03, FP1). Take note of the corresponding license terms.
Note
Note
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 42 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 43/148
For Xcelsius dashboards, the following system requirements also apply :
SAP NetWeaver 7.0, enhancement package 2 (SP04)
SAP NetWeaver 7.0 BI Content Add-On 5
Extension for SAP NetWeaver 7.02 BI Content Add-On 5
Features
For analyzing cross-HCM processes, you have the tools of SAP NetWeaver Business Warehouse as well as dashboards of SAP Bus inessObjects Xcelsius
Enterprise available:
SAP NetWeaver Business Warehouse provides you with flexible tools for reporting, analyzing, and planning to evaluate and interpret data.Xcelsius dashboards also enable you to display interactive analyses attractively and clearly.
Activating the aforementioned business functions provides you with numerous and cross analysis options for the topics Succession Planning, Talent Management
and Talent Development, employee compensation, and employee training:
Queries (SAP NetWeaver Business Warehouse)
Succession Planning Monitor (0TMC_MP01_Q0001)
Quality of Succession Planning (0TMC_MP01_Q0002)
Talent Ratio (0TMC_MP02_Q0001)
Personnel Actions per Talent Group (0TMC_MP02_Q0002)
Leavers per Talent Group (0TMC_MP02_Q0003)
Performance and Potential (0TMC_MP02_Q0004)
Employees' Qualifications (0TMC_MP03_Q0001)
Qualification Requirements of Positions (0TMC_MP04_Q0001)
Talent Assessments (0TMC_MP05_Q0001)
Movements in Talent Groups (0TMC_MP06_Q0001)
Results of Compensation Review for Talents (0ECM_MP02_Q0001)
Overall Compensation for Talents (0ECM_MP03_Q0001)
Learning Activities of Talents (0LSO_MP03_Q0001)
For the detailed range of features of the new BI Content of the HCM components for SAP NetWeaver 7.0 BI Content Add-On 5 SP01, see the
aforementioned business functions and the release note for BI Content. See SAP NetWeaver Library on SAP Help Portal at http://help.sap.com
SAP NetWeaver SAP NetWeaver by Key Capability Information Integration by Key Capability BI Content BI Content 705 Release Notes SAP
NetWeaver 7.0 BI Content Add-On 5 .
Dashboards (SAP BusinessObjects Xcelsius)
Succession Planning Monitor (0XC_TMC_MP01_D01)
Talent Supply (0XC_TMC_MP02_D01)
Utilization of Talents (0XC_TMC_MP01_D02)
Human Capital Management Dashboard (0XC_PA_C01_D01)
Potential and Performance Analyses (0XC_TMC_MP02_D02)
Strengths and Risks in the Organization (0XC_STRENGTHS_RISKS)
Skills and Competencies (0XC_SKILLS_COMPETENCIES)
Learning Activities of Talents (0XC_LSO_MP03_D01)
Learning Activities of the Organization (0XC_LSO_MP03_D02)
Compensation Monitor (0XC_COMPENSATION_MONITOR)
For more information on the Xcelsius dashboards for SAP HCM, see SAP Help Portal at http://help.sap.com SAP NetWeaver BI Content BI
Content 705 Extension BI Content 705 and choose the Human Resources area.
More InformationEmbedded Analytics
Prerequisites: Disp laying Data from Queries in Xcelsius Dashboards
FND, Business Context Viewer Main Application
Note
Note
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 43 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 44/148
Technical Data
Technical Name of Business Function /BCV/MAIN
Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function
Available From SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP
Technical Usage Any Stack inc luding BS_FND 70 2
Application Component Business Context Viewer (CA-EPT-BCV)
Required Business Function Not relevant
Incompatible Business Function Not relevant
You can use this business function to activate Business Context Viewer (BCV) in your system. Business Context Viewer (BCV) is a framework that allows all
SAP Business Suite applications to integrate different kinds of additional information into the context of their applications. This information can be then analyzed
according to the user's business needs. You can display the analytic information in the form of charts, forms, pictures, and tables. You can integrate Xcelsius
dashboards into BCV.
Business Context Viewer (BCV) offers a configuration center where you can configure the way the system retrieves and displays the business data that you want
to perform analyses on. The configuration center is a single point of entry for all of the activities that a regular user and administrator of BCV might need. In addition,
you can use the configuration center to perform and display analyses of your business data for testing purposes.
BCV offers the side panel which is embedded into the application that you use BCV from. By opening the side panel you can access your query views, elements
on the Overview accordion item, query view hierarchies, dashboards, and favorites directly from the app lication using BCV.
Integration
Being a successor application to Product-Centric View (PCV) that was part of enhancement package 4 for SAP ERP 6.0, Business Context Viewer is integrated
with SAP Product Lifecycle Management (SAP PLM) 7 .01.
Since BCV is part of the Business Suite Foundation (BS_FND) software layer, it can b e integrated into any application using Web Dynpro ABAP.
Prerequisites
You have installed the following components as of the version mentioned:
Type of Component Component Required for the Following Features Only
Software Component BS_FND 702
Portal Content Business Package for Common Parts 1.5
Features
Configuration Center
You use the configuration center to set up search connectors, BCV queries, and query views, and execute these objects for testing purposes. Furthermore, you
can perform administrative activities, such as checking the consistency of BCV objects, testing BCV queries and search connectors, grant authorizations, and so
on. For more information, see Configuration Center .
Side Panel
The side panel provides access to BCV directly from the application that uses it. For more information, see Side Panel.
Authorization Concept
BCV has a flexible authorization concept that allows authorizations to be granted and taken away at different levels. For more information, see Authorization
Concept in Business Context Viewer (BCV).
Business Content
The applications using BCV deliver predefined business content that you can use as it is, or change according to your business needs. For more information, see
Business Content for Business Context Viewer .
Business Functions in SAP ERP
Enterprise Business Functions
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 44 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 45/148
Cross-Application Enterprise Business Functions
SAP All-in-One Roles
Technical Data
Technical Name of Business Function /KYK/GEN_AIO_SIMPLIFICATION
Type of Business Function Enterprise business function
Available As O f SAP enhancement package 3 for SAP ERP 6.0
Technical Usage Central App lications
Application Components Controlling (CO), Financial Accounting (FI), Materials Management (MM),Production Planning and Control (PP), Sales and Distribution (SD)
Directly Dependent Business Function Requiring Activation in
Addition
Not relevant
This business function provides you with roles that have been c reated specifically to meet the needs of small businesses and midsize companies. These roles
cover transactions, object lists, and reports and enable efficient access to the processes of Financial Accounting, Controlling, Materials Management, Production
Planning and Control, and Sales and Distribution.
By using SAP NetWeaver Business Client and the functions of the POWER lists for the object lists and the reports, the user has access to a modern, uniform
interface for processing the processes.
Integration
The objects delivered with this business function offer only additional functions for the transactions of the existing components; existing functions are not
changed if you activate the business function. Above all, the additional functions provide easier access to existing functions. To some extent, new POWER lists
delivered can also be used as a replacement for existing transactions or reports.This business function covers the objects that were part of SAP All-in-One Enablement Kit 1.2 . If you have already used this, but now want to changeover to SAP
ERP, all you have to do is activate this business function. No other migration steps are necessary.
Prerequisites
You have installed the following components from the version specified:
Type of Component Component Is Needed Only for the Following Features
Software Component SAP_APPL 603 and EA-APPL 603
SAP NetWeaver SAP GUI 7.10 and SAP NetWeaver Business
Client 1.1
In order for the role menus to be displayed
correctly, the end users must use SAP NetWeaver
Business Client.
You must have performed the Customizing activities for the transactions contained in the roles you want to use.
You should also not use the roles delivered directly. Instead, you should copy them and, for example, adjust the authorizations.
Features
The business function covers the following objects that simplify the access to existing ERP functions.
Roles that are defined in the SAP Profile Generator (transaction PFCG)
The roles provide access to functions and processes of Financial Accounting, Controlling, Materials Management, Production Planning and Control, and Sales
And Distribution. From a technical view, an area can have several roles with different scopes of authorizations (for experts, specialis ts, and managers).
Object lists in the form of POWER lists in the ERP system
POWER lists based on the Web Dynpro ABAP technology. POWER stands for Personal Object Work Entity Repository. A POWER list provides a list of
objects with which the end user assigned to a role has to work with frequently. For one object in the list, the end user can start various transactions from the list.
Reports that also use the POWER list technology
In contrast to the worklists, the reports offer very few opportunities to navigate to further transactions.
For more information about the functions of this business function, see SAP All-in-One Roles.
Note
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 45 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 46/148
Shared Services Framework
FI, Enablement for Financial Shared Services
Technical Data
Technical Name of Business Function FIN_SSC_AIC_1
Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function
Available as of SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 6.0
Technical Usage Central Applications
Application Component Controlling (CO)
Financial Accounting (FI)
SAP Collections Management (FIN-FSCM-COL)
SAP D ispute Management (FIN-FSCM-DM)
Required Business Function FSCM Integration 3 (FIN_FSCM_CCD_INTEGRATION_3)
You can use the this business function to enable use of the Shared Services Framework functions, that are available cross-component in multiple SAP
applications.
In connection with SAP Enhancement Package 1 for SAP CRM 7.0, this business function in particular optimizes the setting up and operation of an Accounting
Interaction Center (AIC) that runs in SAP Customer Relationship Management (SAP CRM). It is therefore closely linked to the Multifunctional Shared Service
Interaction Center business function in the SAP CRM system.
Using this business function offers the following business advantages:
Reduced processing times for service requests and the resultant potential for savings
Integration of Financial Accounting (FI) and Controlling (CO) in the Shared Services Framework
AIC agents can process large numbers of service requests in the AIC user interface, due to direct access to business objects in ERP systems.
Reduction in the number of errors when processing service requests
Enhanced quality of service
With this business function, you can use the following functions in the Shared Services Framework:
Manual creation of service requests from an ERP system
Search for service requests from an ERP system
Start ERP transactions from the Interaction Center
Link ERP objects with service requests
Integration of SAP Collections Management with the Accounting Interaction Center
Integration of SAP Dispute Management with the Accounting Interaction Center
Irrespective of whether you use the Share Services Framework, this business function provides you with the option of connecting non-SAP systems and various
SAP systems to SAP Collections Management.
Prerequisites
You have installed the following components as of the version given:
Type of Component Component Is Needed Only for the Following Features
Software Component EA-APPL 605
SAP_APPL 605
Software Component BBPCRM 701 Integration with the AIC
Software Component FINBASIS 605 * Integration of SAP Collections Management and
SAP Dispute Management with the AIC
Software Component FINBASIS 604 * Connection of non-SAP systems and various SAP
systems to SAP Collections Management
* Software component, in which SAP Collections Management and SAP Dispute Management run
You have set up the application components that you are using.
You have made the required settings in Customizing for all of the application components that you use. For additional information on specific Customizing for this
business function, see the related release note FIN_SSC_AIC_1: Business Function FI , Enablement for FSS (New) (FIN_605_AIC_1_M).
You have activated the following business functions in addition to this business function:
FSCM Integration 3 (FIN_FSCM_CCD_INTEGRATION_3)
Multifunctional Shared Service Interaction Center (CRM_SHSVC) in the system in which CRM runs.
You need this business function to integrate with the AIC. For additional information on this business function , see the SAP Library for SAP CRM on SAP
Help Portal under http://help.sap.com/crm SAP CRM 7.0 for Enhancement Package 1 Application Help Business Functions (SAP
Enhancement Package 1 for SAP CRM 7.0) Business Functions for SAP Customer Relationship Management Multifunctional Shared Service
Interaction Center .
FSCM, Enablement for Financial Shared Services (FIN_FSCM_SSC_AIC_1) in the system in which SAP Collections Management and SAP Dispute
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 46 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 47/148
Management run.
You require this business function if you use the integration of these two applications with the AIC.
The following prerequisites must be met for the users:
So that ERP users can create and find service requests from the ERP system, they must have a user with the same name in the CRM system, to which the
business role Occasional User (SSF_OCCUSER) is assigned.
So that AIC agents can call ERP transactions from the AIC and link ERP objects with service requests, they must have a user with the same name in the
ERP systems, to which the roles are assigned that authorize then to execute ERP transactions (transaction PFCG).
Features
Manual cr eation of service req uests from an ERP system
Service requests are used for quick reporting and resolution of problems and errors. Consequently, you can create a service request in the transactions for
Financial Accounting (FI) and Controlling (CO) direct, for example in the Change Vendor (FK02) or Display General Ledger Documents (FV53) transactions.
When you create a service request, the system opens it in the SAP CRM Interaction Center direct. It transfers contextual data, and gives you the option of
enclosing a screenshot. Moreover, you can link various ERP objects, for example, the vendor master record or the document.
The AIC agent in turn can later call up the linked objects by navigating direct from the service request to the ERP system.
Search for service r equests from an ERP system
In addition to the option of creating service requests direct from an ERP system, you can search for services requests. You can check their status and update the
service requests, without an AIC employee having to be active. You can choose whether you want to see only those service requests that have been created in
the ERP system in the UI of SAP CRM, or whether you want to see all of the service requests irrespective of where they were created.
Support for launching ERP transactions from the AIC
When you start an FI or CO transaction from the AIC, the ERP system calls a search screen, making it easier for the AIC agents to access the required data
records. The search screen already contains the data that is known from the account identification in the AIC (customer/vendor and company code).
Enhanced Generic O bject Services for linking ERP objects with service requests.
In many FI and CO transactions in the ERP system you can link individual business objects with a service request in the AIC, for example, the master data of a
customer or vendor, using Generic Object Services (GOS). AIC agents can use this link to start the transaction with the ERP object in the ERP system from a
service request.
Generic Object Services for linking ERP objects with service requests in the AIC are only available if an AIC agent has started the ERP transaction from the AIC,
and the account in the AIC has been identified and confirmed. If at the point when the ERP transaction was started from the AIC a service request had been
opened in the AIC, the system inserts the link in the business context of the service request. If no service request had been opened in the AIC, the system
inserts the link in the interaction records of the accounts currently confirmed in the AIC.
Fact Sheet for Customer and Vendor
The Accounting Interaction Center contains the account fact sheet that is used in financial scenarios as a support tool for communication with partners. It provides
context-related information about the communication partner, where the partner can be a customer or a vendor.
The fact sheet for the customer contains information about the special business context that ranges from purchasing volumes to the latest dispute cases for the
customer. The AIC agent is therefore able to access a complete picture of the current and past relationship with the communication partner in his daily work.
The fact sheet for the vendor contains data such as open invoices, payments, and master data. It assists the AIC agent in giving informed replies to inquiries from
the vendor.
Search for External Documents
The Accounting Interaction Center employee must be in a position to access information about the communication with the customer to date that is as complete as
possible. This includes documents that are stored in the optical archive.
The Find Document function of the CRM user interface gives the AIC agent the option of searching from one place for documents relevant to a business partner in
a series of back-end systems, and of displaying them if necessary.
Roles
Both accounting clerks from various SAP ERP applications and agents from the SAP CRM Interaction Center are involved in the Shared Services Framework
processes. All of those involved have to navigate between various SAP systems. Such navigation is supported by the following new roles:
Occasional User (SSF_OCCUSER)
This business role allows ERP users to create service requests from ERP systems, and to search for service requests.
Accounting IC Agent (IC_AIC_AGENT)
With this business role, agents in the AIC can process service requests from Financial Accounting and Controlling, execute the appropriate ERP transactions,
and link ERP objects with service requests.
AIC Manager (AIC_MANAGER)
AIC managers are IC managers who have the additional option of linking particular categories of service requests with particular categories of dispute cases.
Based on this, AIC managers can have particular dispute cases created automatically.
For additional information about this business function – in connection with the Multifunctional Shared Service Interaction Center – see the SAP Library on
SAP Help Portal under http://help.sap.com/crm SAP CRM 7.0 for Enhancement Package 1 Application Help Interaction Center Interaction
Center WebClient Shared Services Framework Integration with SAP ERP .
Connection of non-SAP systems and various SAP systems to SAP Collections Management
Note
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 47 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 48/148
This function increases the range of accounting systems the data of which you can access with SAP Collections Management. You set up the connection with the
help of a substitute system that you connect to SAP Collections Management, and to which you transfer the required master and transaction data. In this way you
can centralize and standardize the processes for collecting open receivables, irrespective of the system architecture used in your company. In the standard
system, the sample loading procedureSAP_46C is available for an SAP system with Release SAP R/3 4.6C.
Without this business function you can only connect SAP systems where Accounts Receivable Accounting (FI-AR) has at least the status SAP R/3 Enterprise
4.70.
For more information, see:
Connection of Non-SAP Systems and Various SAP Systems
Configuration Guide for SAP Collections Management, which you can find at SAP Service Marketplace under http://service.sap.com/fscm
FSCM, Enablement for Financial Shared Services
Technical Data
Technical Name of Business Function FIN_FSCM_SSC_AIC_1
Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function
Available as of SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 6.0
Technical Usage Strategic Enterprise Mgmt
Application Component SAP Collections Management (FIN-FSCM-COL)
SAP Dispute Management (FIN-FSCM-DM)
Required Business Function FSCM Functions 3 (FIN_FSCM_CCD_3)
FI, Enablement for Financial Shared Services (FIN_SSC_AIC_1)
Multifunctional Shared Service Interaction Center (CRM_SHSVC)
You can use this business function to use new functions for the integration of SAP Collections Management , SAP Dispute Management and Accounting
Interaction Center that run in SAP Customer Relationship Management (SAP CRM). This business function is, therefore, closely connected to the Multifunctional
Shared Service Interaction Center business function in the CRM system. In the Accounting Interaction Center , the following work centers are available that you
can use for processing Financial Shared Services in your company:
My worklist (Integration with SAP Collections Management )
All worklists (Integration with SAP Collections Management )
Receivables processing (Integration with SAP Collections Management )
Dispute case processing (Integration with SAP Dispute Management )
Prerequisites
You have installed the following components as of the version given:
Type of Component Component Is Needed Only for the Following Features
Software Component FINBASIS 605
SEM_BW 605
SAP Enterprise Services As of SAP Enhancement Package 1 for SAP
NetWeaver 7.0 , software component version
FINBASIS 604, namespace
http://sap.com/xi/FSCM/Global2
Web application of SAP Dispute Management
To use this business function, the following prerequisites also have to be met:
You are using the Accounting Interaction Center of SAP CRM in your company to implement Financial Shared Services. You are using at least SAP
Enhancement Package 1 for SAP CRM 7.0 for this.
In addition to both SAP Collections Management and SAP Dispute Management , you are using Accounts Receivable Accounting (FI-AR) in SAP ERP .
Software component FINBASIS is either in the same system as software component SAP_APPL or software component BBPCRM.
You have made the required settings in Customizing for all of the application components that you use. For additional information on specific Customizing for this
business function, see the related release note FIN_FSCM_SSC_AIC_1: Business Function FSCM, Enablement for FSS (New).
You have activated the following business functions:
FSCM, Enablement for Financial Shared Services (this business function)
FSCM Functions 3
FI, Enablement for Financial Shared Services (in the FI-AR sys tem)
Multifunctional Shared Service Interaction Center (in the CRM system)
For additional information on this business function, see the SAP Library for SAP CRM on SAP Help Portal under http://help.sap.com/crm SAP
CRM 7.0 for Enhancement Package 1 Application Help Business Functions (SAP Enhancement Package 1 for SAP CRM 7.0) Business Functions for
SAP Customer Relationship Management Multifunctional Shared Service Interaction Center .
Features
A user-friendly Web interface with integrated telephone is available to the AIC agent in the Accounting Interaction Center that supports him in the collection of
Note
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 48 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 49/148
outstanding receivables and the resolution of dispute cases. He can easily navigate to the connected ERP systems, and access the required data.
For additional information about this business function – in connection with the Multifunctional Shared Service Interaction Center – see the SAP Library on SAP
Help Portal under http://help.sap.com/crm SAP CRM 7.0 for Enhancement Package 1 Application Help Interaction Center Interaction Center
WebClient Shared Services Framework Integration with SAP ERP .
Travel Management, Enablement for Shared Services
Technical Data
Technical Name of Business Function FIN_SSC_TIC_1
Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function
Available As O f SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 6.0
Technical Usage Human Capital Management
Application Component Travel Management (FI-TV)
Required Business Function Travel Management 3(FIN_TRAVEL_3)
With this business function you can integrate selected applications of SAP Travel Management in your SAP Shared Services environment. Users can create
service requests in these Travel Management applications.
In connection with SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP CRM 7.0, this business function supports the operation of a Travel Interaction Center (TIC) that runs in
SAP Customer Relationship Management (SAP CRM) For this, you must have activated business function Multifunctional Shared Service Interaction Center
(CRM_SHSVC) in the CRM system.
This business function provides the following business advantages in connection with the Travel Interaction Center:
Optimizes your business processes for trips and expenses
Improves service quality and the efficient resolution of problems
You can perform conventional functions, such as approving trips and further processing by travel administrators, in your shared services environment.
Integration
The service request is available in the following Travel Management applications:
Web Dynpro ABAP-based applications
Expense report
Express expense report
Work center for travelers
Work center for travel assistants
Work center for approving managers
These applications and their dialog windows contain the Service Request or Create Service Request pushbuttons, which ERP users can use to create or
search for service requests.
Transactions in SAP G UI
Travel Expense Manager (transaction PR05)
Travel Manager (transaction TRIP)
ERP users can create or find service requests using the menu bar of these transactions under Help Service Request .
Prerequisites
You have installed the following components as of the specified version (or higher):
Type of Component Component Only Needed for the Following Functions
Software Component EA-HR 605 and SAP_HR 604
Software Component BBPCRM 701 Integration with the Travel Interaction Center
Portal Content Business Package for Employee Self-Service
1.41
If you use SAP NetWeaver Portal.
You have activated the Travel Management Extension (EA-TRV) enterprise extension in your back-end system.
You have configured the Travel Management (FI-TV) application component.
You have activated the Travel Management (FIN_TRAVEL_1) business function in your back-end system.
You have activated the Travel Management 2 (FIN_TRAVEL_2) business function in your back-end system.
You have activated the Travel Management 3 (FIN_TRAVEL_3) business function in your back-end system.
You have activated the Travel Management, Enablement for Shared Services (FIN_SSC_TIC_1) business function (this business function) in your back-end
system.
You have activated business function Multifunctional Shared Service Interaction Center (CRM_SHSVC) in the CRM system.
You require this business function for the integration with the Travel Interaction Center. For additional information about this business function, see the SAP
Library for SAP CRM on SAP Help Portal under http://help.sap.com/crm SAP CRM 7.0 for Enhancement Package 1 Application Help Business
Functions (SAP Enhancement Package 1 for SAP CRM 7.0) Business Functions for SAP Customer Relationship Management Multifunctional Shared Service Interaction Center .
To create service requests in an ERP system and to search for their own service requests, ERP users require a user in the CRM system with the same name,
that is assigned to the occasional user (SSF_OCCUSER) business role.
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 49 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 50/148
Features
Manual creation of service requests
In the shared services environment, service requests are used to communicate between different SAP applications and the Shared Services Center in SAP
CRM. The Travel Interaction Center is a Shared Services Center in SAP CRM that focuses on processing expense reports and service requests for expense
reports.
ERP users can create service requests from within certain applications and transactions in SAP Travel Management that are specifically directed towards the
Travel Interaction Center. The ERP system automatically provides the service request with context information for the application. This includes the linked object
that allows the service agents in the Travel Interaction Center to call the application with the relevant trip number, the personnel number, and user name from the
service request.
In Customizing of the ERP system, you can define which fields of a service request are predefined. For more information, see Customizing for Travel Management
under Integration with the Shared Services Framework .
Search for service requests
When you create a service request, the system calls the service request interface from SAP CRM in a separate window. In addition to the service request, this
also contains a search function for service requests that ERP users can use to search for their own service requests.
Role for supporting service agents in the Travel Interaction Center
In the Travel Interaction Center, service agents can process expense reports and related service requests. To access the applications of Travel Management,
service agents must use the same user names in the Travel Management system and have the necessary authorizations. This PFCG role Travel Interaction
Center Agent (SAP_FI_TV_TIC_AGENT) is tailored to the requirements of service agents. It authorizes service agents to run the transactions and Web Dynpro
ABAP-based applications they require from within the Travel Interaction Center; for example, to display or change an expense report in the Travel Interaction
Center.
More Information
For additional information about the Travel Interaction Center, see SAP Library for SAP CRM on SAP Help Portal under http://help.sap.com/crm SAP
CRM 7.0 for Enhancement Package 1 Application Help SAP Customer Relationship Management Interaction Center Interaction Center WebClient Shared
Services Framework Integration with SAP ERP Travel Interaction Center .
HCM, Integration with Shared Services Interaction Center
Technical Data
Technical Name of Business Function HCM_SSC_EIC_1
Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function
Available as of SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 6.0
Technical Usage Human Capital Management
Application Component Employee Interaction Center (PA-EIC)
Other Business Functions You Need to Activate HCM, Administrative Services 03 (HCM_ASR_CI_3)
You can use this business function to make the functions of SAP ERP Human Capital Management (SAP ERP HCM) available in the Shared Services Center
(SSC), which runs in SAP Customer Relationship Management (SAP CRM). This business function is therefore closely related to the Multifunctional Shared
Services Interaction Center (CRM_SHSVC) business function in the CRM system.
The integration with HCM Processes and Forms enables agents using the Shared Services Center in the CRM system to access HCM processes in the
connected HR system via a service request. The data for the processes is stored in the connected HR system.The integration with the authentication functions of HCM Employee Interaction Center (EIC) enables agents to use an employee's authentication data that is stored
in an HR system to identify an account. With this additional security check, the agent can identify the account without ambiguity.
Integration
The Multifunctional Shared Services Interaction Center (CRM_SHSVC) business function supp lements the HCM, Integration with Shared Services Interaction
Center (HCM_SSC_EIC_1) business function and makes the corresponding functions availab le in SAP CRM.
Prerequisites
You have installed the following components as of the version mentioned:
Type of Component Component Only Required for the Following Functions
Software Component EA-HRGXX 605
App lication Components Employee Interaction Center (PA-EIC)HR Administrative Services (PA-AS)
Employee Self-Services (PA-ESS)
You have activated the Multifunctional Shared Services Interaction Center (CRM_SHSVC) bus iness function in the connected CRM system. Activating this
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 50 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 51/148
business function is a prerequisite for integrating the HCM functions with the Shared Services Center in CRM.
Features
Execute Authentication Information from HCM in the CRM Interaction Center
This function enables agents in the Shared Services Center of the CRM system to check and confirm the identity of an employee on the telephone using
authentication information. The authentication information is stored by employees via the Employee Self-Service Authentication in the HR system. The employee
does this by saving answers to predefined questions. The agent can ask the employee one or more of these questions in Account Identification and compare the
answers given by the employee on the telephone with the ones stored.
Execute HCM Processes in the CRM Interaction Center
This function enables agents in the Shared Services Center in the CRM system to link processes to a service request.
The agent can start a new HCM process. To do this, the agent selects a process in the process browser and the system opens the interactive form of the
process. After the agent enters the required data, the system links the process to the service request.
The agent can link an existing process to the service request. The system shows the agent a list of all processes that exist for this employee.
The agent can display a linked process. To do this, the system opens the PDF form for the process in display mode.
Execute Employee Self-Service, On Behalf of the Employee, in the CRM Interaction Center
This function enables agents, on behalf of an employee, to launch Employee Self-Service (ESS) app lications in the Shared Services Center in the CRM system.
The agent can work with the activities and link them to a service request as described here:
The agent can start the Employee Self-Service application. From a the business context of a Service Request , after confirming the business partner of the
employee, the agent selects an ESS area page; either Personal Information or Working Time. The area page lists all the available applications within the ESS
area.
The agent launches ESS applications from the area pages as configured in the ESS launchpad role and ESS_ONBEHALF instance. If the ESS application is
activated for data tracking of self-services, the application is automatically linked with the service request for any future tracking purposes.
Internal Self-Services, Enablement for Financial Shared Services
Technical Data
Technical Name of Business Function FIN_SSC_ISS_1
Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function
Available From SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 6.0
Technical Usage Strategic Enterprise Mgmt
Application Component Internal Self-Services (FIN-FB-ISS)
Required Business Function Master Data Governance, Generic Functions(MDG_FOUNDATION)
You can use this business function to enable internal self-services that allow both financial shared services center agents and service requestors to work more
efficiently. Business users access the self-services through a self-service home page that has been assigned to their user role (both SAP NetWeaver Portal and
SAP NetWeaver Business Client roles are supported). The self-services can also be accessed by a shared service center agent working in the Account
Interaction Center (AIC) (who is assigned a user role from the service request work center).
The daily duties of an a financial shared services center agent often consist of relatively simple and repetitive requests. This can be time consuming and
inefficient. In many cases, requestors can use self-services to complete these tasks themselves, allowing them to retrieve or update information as required. Self-
service integration leverages existing and new technology to achieve a homogenous architecture in a heterogeneous landscape. This allows you to reduce your
service center agents' workload while improving the processing time for requests and consequently the efficiency of the service for requestors.
Internal Self-Services for Financial Shared Services are part of SAP’s Shared Services Framework, a software solution that enhances selec ted SAP businessapplications with capabilities relevant to shared services delivery. The SAP Shared Services Framework enables the operation and management of
multifunctional shared services centers. This has the following advantages:
Reduces the time and effort spent on communication between the shared service center and its clients
Optimizes the service experience
Enables the delivery of shared service center services across a heterogeneous system landscape comprising multiple back-end sys tems
The shared service center is also enabled to operate with key performance indicators (KPIs) and service level agreements (SLAs).
Integration
You can use this business function to enhance both the Accounting Interaction Center (AIC) and the CRM Interaction Center (IC). The business function
Multifunctional Shared Service Interaction Center CRM_SHVC, (CRM_SHVC ) , valid as of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP CRM, can be used to enable
self-services in the Accounting Interaction Center (AIC).
Prerequisites
You have installed the following components as of the version mentioned:
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 51 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 52/148
Type of Component Component Required for the Following Features Only
Software Component FIN BASIS 605
SAP_BS_FND 702
Features
The main features of this business function are:
Shared Services Fr amework
The shared services framework introduces a homogenous solution to heterogeneous landscapes by providing a central system hub to administrate all self-
services across multiple back-end sys tems. The hub is a self-service integration repository that acts as a self-service integration hub. This hub can be built in an
existing sys tem, such as your ERP or CRM system.
Self-Services Home Page
The Configurable Launchpad UIBB (UIBBFPM_LAUNCHPAD_UIBB) Web Dynpro application component is delivered with this business function to allow you to
create and maintain a self-services home page. The home page can b e used by business users (who have been assigned the required roles) to access self-
services. For example, a sales representative may need to display a customer’s fact sheet. He or she can access the customer fact sheet request on the home
page. This allows him or her to access the information that he or she requires quickly and efficiently. Power users can use the provided configuration options to
adapt the home page to specific business needs.
Internal Self-Services Role
A new PFCG role, Internal Self-Services (SAP_FIN_INT_SELF_SERVICE), is delivered. This role is a template user role which can be used to embed the self–service user role in any other PFCG role used for the NetWeaver Business Client.
Self–Services
This business function allows you to implement two kinds of self-services:
Self-service requests based on Master Data Governance (MDG )
You can enable Master Data Governance (MDG ) related self-services such as Change a Cost Center . This allows you to execute self-services that operate
across multiple back-end systems. You can also use the same technology to enable self-services related to account posting, for example, posting to financial
accounting or controlling.
Self-service requests for information
You can enable information related self-services such as a customer or vendor factsheet. SAP Biller Direct and vendor information service requests can also
be integrated as self-services.
Integration of MDG and SSF for Financials
Technical Data
Technical Name of Business Function FIN_SSC_MDGINT
Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function
Available From SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 6.0
Technical Usage None
Application Component FINBASIS
Required Business Function MDG, Financials, Org. Units (FIN_MDM_ORG)
MDG, Generic Functions (MDG_FOUNDATION)
You can use this business function to integrate the Shared Services Framework (SSF) for Financials and Master Data Governance for Financials. This integration
is achieved through the integration of the service request (part of the SSF) and the change request (part of MDG). Once this integration is complete, users can
create a change request directly from the service request user interface (UI). The change requests processing logs are also integrated into the service request so
that users can track the status of an open request.
Prerequisites
You have installed the following components as of the version mentioned:
Type of Component Component Required for the Following Features Only
Software Component FINBASIS 605
You have activated the following business functions: MDG, Financials, Org. Units (FIN_MDM_ORG) and MDG, Generic Functions (MDG_FOUNDATION)
You have completed the Customizing activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components under Processes and Tools for Enterprise Applications
Master Data Governance Master Data Governance for Financials Integration :
You have configured the other settings required for this integration. For more information, see Configuration of SSF and MDG Integration
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 52 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 53/148
Features
Once this integration is complete, users can create change requests directly from the service request UI. The change request's p rocess ing status is also
displayed in the service request to allow shared service center users to track the progress of the change request. In the standard delivery, if the change request
status i s In Process, the service request is automatically set to In Process as well. You can use the Business Add-In (BAdI) delivered with this b usiness function
to change this setting.
Integration of CRM and ERP
ERP, Integration with Claims and Funds Management
Technical Data
Technical Name of Business Function ERP_CF_INTEGRATION_1
Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function
Available As O f SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 6.0
Technical Usage Financial Supply Chain Mgmt
Application Component Invoicing (SD-BIL)
Accounts Receivable (FI-AR)
SAP Dispute Management (FIN-FSCM-DM)
Prerequisite Business Function FSCM Integration 3 (FIN_FSCM_CCD_INTEGRATION_3)
FSCM Functions 3 (FIN_FSCM_CCD_3)
Claims and Funds Management (CRM_CF_1)
With this business function you can use the following functions with integrated procedures between Claims and Funds Management (SAP CRM), Invoicing (SAP
ERP), Accounts Receivable (SAP ERP) and SAP Dispute Management (SAP ERP):
Claim SettlementClaim Chargeback Recovery Process
Claims Management (Trade Claims Management, TCM) and Funds Management (Trade Funds Management, TFM) relate to Trade Promotion Management
(TPM), a component of CRM marketing.
Prerequisites
You have installed the following components as of the version mentioned:
Type of Component Component Required for the Following Features Only
Software Component FINBASIS 605
SAP_APPL 605
SEM_BW 605
Software Component SAP ECC 6.0 Enterprise Extension PLM, SCM,
SAP enhancement package 5 (EA-APPL 605)
Enhanced rebate p rocess ing
For you to be able to use the business function, the following prerequisites must be met:
You are using Claims and Funds Management of SAP CRM as of SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP CRM 7.0 .
You have made the necessary settings in Customizing of all application components that you use. For additional information on the specific Customizing for this
business function, see the related release note ERP_CF_INTEGRATION_1: Business Function ERP, Integration CLA & FM (New).
You have activated the following business functions:
ERP, Integration with Claims and Funds Management (this business function)
FSCM Integration 3
FSCM Functions 3 in the SAP Dispute Management system
You need this business function for the claim chargeback recovery p rocess.
Claims and Funds Management in the CRM system
For additional information about this business function, see the SAP Library for SAP CRM on the SAP Help Portal under http://help.sap.com/crm
SAP CRM 7.0 for Enhancement Package 1 Application Help Business Functions (SAP Enhancement Package 1 for SAP CRM 7.0) Business
Functions for SAP Customer Relationship Management Claims and Funds Management .
Features
Claims Settlement
Instead of CRM billing, you can now also use Sales and Distribution (SD) billing that is in the ERP system for the settlement. This does not change the processes
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 53 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 54/148
for the end user in either the FI or SAP Dispute Management sys tems.
You can convert a claims settlement from the CRM system to a billing document or credit memo of the ERP system. If a corresponding rebate agr eement has
been made, you can settle this within Claims Management and in doing so create a credit memo document for the payment.
Rebate agreements that are paid using Claims and Funds Management are excluded from processing using the standard settlement programs. Their final
settlement is made exclusively using a special finalizing process . In this p rocess, you can make the final settlement for rebate agreements so that there is
always a payment with the value zero in the result of the finalizing process.
For more information, see Finalizing Rebate Agreements.
Claim Chargeback Recovery Process
This process facilitates the cross-application processing of claim chargeback recoveries that you manage in Claims Management of the CRM system. In this
respect this b usiness function is closely connected to the FSCM Functions 3 (FIN_FSCM_CCD_3) business function that is in the SAP Dispute Management
system.
Showing the Tax Amount
You can calculate and post the tax amount that is needed for the processes in claims management.
CRM, Time Recording Using Multiple CATS Data Entry Profiles
Technical Data
Technical Name of Business Function HCM_CRM_CATS_PROFILE
Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function
Available As O f SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP 6.0
Technical Usage Human Capital Management
Application Component Time Sheet (CA-TS)
Directly Dependent Business Function Requiring Activation in
Addition
Not relevant
In this business function, there are multiple data entry profiles available for the working times that are entered in SAP CRM service confirmation items.
There is no test catalog available for this business function.
Integration
Prerequisites
You have installed the following components as of the version mentioned:
Type of Component Component Is Needed Only for the Following Functions
Software Component SAP_APPL 605
Software Component SAP CRM
To use this business function, the following prerequisites must also be met:
You have made the necessary settings in Customizing. For more information about specific Customizing settings for this business function, see the correspondingrelease note: HCM_CRM_CATS_PROFILE: Business Function CRM Time Recording - CATS Profiles (Enhanced).
Features
Multiple Data Entry Profiles for the CRM Service Confirmation
The working times that are entered in SAP CRM service confirmation items are transferred into a time sheet in SAP ERP. This transfer is controlled by the data
entry profile. Previously, only one data entry profile could be defined in SAP ERP, which was used for all service confirmations. This enhancement makes it
possible to define multiple data entry profiles for the following key fields of CRM service confirmations:
Leading transaction type (transaction type of the first transaction in a string of transactions)
Transaction type
Service organization
Responsible organizational unit
You cannot control selection of a data entry profile at item level. In other words, you can only use one data entry profile per SAP CRM service confirmation.
Caution
Note
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 54 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 55/148
Integration of SCM and ERP
Integration of SCM and ERP
Technical Data
Technical Name of Business Function SCM_GEN_01
Available as of SAP ECC Enhancement Package 2
ECC Software Component SAP_APPL
ECC Application Component CA
Business Intelligence Content N/A
SAP Enterprise Services N/A
JAVA Software Component N/A
Portal Content N/A
Sup plementary Comp onents in Further SAP Ap plications As of SAP SCM 20 07
Business Function That You Must Activate in Addition LOG_MM_CI_1
Use
With this business function, you can use the DataSource Purchasing Document Schedule Line (2LIS_11_VASCL) in enhanced form.
You can also use this business function when posting sales orders to copy additional data to SAP Supply Chain Management (SAP SCM).
Prerequisites
To be ab le to use the business function, you must be us ing SAP SCM 2007.
Features
Enhancement of the DataSource
You need the enhanced DataSource if you want to create the demand history in Service Parts Planning (SPP) in SAP SCM using data from SAP ERP.
The DataSource has been enhanced with the following fields:
Description Field Name InfoObject InfoObject Type Data Element
Executing Plant EXECLOC 0EXECPLANT Characteristic /BI0/OIEXECPLANT
Type of Executing Plant ELOCTPYE 0EPLNTTYPE Characteristic /BI0/OIEPLNTTYPE
Customer-Facing Location FACELOC 0FACEPLANT Characteristic /BI0/OIFACEPLANT
Type of Customer-Facing
Location
FLOCTYPE 0FPLNTTYP Characteristic /BI0/OIFPLNTTYPE
First Stockholding Location STOCKLOC 0STOCKLOC Characteristic /BI0/OISTOCKLOC
Type of First Stockholding
Location
SLOCTYPE 0SLOCTYPE Characteristic /BI0/OISLOCTYPE
Item Category Usage VWPOS 0ITMTYPEUSE Characteristic /BI0/OIITMTYPEUSE
Number of Order Items is filled by a constant 0ORD_LINE Key Figure /BI0/OIORD_LINE
Exponent 10 for Quantity
Conversion
is filled by a constant 0QTY_EXP Key Figure /BI0/OIQTY_EXP
Higher-Level Item UEPOS (*) 0UP_LVL_ITM Characteristic /BI0/OIUP_LVL_ITM
Arrival Time EZEIT (*) 0REQ_TIME Key Figure /BI0/OIREQ_TIME
(*) To include these fields in the DataSource, you have to enhance the DataSource manually. For more information about how to enhance the DataSource manually
with these two fields, see SAP Library for SAP Supply Chain Management under SAP Advanced Planning and Optimization (SAP APO) Service Parts
Planning (SPP) Demand History Creation Historical Data Capture Historical Data Capture Using SAP ERP Enhance DataSource 2LIS_11_VASCL
Manually .
If you want to create the demand history in SPP using SAP ERP, you can also use the enhanced DataSource Purchasing Data (Schedule Line Level)
(2LIS_02_SCL). You can use this enhanced DataSource with the Materials Management (LOG_MM_CI_1) business function.
Note
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 55 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 56/148
Data Transfer with the Sales Order
The additional data that you can send from SAP ERP to SAP SCM when you post the sales order is required when you want to work in the service fill monitor and
in the service loss analys is in SAP SCM using documents from SAP ERP.
SAP ERP sends the following additional data at item level to SAP SCM:
Relevant for goods movement
Facing location
Type of customer-facing location
First stockholding location
Type of first stockholding location
Reason for rejection of offers and orders
Rejection reason
In the SAP standard implementation, the rejection reason code is initial.
Abnormal demand
In the SAP standard implementation, the abnormal demand is initial.
Restrictions in the search according to location
In the SAP standard implementation, the restriction in the search according to location is initial.
Higher-level item in bill of material structures
Quotient numerator for converting the unit of measure
In the SAP standard implementation, the quotient numerator for converting the unit of measure is one.
Denominator for converting the required quantity.
In the SAP standard implementation, the denominator for converting the required quantity is one.
Base unit of measure
Numerator (factor) for converting the sales unit to stockkeeping unit.Denominator (divisor) for converting the sales unit to stockkeeping unit.
SAP ERP sends the following additional data at schedule line level to SAP SCM:
Goods issue date/time
Higher-level schedule line
In the SAP standard implementation, the higher-level schedule line is one.
Integration of SCM and ERP 2
Technical Data
Technical name of the business function SCM_GEN_02
Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function
Available as of SAP ERP 6.0 Enhancement Package 3
ECC software component SAP_APPL
ECC application component CA
Business Intelligence content Not relevant
SAP Enterprise Services Not relevant
JAVA software component Not relevant
Portal content N/A
Additional content available in other SAP applications As of SAP SCM 2007
Business function requir ing activation in addition SCM_GEN_01
As of SAP ECC 6.0 Enhancement Package 3, the business function Integration of SCM and ERP 2 (SCM_GEN_02) is available. You can use this business
function for enhancements in the following areas:
Shelf Life
Subcontracting
Interchangeability
Prerequisites
To be ab le to use the business function, you must be us ing SAP SCM 2007.
Features
Shelf Live
Consideration of Shelf Life Data
The following data is transferred between SAP ERP and SAP SCM:
Remaining shelf life data of purchase requisitions and purchase orders is transferred from SAP ERP to SAP SCM.
Remaining shelf life data of SNP stock transfers (with or without source location) is transferred from Supply Network Planning (SNP) to SAP ERP.
Minimum Remaining Shelf Life in Batch Determination from Stock Transport Order
The required minimum remaining shelf life from the stock transport order is taken into account in batch determination in the goods issue posting.
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 56 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 57/148
When recording a goods issue against a stock transport order, you can carry out a batch determination process. In this process, the system searches for batches
with certain characteristic values, such as minimum shelf life or status, according to a search schema. You can predefine the search schema and the
characteristic values according to which you want to search for the batches. As of this release, the required minimum remaining shelf life and the planned delivery
time from the stock transport order are taken into account in the batch determination process.
Minimum Remaining Shelf Life in Purchase Requis ition and Purchase Or der
You can display and change the minimum remaining shelf life in the requisition and purchase order. The minimum remaining shelf life is adopted in the PO item
when a purchase order is created from a requisition.
The minimum remaining shelf life in the purchase requisition can be populated from a source of supply (i.e. contract or info record), the material master, or with
data from SAP SCM. Previously, the minimum remaining shelf life in the purchase order was adopted from the following documents and master data in the
following order: reference document, RFQ, contract, info record, material master record.Now the system adopts the minimum remaining shelf life from the purchase requisition. If no minimum remaining shelf life has been defined in the requisition, it is
determined from the aforementioned documents and master data.
Effects on Customizing
Furthermore, you can specify in Customizing for Purchasing via the field selection for the purchase requisition (Define Screen Layout at Document Level) whether
the field is to be shown or hidden and whether its contents can be changed in the Enjoy transactions. If the minimum remaining shelf life differs from that in the
assigned purchase requisition, you can have a message issued in the purchase order (Define Attributes of System Messages).
Subcontracting
Assignment of Multiple Production Versions in SAP ERP
The subcontracting process has been enhanced. You can now assign multiple production versions to a subcontracting purchase info record in SAP ERP. To do
the assignment, in SAP ERP, choose Logistics -> Central Functions -> Supply Chain Planning Interface -> Core Interface Advanced Planner and Optimizer ->
Environment -> Data Transfer -> Assign Multiple Production Versions.
You can also define whether purchase info records, to which multiple production versions are assigned, are transferred from SAP ERP to SAP APO.
For more information, see the Implementation Guide (IMG) for SAP ERP under Integration with Other SAP Components -> Advanced Planning and Optimization
-> Basic Settings for Data Transfer -> Change Transfer -> Change Transfer for Master Data -> Configure Change Transfer for Master Data.
You can also mark individual production versions as invalid in cases where a purchase info record has multiple production versions assigned to it. As part of theinitial data transfer to SAP APO, SAP ERP transfers only those production versions that are valid. To mark production versions as invalid, you have two options:
You can manually define this by setting the Production Version Invalid indicator for the relevant production version. To do so, in SAP ERP, choose Logistics ->
Central Functions -> Supply Chain Planning Interface -> Core Interface Advanced Planner and Optimizer -> Environment -> Data Transfer -> Assign
Multiple Production Versions.
You can use the report SET_PRODVER_VALIDITY to have the system automatically check whether production versions are valid in the background.
You have two options when you use the check report:
- Set not valid entries
If you choose this option, the invalid production versions are simply marked by the system and are not transferred to SAP APO as part of the initial data
transfer. This is the default setting.
- Delete invalid entries
If you choose this option, the invalid production versions are automatically deleted by the system.
Multiple Sources of Supply for Subcontracting
Previously in a subcontracting scenario, Supply Network Planning (SNP) and Capable-to-Match (CTM) could only consider one source of supply for each
subcontracting location. The reason for this was that in SAP ERP, you could only assign one production version to a purchasing info record. You could then only
convert this production version to one production process model (PPM via a PP/DS PPM) or one production data structure (PDS) when transferring data to SAPSCM.
As of SAP SCM 5.1, you can assign multiple production versions to a purchasing info record in SAP ERP. You make this assignment in the SAP ERP system
using a new transaction: Logistics -> Central Functions -> Supply Chain Planning Interface -> Core Interface Advanced Planner and Optimizer -> Environment -
> Data Transfer -> Assign Multiple Production Versions. After converting the production versions to PPMs or PDS, multiple sources of supply are available for
each subcontracting location in the SCM system.
In interactive SNP planning, you can determine the sources of supply as follows:
For an SNP stock transfer of type Subcontracting, you can choose an alternative source of supply from a proposal list in the planning table.
You can change the source of supply for a planned order in the detail view. SNP and CTM planning runs choose the sources of supply according to the rules
for determining source of supply that are in place (for example, on the basis of procurement priority or cost).
Interchangeability
Integration of Interchangeability Master Data from SAP ERP
Interchangeability master data can now be transferred from SAP ERP to SAP SCM.
SCM, Customer and Vendor Master Data Integration into BP
Technical Data
Technical Name of Business Function LOG_SCM_CUSTVEND_INT
Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function
Available From SAP enhancement package 4 for SAP ERP 6.0
Technical Usage Central App lications
Application Component SCM Basis SCM-BAS
Required Business Function Foundation of External Transportation Management SystemSCM_SCMB_TM_FND1
Previously, you could transfer customer and vendor header level data, for example the address, from an ERP system to the business partner in SCM Basis by
using the core interface (CIF). You can use this business function to extend the outbound CIF interface to transfer specific attributes of customer and vendor data
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 57 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 58/148
from an ERP system to the business partner in SCM Basis of a SAP Supply Chain Management (SAP SCM) system.
Integration
In SCM Basis, the business function Foundation of External Transportation Management System (SCM_SCMB_TM_FND1) is available to enable the use of
customer and vendor data transferred from an ERP system. In SCM Basis, you can use the customer and vendor data as follows:
If you have manually created an organizational structure in SCM Basis, you can use the customer and vendor data to maintain a company organization that
corresponds to the company code in an ERP system and is used by, for example, Transportation Charge Management of an external TM system for invoicing
and charge calculation. You can also, for example, create a corporate organization that groups all company organizations.
Maintain specific attributes of the customer and vendor in the business partner master.Furthermore, the SCM basis location master has been extended to maintain international address versions.
Prerequisites
You have installed the following components as of the version mentioned:
Type of Component Component Required for the Following Features Only
Software Component SAP_APPL 604
SAP NetWeaver SAP NetWeaver 7.02
Enhanced Initial Data Transfer
Technical Data
Technical Name of Business Function CA_CIF_INILOAD_01
Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function
Available as Enhancement Package 4 for SAP ERP 6.0
Technical Usage Central App lications: EA-APPL, SAP_APPL
ECC Software Component SAP_APPL
ECC Application Component CA
Business Intelligence Content Not relevant
SAP Enterprise Services Not relevant
JAVA Software Component Not relevant
Portal Content Not relevant
Additional Content Available in Other SAP Applications As of SAP SCM 7.0
Business Function Requiring Activation in Addition Not relevant
With this business function, you can improve the effectiveness of initial data transfer via Core Interface (CIF). You can use the following features:
Incremental Initial Data Transfer
Parallelized Initial Data Transfer of PDS
Prerequisites
You have installed SAP Supply Chain Management 7.0 (SAP SCM 7.0) and in Customizing, you have activated the incremental data transfer. For more
information, see Customizing for SCM Basis under Integration Basic Settings for Data Transfer Activate Incremental Data Transfer .
You have activated the parallelized initial data transfer on the Activate or Deactivate Integration Model screen. To do so, on the SAP Easy Access screen, you
have chosen Logistics Central Functions Supply Chain Planning Interface Core Interface Advanced Planner and Optimizer Integration Model
Activate or transaction CFM2.
Features
Incremental Initial Data Transfer
You can activate the incremental data transfer for a logical system. You can use the incremental data transfer during the initial data transfer of master data objects
from an ERP system to an SCM system via Core Interface (CIF). The incremental data transfer is valid for the following master data objects:
Product master data
Location product master data
Production data structure (PDS) (in SAP APO only)
If you do not activate the incremental data transfer, the initial data transfer stops in the event of an error during the processing of a queue even if the error only
affects one of the objects in the queue. If the data transfer is scheduled in a background job, then the background job is canceled. You must correct the error and
start the transfer of all objects again.
If you activate the incremental data transfer, the system transfers all blocks of correct master data objects in a CIF queue so that you only have to retransfer
blocks with errors. Due to the lower volume of objects to be processed again, the retransfer becomes more effective.
The incremental data transfer only considers errors in the SAP SCM system for the master data objects listed above. The system does not activate the integration
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 58 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 59/148
model when errors occur in the SAP ERP system or if errors also occur in the SAP SCM system for data objects other than the master data objects listed above.
Parallelized Initial Data Transfer of PDS
The parallelized data transfer has been enhanced to include the object type PDS.
More Information
For more information about the incremental initial data transfer, see SAP Library for SAP Supply Chain Management (SAP SCM) on SAP Help Portal at
http://help.sap.com Overview of SAP Documentation SAP Business Suite SAP Supply Chain Management SAP SCM 7.0 Application Help EN
SAP Supply Chain Management (SAP SCM) SAP Advanced Planning and Optimization (SAP APO) Integration via Core Interface (CIF) Technical
Integration Core Interface (CIF) Data Transfer Initial Data Transfer .
For more information about the parallelized initial data transfer, see SAP Library for SAP Supply Chain Management (SAP SCM) on SAP Help Portal at
http://help.sap.com Overview of SAP Documentation SAP Business Suite SAP Supply Chain Management SAP SCM 7.0 Application Help EN
SAP Supply Chain Management (SAP SCM) SAP Advanced Planning and Optimization (SAP APO) Integration via Core Interface (CIF) Technical
Integration Core Interface (CIF) Data Transfer Initial Data Transfer Parallelized Initial Data Transfer .
Vendor-Managed Inventory
Technical Data
Technical Name of Business Function APO_VMI_CONS
Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function
Available as of Enhancement Package 4 for SAP ERP 6.0
Technical Usage
ECC Software Component Logistics and Accounting (SAP_APPL)
ECC Application Component Cross-Application Components (CA), Sales (SD-SLS)
Business Intelligence Content Not relevant
SAP Enterprise Services Not relevant
JAVA Software Component Not relevant
Portal Content Not relevant
Additional Content Available in Other SAP Applications As of SAP SCM 7.0, new functions exist in SAP Advanced Planning andOptimization to enable the implementation of the Vendor-Managed Inventory
process.
Business Function Requiring Activation in Addition Not relevant
You can use this business function to implement an integrated vendor-managed inventory scenario in SAP ERP and SAP APO for a standard or a consigned
process. Vendor-managed inventory enables the vendor to determine replenishment requirements for the customer and replenish the stock of its materials at the
customer's site. If VMI is combined with customer consignment, the vendor owns and manages this stock until the customer withdraws the material for
consumption. This business function also supports the parallel use of a consigned and a non-consigned scenario with new functions.
Integration
This business function uses the switch MM_OM1_SFWS_SC from the business function ERP OPS O utsourced Manufacturing (LOG_MM_OM_1).
Prerequisites
You have activated the following switches:
CAVE_SFWS_VMI_CONS
CIF_SFWS_STK_INTRANS
CIF_SFWS_UI_VMI_CONS
CIF_SFWS_VMI_CONS
MM_OM1_SFWS_SC
You have implemented the following Customizing activities in Customizing for SAP ERP:
Define Customer/Plant Assignment and Configure ATP Check
BAdI: VMI Third Party Logistic Provider Scenario
Features
This business function includes the following new functions:
Shipment split
For a parallel use of a consigned and a non-consigned VMI process, you can execute a grouping of TLB shipments in SAP APO before publishing theshipments to SAP ERP. For more information, see SAP Library for SAP Supply Chain Management on SAP Help Portal at http://help.sap.com SAP
Advanced Planning and Optimization (SAP APO) Supply Network Planning Vendor-Managed Inventory Shipment Split in the VMI Scenario .
Automatic ATP check of TLB shipments
You can set up an automatic ATP check of TLB shipments in SAP ERP. The SAP ERP system executes the ATP check after you have published the TLB
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 59 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 60/148
shipments from SAP APO, before it saves the relevant sales order. For more information, see SAP Help Portal at http://help.sap.com SAP
Advanced Planning and Optimization (SAP APO) Supply Network Planning Vendor-Managed Inventory Automatic ATP Check of TLB Shipments in SAP
ERP .
Improved master data integration
By activating this business function, you enable the system to automatically create ship-to location products in SAP APO via CIF based on customer master
data in SAP ERP.
Consignment stock in transit
You can use the new key figure Consignment Stock in Transit to view intransit consignment stock data, and integrate it in the planning process. For more
information, see SAP Help Portal at http://help.sap.com SAP Advanced Planning and Optimization (SAP APO) Supply Network Planning
Vendor-Managed Inventory Consignment Stock in Transit in SAP APO .Third party logistic provider scenario
If the special stock partner defined in the customer master data is a third party logistic provider, the system updates consignment stock at the corresponding
customer location in SAP APO via CIF.
ERP Maintenance & Service Planning (General Core Enablement)
Technical Data
Technical Name of Business Function ERP_ECC_MSP_EA
Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function
Available As O f SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 6.0
Technical Usage Discrete Ind. & Mill Products
Application Component Aerospace & Defense Industry Solution (IS-AD)
Directly Dependent Business Function Requiring Activation in
Addition
SCM Enhanced Maintenance & Service Planning for MRO
(SCM_APO_MSP_EPS) in SAP SCM 701
You can use this business function to optimize your use of the Maintenance and Service Planning (MSP) solution and to also benefit from general improvements
in usability. This set of enhancements enables you to optimize utilization of maintenance facilities and other resources. It not only fixes specific problems faced by
customers but also adapts MSP functions for use across diverse industries. The new developments increase the stability of the MSP solution and ensure
improved integration between SAP SCM and SAP ERP systems.
MSP can either be run independently within SAP SCM or integrated with Maintenance Event Builder (MEB) and Plant Maintenance in SAP ERP. The
enhancements have also imp roved MSP’s long-term p lanning capabil ities and allow more accurate modeling of potential business scenarios.
Furthermore, with this business function the MSP function is available for all industry areas.
Prerequisites
You have installed the following components as of the version mentioned:
Type of Component Component Is Needed Only for the Following Features
Software Component SAP_APPL 605
EA-APPL 605
ECC-DIMP 605
Technical Component SCM 701 Transfer of independent slots as revisions
Transfer of one-time demands as notifications
You have defined the revision type to be created for the transfer of independent slots. In the Customizing for SAP ERP, choose Plant Maintenance and
Customer Service Maintenance and Service Processing Maintenance and Service Planning (MSP) Maintain Revision Type .
You have defined the notification type to be created for the transfer of one-time demands. In the Customizing for SAP ERP, choose Plant Maintenance and
Customer Service Maintenance and Service Processing Maintenance and Service Planning (MSP) Maintain Notification Type .
If you activate the ERP Maintenance & Service Planning (ERP_ECC_MSP_EA) business function and import support packages for the software components
SAP_APPL or EA-APPL, you must also import the support packages for ECC-DIMP.
Integration
Integration between MSP and SAP ERP
The SAP APO system now transfers independent slots within the planning horizon to SAP ERP as revisions. Independent slots within the planning horizon are
now flagged to indicate such a transfer. A configuration table in SAP ERP Customizing defines what revision type to create.
One-time demands within the planning horizon are transferred to SAP ERP as notifications. If that notification already exists in SAP ERP, you can link it to the
one-time demand in MSP.
Through the configuration table, MSP can now create revisions with different revision types. A Customizing setting is provided for this purpose. Previously, only
one revision type was available.
MSP CIF interface settings have been removed from the DIMP switch.
Note
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 60 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 61/148
For more information about MSP enhancements, see SAP Library for SAP Supply Chain Management at http://help.sap.com.
Master Data Governance
Master Data Governance, Generic Functions
Technical Data
Technical Name of Business Function MDG_FOUNDATION
Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function
Available From SAP enhancement package 2 for SAP Business Foundation 7.0
Technical Usage None
Application Component Master Data Governance (CA-MDG)
Directly Dependent Business Function Requiring Activation in
Addition
None
This business function enables you to use basic functions, including the following:
Enterprise-wide centralized managing of master data using SAP Business Workflow
Safeguarding of data quality
Replicating of master data in target systems
Documenting of master data changes
This provides your enterprise with the following benefits, which reduce your total cost of ownership (TCO):
More efficient master data management
Improved compliance with the fundamentals of adequate enterprise governance
Automated, secure, and documented replication of master data
This business function is a prerequisite for using the following business functions with their preconfigured data models:
Master Data Governance for Financials, Organizational Units (FIN_MDM_ORG)
Master Data Governance for Material (MDG_MATERIAL)Master Data Governance for Supplier (ERP) (MDG_ERP_SUPPLIER)
This business function enables you to customize the preconfigured data models to meet your requirements and create your own data models without a template.
Integration
Once the business function is activated, you can make the following settings in Customizing under Cross-Application Components Processes and Tools for
Enterprise Applications Master Data Governance General Settings .
In the target systems, you activate the business functions that are relevant to your applications. For example, if you use the business function
MDG_ERP_SUPPLIER in the central system, you can activate the bus iness functionCA_SUPPLIER_SOA in the target system.
Prerequisites
You have installed the software component SAP Business Suite Foundation (SAP_BS_FND), version 702 or later.
If you have activated the business function Financial Master Data Management: Charts of Accounts (FIN_MDM_ACC), you need to make some changeovers (for
example, from UI models to UI configurations) before you can activate the given business function. For more information about the changeovers, see the Release
Note MDG_FOUNDATION: Master Data Governance, Generic Functions.
Features
When you activate this business function, the following functions from the Master Data Governance (CA-MDG) component become available:
Generic Basic Functions
Enhance Existing Master Data Models or Create Your O wn
You can enhance the data models delivered by SAP (for example, by adding custom fields) and you can create your own data models and use them in the
change processes.
Change Request
You use change requests to change master data using workflow-based change processes. Q uality assurance reports on the change process are available.
You also can process change requests using SAP Interactive Forms by Adobe.
Data Replication Framework ( DRF)
The DRF is the technical platform for replicating the master data processed in a change request. You can use filters to make unrestricted and very granular
data selections, for example, to replicate the data of certain company codes in very specific systems.
Key Mapping
Function for mapping values determined at runtime (for example, business partner IDs or material numbers) in the central system and target system.
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 61 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 62/148
Value Mapping
Function for mapping values determined at the time of design. While configuring the central system (in Customizing), you define, for example, country codes
and map these to their counterparts located in the target system. The application-spec ific enterprise services use value mapping.
Changing and Replicating of Master Data
Master Data Governance enables you to change master data in workflow processes. You can assign authorizations to these workflow processes. The workflow
processes are documented for reviewing purposes.
The system manages and documents all change steps in a change request.
You can access and edit the change requests from within a worklist in the portal.
You can replicate master data changes from the central system, in which you make and manage the changes, to the target systems. The DRF enables the
automated replication of data. You can run such replications either on a regular basis or on demand. When doing so, you can use filters to determine which
objects are to be replicated in which systems. In addition to IDocs and enterprise services, you also can use upload and download functions to replicate the
master data changes to the target systems.
Business Foundation for Services for Supplier
Technical Data
Technical Name of Business Function CA_SUPPLIER_SOA
Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function
Available As O f SAP Business Suite Foundation 7.02 (SAP_BS_FND 702)
Technical Usage Any Stack inc luding BS_FND
Application Component CA-MDG-BP
Directly Dependent Business Function Requiring Activation in
Addition
Not relevant
You can use this b usiness function to activate the BAdIs for customer specific mapping of the supp lier replication services.
Prerequisites
You have installed the following components as of the version mentioned:
Type of Component Component Is Needed Only for the Following Features
Software Component SAP_BS_FND
Features
With this business function BAdIs are offered to implement a customer specific mapping to override the standard mapping of the listed services
Master Data Governance for Supplier (ERP)
Technical Data
Technical Name of Business Function MDG_ERP_SUPPLIER
Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function
Available As O f SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP 6.0
Technical Usage Central App lications
Application Component CA-MDG-BP-SUP
Directly Dependent Business Function Requiring Activation in
Addition
Master Data Governance, Generic Functions MDG_FOUNDATION)
You can use this b usiness function to replicate the supp lier master data to different business systems within the central supp lier master data governance.
Prerequisites
You have installed the following components as of the version mentioned:
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 62 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 63/148
Type of Component Component Is Needed Only for the Following Features
Software Component SAP_APPL
Portal Content Business Package for Finacial BPERPFINMDM
Business Package for Material BPERPMDGM
Business Package for Supplier BPERPMDGS
This business function must not be activated if there is an active Industry Extension (IE) on the same system. A validation of such a combination must take
place in advance. Please get in touch with the appropriate SAP contact.
If you activate this business function, MDG-S requires that you use ALE inbound processing for initial load. In this case, standard ALE inbound processing is
not available any longer.
Features
The mass data load enables you to extract data from a client system and to upload this data into the master data hub. The extraction of supplier, vendor and
business partner data from SRM and ERP systems throughout different releases is supported - in the case of previous releases by using the existing functions.
Within the governance process, change requests are used to control the creation and change of a supplier and the supplier data is stored temporarily. The
change requests are forwarded automatically to a master data specialist. As soon as the change request gets approved the new supplier master data is storedin the master data tables.
The governance process includes a duplicate check to avoid the creation of duplicates.
Constraints
The Master Data Governance for Supplier does neither support time dependency for central data and address usages nor time validity for addresses and bank
details. Therefore it cannot run on clients using the SAP Business Partner with time dependency and time validity for other purposes.
SRM One Client systems are not supported as client for Master Data Governance for Supplier.
An installation of Master Data Governance for Supp lier on an SRM One Client system as a hub is not supported.
The Master Data Governance for Supplier only supports the re-use of selected existing field modification criteria. Additionally only the customizing of required
fields will be considered. It is not possible to suppress fields or switch fields to display only within the Master Data Governance for Supplier User Interface.
Master Data Governance for Material
Technical Data
Technical Name of Business Function MDG_MATERIAL
Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function
Available as of SAP enhancement package 5 for ERP 6.0
Technical Usage Central App lications
Application Component MDG Material (CA-MDG-APP-MM)
Required Business Function Master Data Governance, Generic Functions (MDG_FOUNDATION)
You can use this business function to establish a governance process for your material master data. This business function provides a clearly structured
approach to master data maintenance; warning of the creation of duplicate data and therefore improving overall master data quality. A comprehensive workflow
concept enables you to streamline the maintenance process while providing a solid approval path and a document trail.
This business function also provides a duplicate check that highlights potential duplicate master data entries.
Integration
Master Data Governance for Material should be used together with the SAP ERP material master to improve data quality and transparency.
Prerequisites
You have installed the following components as of the version mentioned:
Type of Component Component
Software Component SAP-APPL 605
Software Component SAP_BASIS 702, SP 06
Caution
Caution
Note
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 63 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 64/148
If you do not have SAP_BASIS 702, SP 06 installed, follow the instructions in SAP Note 1502296.
This business function must not be activated if there is an active Industry Extension (IE) on the same system. A validation of such a combination must take
place in advance. Please get in touch with the appropriate SAP contact.
FeaturesThe Master Data Governance for Material business function offers the following features:
Predefined Workflows
SAP ships workflows for a number of change request types and enables you to create your own customized workflows.
Built-In Approval Pr ocess
You can use custom workflows to create an approval process to provide quality checks, helping to prevent changes from endangering your data accuracy.
Duplicate Check
The system can perform a duplicate check to determine likely duplicate master data entries.
Centralized Maintenance
All material master data updates can be performed through a single work center streamlining day-to-day operations.
Transparency
A document trail in the form of a log file enables you to track changes to material master data.
Key and Value Mapping for IDoc MATMAS and CLFMAS
In cases where your client system has different keys or values for master data fields or objects than those in the Master Data Governance system you can map
those keys and values to the ones stored in the master data governance hub.
Master Data Governance for Financials, Organizational Units
Technical Data
Technical Name of Business Function FIN_MDM_ORG
Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function
Available From SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 6.0
Technical Usage Strategic Enterprise Management
Application Component MDG for Financials (CA-MDG-APP-FIN)
Required Business Function Master Data Governance, Generic Functions (MDG_FOUNDATION)
You can use this business function to configure a governance process for your master data in Financials. The governance of the master data is centralized and is
managed by an app roval p rocess. The changes can be replicated in the decentralized systems and is documented at all times.
This business function offers the following advantages for your enterprise:More efficient master data management
Improved compliance with the fundamentals of adequate enterprise governance by means of automated, secure, and documented replication of master data
Faster individual and consolidated financial statements
All this reduces your total cost of ownership (TCO).
Integration
This business function has the same features as the business function Financial Master Data Management: Charts of Accounts (FIN_MDM_ACC), but has some
additional features and entity types. The business function FIN_MDM_ACC is obsolete as of SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 6.0. Therefore, if you
want to use Financials content, activate the present business function.
If you want to use enterprise services to import the master data into the application components General Ledger (FI-GL) and Controlling (CO), you need to
activate the business function Master Data Governance for Financials, SOA Organizational Units (FIN_MDM_SOA_ORG).
If you want to use enterprise services to import the master data of charts of accounts and item hierarchies into the application component Business Consolidation
(FIN-SEM-BCS), you need to activate the business function Master Data Governance for Financials, SOA ChtAccts and FRS (FIN_MDM_SOA_CU).
Prerequisites
You have installed the following components as of the version given:
Caution
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 64 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 65/148
Type of Component Component Is Needed Only for the Following Features
Software Component FINBASIS 605 and SEM-BW 605
Portal Content Business Package for Financial MDM 1.51
BI Content SAP NetWeaver 7.0 BI Content Add-On 5 SP01 Master data reports
XI/ESR Content FINBASIS 605, namespace
http://sap.com/xi/FINB/Global2 and
http://sap.com/xi/FIN/MDG/Global2
Replication of Master Data Using Enterprise
Services
You have made the required settings in Customizing under Cross-Application Components Processes and Tools for Enterprise Applications Master Data
Governance Master Data Governance for Financials .
If you want to use point-to-point communication for the enterprise services (see below), in addition to this business function you also need to activate the business
function Improvements for SOA Reuse Functions (FND_SOA_REUSE_1).
Features
This business function provides you with data model 0G , which models the following business objects in the system as entity types:
Account
Company
Profit Center
Cost Center
Consolidation Unit
Cost Element
This enables you to use the following functions for these business objects:
Approval Process for Master Data Changes
You can use a workflow to perform the approval process for changing master data, and document the approval process for reviewing purposes. You can choose
one of several workflow processes, which have different levels of approval details. For more information, see Workflow Templates for Financials.
The most detailed process begins with a request for change, which can be evaluated and commented by various persons. Once the request has been evaluated,
considered and approved, the system executes the changes. The changes then undergo a final check and are either approved or rejected. Change requests
document and manage all steps in the approval p rocess.
Master Data Change
You can access and change the master data from within a worklist in the portal. For more information, see Master Data Processing.
Versioning of Master Data
The changes are stored in editions. Editions let you display past values of the master data at any time and define future values. Change documents document
when master data was changed and by whom the changes were made. You also can display the approval process and review the reasoning behind the
changes.
Replication of Master Data
You can replicate the master data changes from the Master Data Governance hub to your decentralized systems. The data replication framework enables the
automated replication of data. You can run such replications either on a regular basis or on demand.
Enterprise services for replicating the data are available in the following application components:
General Ledger (FI-GL)
Controlling (CO)
Business Consolidation (FIN-SEM-BCS)
If you want to use enterprise services to replicate master data, you can point-to-point communication.
Master Data Governance for Financials, SOA OrganizationalUnits
Technical Data
Technical Name of Business Function FIN_MDM_SOA_ORG
Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function
Available From SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 6.0
Technical Usage Central App lications
Application Component General Ledger (FI-GL) and Controlling (CO)
Required Business Function Not relevant
This business function allows you to use enterprise services to import the master data of accounts and cost elements, including hierarchies thereof, from the
Master Data Governance hub into your decentralized systems. This provides your enterprise with the following benefits:
More efficient master data management
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 65 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 66/148
Improved compliance with the fundamentals of adequate enterprise governance by means of automated, secure, and documented replication of master data
Faster individual and consolidated financial statements
All this reduces your total cost of ownership (TCO).
Integration
For processing master data and using enterprise services for exporting data from the Master Data Governance hub, you can use the business function Master
Data Governance for Financials, Organizational Units (FIN_MDM_ORG).
Prerequisites
You have installed the following components as of the version given:
Type of Component Component Is Needed Only for the Following Features
Software Component SAP_APPL 605 and EA-APPL 605
XI/ESR Content SAP_APPL 6.05, namespace
http://sap.com/xi/APPL/Global2
To be able to import the master data, you need to have made the required Customizing settings for the receiving application component.
You have made the required settings in Customizing under Cross-Application Components Processes and Tools for Enterprise Applications Master Data
Governance Master Data Governance for Financials Enterprise Services Inbound Services for Financials Master Data .
Features
The following enterprise services are available for importing master data:
Replicate Chart of Accounts
Confirm Chart of Accounts Replication
Replicate General Ledger Account Master as Bulk
Confirm General Ledger Account Master Replication as Bulk
Replicate Financial Reporting Structure
Confirm Financial Reporting Structure Replication
Replicate Company as Bulk
Confirm Company Replication as Bulk
Replicate Profit Centre as Bulk
Confirm Profit Centre Replication as Bulk
Replicate Profit Centre Group Hierarchy
Confirm Profit Centre Group Hierarchy Replication
Replicate Cost Centre as Bulk
Confirm Cost Centre Replication as Bulk
Replicate Cost Centre Group Hierarchy
Confirm Cost Centre Group Hierarchy Replication
Replicate Cost Element as Bulk
Confirm Cost Element Replication as Bulk
Replicate Cost Element Group Hierarchy
Confirm Cost Element Group Hierarchy Replication
Master Data Governance for Financials, SOA ChtAccts and FRS
Technical Data
Technical Name of Business Function FIN_MDM_SOA_CU
Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function
Available From SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 6.0
Technical Usage Strategic Enterprise Management
Application Component Business Consolidation (FIN-SEM-BCS)
Required Business Function Not relevant
This business function allows you to use enterprise services to import the master data of consolidation charts of accounts and item hierarchies from the Master
Data Governance hub into your decentralized systems. This provides the following benefits for your enterprise:
More efficient master data management
Improved compliance with the fundamentals of adequate enterprise governance by means of automated, secure, and documented replication of master data
Faster individual and consolidated financial statements
All this reduces your total cost of ownership (TCO).
Integration
You can use the bus iness function Master Data Governance for Financials, Organizational Units (FIN_MDM_ORG) for processing the master data and for
exporting the data from the Master Data Governance hub using enterprise services.
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 66 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 67/148
Prerequisites
You have installed the following components as of the version listed:
Type of Component Component Required for the Following Features Only
Software Component SEM_BW 605
XI/ESR Content FINBASIS 604 and SEM-BW 605, namespace
http://sap.com/xi/SEM-BW/Global2
You have made the required settings in Customizing under Cross-Application Components Processes and Tools for Enterprise Applications Master Data
Governance Master Data Governance for Financials Enterprise Services Inbound Services for Business Consolidation .
Features
The following enterprise services are available for importing master data:
Replicate Chart of Accounts
Confirm Chart of Accounts Replication
Replicate Financial Reporting Structure
Confirm Financial Reporting Structure Replication
CATS classic: cProjects Details
Technical Data
Technical Name of Business Function CA_CATS_CPR_CORE
Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function
Available as of SAP enhancement package 3 for SAP ERP 6.0
Technical Usage Central App lications
Application Component Cross-Application Time Sheet (CA-TS)
Directly Dependent Business Function You Need to Activate Not relevant
You can use this business function to implement the time sheet as a single point of entry for entering project time confirmations. It enables your employees to
simultaneously save confirmation details for collaboration projects (cProjects), such as remaining work time or percentage complete, when recording working times
with the CATS class ic application.
Integration
If you implement the CATS regular Web Dynpro JAVA application, you must also activate the CATS regular: cProject Details bus iness function.
Prerequisites
You have installed the following components as of the version mentioned:
Type of Component Component Only Required for the Following Functions
Software Component SAP_APPL 603
You have activated this business function.
You are using cProjects 4.5 and record time confirmations for your projects with the Cross-Application Time Sheet.
Features
When you implement this business function, you employees only need to call up one application to enter project time confirmations. This expediates and
simplifies the confirmation process. For more information, see Time Recording Using the Cross-Application Time Sheet.
Confirmations details are saved on the project level, not on the level of an individual time confirmation. This enables your employees to enter data such as the
final time confirmation for an entire project or subproject.
Recorded data is tranferred directly and synchronously to cProjects. It is not saved in the Cross-Application Time Sheet, thus avoiding double data storage and
constantly ensuring data consistency.
More Information
For more information, see SAP Library: SAP cProjects Suite Project and Portfolio Managment Collaboration P rojects Editing Project Structures
Confirmation Time Recording Using the Cross-Appli cation Time Sheet
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 67 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 68/148
CATS Classic for Concurrent Employment
Technical Data
Technical Name of Business Function CA_CATS_CE
Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function
Available as of SAP enhancement package 4 for SAP ERP 6.0
Technical Usage Central App lications
Application Component Cross-Application Time Sheet (CATS)
Concurrent Employment (PA-CE)
Directly Dependent Business Function You Need to Activate Not relevant
You can use this business function to greatly simplify the recording of concurrent employees' working times for users of the CATS classic application interface.
Your users can use these functions to record working times for all of an employee's personnel assignments in one work step. This enables you to more easily
distribute the working times that need to be recorded and analyze error situations more quickly.
These functions are available for recording working times by employees themselves as well as for recording scenarios by centralized or decentralized time
administrators (multi-person recording).
This business function is only relevant if you implement Personnel Management solution SAP ERP 6.0 or higher as well as the Concurrent Employment
functions.
Integration
If you also would like to use the Concurrent Employment functions for users of the Employee Self-Service application CATS Regular/Recording of Working Times,
you must also activate the business function HCM, Time and Labor Management for Concurrent Employment.
Prerequisites
You have installed the following components as of the version mentioned:
Type of Component Component Only Required for the Following Functions
Software Component SAP_APPL 604
You use the Personnel Management solution SAP ERP 6.0. You have activated the Concurrent Employment functions in your system there, as well. For more
information, see Concurrent Employment.
Features
Recording of Working Times by Employees Themselves
If concurrent employees are recording their working times themselves, they are shown a list on the initial screen where they can select their personnel
assignments. In the recording view, employees can record times for their personnel assignments individually or all at the same time. Additional fields allow
employees to identify the personnel assignment.
In the release v iew and variable v iew, the data is also available for all personnel assignments at a glance.
Recording of Working Times for Multiple People
If you record working times for multiple people centrally, you are shown a list on the initial screen where you can select all of a person's personnel assignments.
This function is available independent of the process you use for person selections.
In recording view, all of an employee's personnel assignments can be processed at the same time. Additional fields in recording view enable you to uniquelyidentify an employee's particular personnel assignment here, as well.
More Information
For more information, see Cross-Application Time Sheet (CATS) for Concurrent Employment.
CATS regular: cProjects Details
Note
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 68 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 69/148
Technical Data
Technical Name of Business Function CA_CATS_CPR
Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function
Available as of SAP enhancement package 3 for SAP ERP 6.0
Technical Usage HCM Self-Services
Application Component Cross-Application Time Sheet (CA-TS)
Directly Dependent Business Function You Need to Activate Enterprise Extension Human Capital Management (EA-HR)
Business Function CATS classic: cProjects Details (CA_CATS_CPR_CORE)
You can use this business function to implement the time sheet as a single point-of-entry for entering project time confirmations. It enables your employees to
simultaneously save confirmation details for Collaboration Projects (cProjects), such as remaining work or percentage complete, when recording working times
with the CATS regular JAVA Web Dynpro app lication.
Prerequisites
You have installed the following components as of the version mentioned:
Type of Component Component Only Required for the Following Functions
Software Component EA-HR 603
JAVA Software Component SAP ESS 603
Portal Content Business Package for Employee Self-Service
1.31
You have activated this business function.
You are using cProjects 4.5 and record time confirmations for your projects with the Cross-Application Time Sheet.
You are using the CATS regular JAVA Web Dynpro application for the Cross Application Time Sheet and have done the necessary Customizing for the
application. For more information, see CATS regular / Record Working Time (Web-Dynpro).
You have activated the required functions in the back-end system by activating the CATS classic: cProjects Details (CA_CATS_CPR_CORE) business function.
You have activated the Human Capital Management (EA-HR) Enterprise Extension.
Features
When you implement this business function, your employees only need to call up the CATS regular application to enter project time confirmations. This speeds
up and simplifies the confirmation process.
For more information, see Time Recording Using the Cross-Application Time Sheet.
Confirmation data is saved on the project level, not on the level of an individual time confirmation. This enables your employees to enter data such as the final
time confirmation for an entire project or subproject.
Recorded data is tranferred synchronously to cProjects. It is not saved in the Cross-Application Time Sheet, thus avoiding double data storage and constantly
ensuring data consistency.
More Information
For more information, see SAP Library: SAP cProjects Suite Project and Portfolio Managment Collaboration P rojects Editing Project Structures
Confirmation Time Recording Using the Cross-Appli cation Time Sheet
SAP for Defense & Security
DFPS, Logistical Operational Support
Technical Data
Technical Name of Business Function DFPS_OF_DEPL_LOG
Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function
Available As O f SAP enhancement package 3 for SAP ERP 6.0
Technical Usage Defense
Application Component Defense Forces & Public Security(IS-DFS)
Business Function That You Also Have to Activate Enterprise Extension Defense Forces & Public Security (EA-DFP)
This business function provides new functions in all areas of the Defense Forces & Public Security component. The new functions support armed forces, police,
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 69 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 70/148
and aid agencies in domestic-base processes and to perform operations and exercises with a multilevel sys tem landscape.
Unlike other business functions, these functions are immediately active once you have installed the software component version EA-DFPS 603 and they
enhance the functions of the EA-DFPS software component without additional activation steps. Therefore, a test catalog is not available for this business
function.
Due to the extent of the enhancements and data conversions required, the installation process may take longer.
With software component version EA-DFPS 603, you can no longer integrate the mobile applications of SAP Mobile Defense Solution 1.0. Instead, use SAP
Mobile Defense & Security 1.5.
Prerequisites
You have installed the following components for the version mentioned and higher:
Component Type Component Only Required for the Following Functions
Software Component EA-APPL 603
EA-DFPS 603
SAP_APPL 603
BI Content SAP NetWeaver 7.0 BI Content Add-On 3 Support
Package 08
You are familiar with the Enterprise Extension Defense Forces & Public Security (EA-DFP).
In Customizing for Defense Forces & Public Security , you have performed the new activities.
Features
Organizational Flexibility
Org anizational Structures:
If the periods of your operations or exercises change, you can shift the periods of operational structures and exercise targets mapped in the system
accordingly.
In the operations and exercises calendar , you can also evaluate the force providers and command responsibility for force elements and operations or exercises.
You can also perform additional evaluations through assignments to projects and maintenance orders. Furthermore, the Gantt charts in the Structures
Workbench application allow you to display organizational data in calendar form.
When copying structures, you can copy multiple structures that run in parallel into multiple other structures at once. The system thus facilitates the mapping of
consistent organizational structures.
Infrastructure and Material Categories:
You can plan the equipment for a force element with buildings and land ( authorized infrastructure) and compare this plan with the actual equipment (actualinfrastructure) in an authorized/actual comparison.
You can copy material or infrastructure assignments of a force element or position to another object of the same type.
You can let the system create provisions or equipment packages automatically based on known consumption values.
To describe the properties of an equipment package in more detail, you can assign an external material group to the underlying material master record directly
in the application for process ing equipment packages.
You can specify a number for assignments of provisions packages to force elements.
You can display an overview of the assignments to material objects for selected force elements.
Personnel Categories:
As part of the process for assigning personnel to positions in operational structures and exercise targets, you can propose suitable persons and then convert
these proposals into active assignments.
When creating positions, you can assign jobs directly. You can also create positions using a copy function.
You can enter the flight training activities completed by personnel and transfer this data to the HR master data. You can then derive qualifications for these
persons from the training data.
Additional Assignments and Properties:
You can weight relationships and assignments and calculate the readiness of force elements based on these weightings.To determine the exact purpose of task organizations, you can distinguish their relationships based on the type of task organization.
When assigning technical objects to force elements, you can distinguish between the assignment to the owner (organizational assignment), utilizer (stock), and
holder (change authorization).
You can assign qualifications to force elements, positions, and jobs to map requirements.
You can shift the validity period of task organizations and material assignments to remove any data inconsistencies.
When you define and display the validity periods (to the minute) of relationships to task organizations, support relationships, and technical objects, the system
takes into account the respective time zone selected.
The system can pass on address ass ignments of an assigned business entity or higher-level force element to assigned force elements.
In addition to the master WBS element assignment, you can also assign additional WBS elements to force elements to map their involvement in projects.
A workflow is p rovided that notifies the agent responsible when the assignment of a force provider changes. The recipient can then make any changes required.
You can connect force elements and equipment packages to the classification system to describe their properties in more detail.
For selected force elements, you can display an overview of the services provided by other force elements. You can also replace service providers
automatically.
The system stores task organizations, support relationships, and assignments to technical objects, material objects, and Real Estate Management objects in a
uniform table framework.
Exporting and Importing Data:
You can export force element data to PDF forms. When doing so, you can also create interactive PDF forms whose data you can edit externally. You can then
import these changes b ack into the sys tem.
You can import external organizational data (for example, in XML format) into the system and convert it into corresponding data for force elements, positions, and
Caution
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 70 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 71/148
assignments.
Performing Approval Processes:
To delimit or delete activated object properties and assignments, you can perform an approval process.
A function is availab le that allows you to determine and display all measures (approval processes for organizational changes) in which a selected user was or
is involved.
Using D ecentralized Systems:
You can switch the system for force elements using workflows and checks that are triggered automatically in the issuing and receiving ERP systems.
In decentralized systems, you can create task organizations to map location-based organizational structures. The system distributes information about
decentralized task organizations to all relevant systems in your system landscape.
Accounting
In Customizing, you can specify how the names of cost centers and profit centers are assigned automatically.
When a profit center is created, the system blocks it against postings and then removes this block in the approval process.
The system displays the assignments of accounting objects to the force element on separate tab pages.
Materials Management
In decentralized Warehouse Management Systems, you can operate offline warehouse management.
For relocations and transportations, you can use a relocation monitor to monitor the stocks, logistical follow-up actions, and so on for selected force elements.
You can post mass losses caused during transportations or in warehouses.
You can get a quick overview of procurement processes by disp laying the document flow in a hierarchical tree structure (from purchase requisition to purchase
order, right through to the delivery).
In the Planning Workbench, the system can display serial numbers to distinguish between items of material.
In Customizing, you can specify whether you want to include restricted batches in the ATP check.
Enhancements for distributed materials management are available for multisystem landscapes and cross-system material planning. For more information, seeCross-System Materials Management.
An alternative method to determine a supplier is available for the initial supply of force elements.
You can define NATO stock numbers and classify these numbers into groups and classes.
Maintenance
You can relocate technical objects for a force element to another force element within a system and externally through change of ownership, utilizer, or holder.
In the central system, you can edit settlement rules for maintenance orders from decentralized systems.
You can create maintenance books as PDF files for equipment and master equipment so that you can view maintenance data outside the system.
Support for Flight Operations
Logbook enhancements are available in the Aerospace & Defense Industry Solution (IS-AD-LBK) component, which you can use to edit flight and aircraft data
or perform technical debriefings, for example.
Using a central event monitor , you can display corresponding flight and maintenance events for selected master equipment and check availability.
You can enter an aircraft accident as a PDF file with all the relevant data for the aircraft involved.
You can group sites into areas.
You can enter training activities completed by persons for flights.
You can adjust the functions in the Status Board and Controlled Usage Rate applications to meet your requirements.
System Architecture
User Administration:
The system can assign authorizations to users that work with systems in your system landscape automatically after every organizational change.
You can compare changes to user master data that you made when working offline in decentralized systems after you have restored communication to the
Central User Administration and remove any data inconsistencies as necessary.
System Administration:
You can exchange data between the systems in your sys tem landscape and SAP NetWeaver Exchange Infrastructure (SAP XI).
You can define the organizational unit responsible for synchronization problems and assign clients to CCMS mechanisms directly in the production system.
In Customizing, you can define which reports are started in the system after synchronization has been completed successfully.
You can adapt the transport functions for Software Change Management to meet your own requirements.
Additional functions are available for optimizing number range monitoring.
Distribution:
You can use product data replication (PDR) to distribute object types such as: reference functional locations, reference measuring points, partners, approvals,
master warranties, production resources and tools, confirmations, relocations, relocation steps, and loading objects.
The following enhancements are also available:
The mechanism for distributing technical objects has been enhanced based on the new concept for assigning these objects.
You can enhance the distribution scope manually to include functional locations that belong to a force element.
You can include customer enhancements of specific tables in the distribution process.
You can distribute change documents and conversion rules using separate applications.
You can filter the IDocs to be distributed at plant level.
Archiving and Data Extraction:
You can archive the following objects/data:
Change documents (distributed system landscape)
Force elements and command and control relationships
Material objects (material planning objects, material containers, equipment packages, and provisions packages)
Assignments to material and infrastructure objects, task organizations, support relationships, and assignments to technical objects Assignments between change documents and organizational measures
Material planning records, external batches, relocations
Data for mass losses and loading objects
Data segments for extracting error logs (relevant only if you use SAP Mobile Defense & Security) and purchase requisitions are available.
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 71 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 72/148
Operation of Mobile Applications
New Customizing activities are available for connecting the mobile applications in SAP Mobile Defense & Security with the functions in the Defense Forces &
Public Security component.
DFPS, Logistical Operational Support 2
Technical Data
Technical Name of Business Function DFPS_OF_OS
Type of Business Function Enterprise business function
Available As O f SAP enhancement package 4 for SAP ERP 6.0
Technical Usage Defense
Application Component Defense Forces and Public Security (IS-DFS)
Business Function That You Also Have to Activate Enterprise business function DFPS, Logistical Operational Support
(DFPS_OF_DEPL_LOG)
This business function provides you with new functions for the Defense Forces & Public Security (DFPS) component. The new functions support armed forces,
police, and aid agencies in domestic-base processes and in performing operations and exercises with a multilevel sys tem landscape.
Prerequisites
You have installed the following components for the version mentioned and higher:
Component Type Component Only Required for the Following Functions
Software component EA-APPL 604
EA-DFPS 604
SAP_APPL 604
Portal content Business Package for Defense Forces & Public
Security 1.4
BI Content SAP NetWeaver 7.0 BI Content Add-On 3 Support
Package 09
Business function OPS_EC_INTEGRATION Integration of SAP Environmental Compliance into
the work area of the Environment, Health and
Safety (EH&S) component
Business function LOG_EAM_SIMP Function for making mass changes to equipment
(via transaction IE05)
You are familiar with the Defense Forces & Public Security (EA-DFP) enterprise extension and the DFPS, Logistical O perational Support
(DFPS_OF_DEPL_LOG) business function.
In Customizing for Defense Forces & Public Security , you have performed the new activities.
Features
Organizational Flexibility
You can use a mass change to edit the following logistical ass ignment information for multiple force elements at once:
Plant, MRP area, and storage location
Purchasing organization, purchasing group, reference element, organizational priority, and logistical level
You can use this function as an alternative to the existing functions for editing individual force elements if you need to edit larger volumes of data.
To process data inconsistencies centrally for Material and Infrastructure Assig nments, you have reports available that you can use to make the following
changes to one or more force elements at once:
Delete material assignments
Delete infrastructure assignments
Change the status of material assignments
Change the status of infrastructure assignments
Materials Management
You can use a new transaction to distribute or group storage locations. See Report: Distribute and Group Storage Locations.
The following new functions are available for the workbench for logistical deployment planning and execution:
You can represent the display in the stock/requirements list in all units of measure given in the material master record.You can use the Select Storage Loc. pushbutton to change the storage location of the requesting force element.
You can directly transfer post an infrastructure material managed in serial numbers in the serial number view to a different storage location.
For an existing purchase requisition for a material managed in serial numbers, you can copy serial numbers that you selected via the stock situation to the
purchase requisition.
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 72 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 73/148
See Requisitioning and Planning of Material.
For equipment for which the stock is in transit, the receiving storage location from the related stock transport order is displayed.
In a purchase order, you can copy the advice code from the main item to the subitems of the purchase order. If you change the advice code in the main item,
the system automatically updates the subitems with the new advice code. See Advice Code.
The following new functions are available in the authorized/actual comparison:
You can define customer selection parameters.
In Customizing, you can use a Business Add-In to define customer links and inc lude these links in the app lication.
You can display the serial numbers of installed equipment in the detail view.
You can consider unassigned storage locations of a stock MRP area in the authorized/actual comparison.
See Authorized/Actual Comparison.Initial supply is also possible for distributed materials management. Since the distributed materials management in a distributed system landscape can only
handle purchase orders that were converted from purchase requisitions, purchase requisitions instead of purchase orders are now created during initial supply.
See Initial Supply.
A new Business Add-In is available that, when deleting storage locations, you can use to delete table entries that the standard deletion program cannot include.
See Deleting Stock Storage Locations.
The following new functions are available for cross-plant reorganizations:
A new transaction is available for cross-plant reorganizations.
If you perform storage location mapping during a cross-plant reorganization, the system issues a warning message if storage locations with the same name
that are not yet assigned to a force element already exist in the new plant.
A detailed app lication log is available for each cross-plant reorganization. Each notification that is written to the application log is ass igned to the object that
was being processed when the notification was issued. It is also possible to jump from the application log to the display transaction of the relevant object.
During a cross-plant reorganization, the system edits purchasing documents with a release strategy. Performed releases for purchase requisitions and
purchase orders are thus reset.
You can perform a cross-plant reorganization for a force element that is active in a decentralized system.
A cross-plant reorganization is now also possib le without a structure change, whereas cross-plant reorganizations previously always required theorganizational or operational structure to be changed.
A new Business Add-In is available, which you can use to include additional materials in the list of materials to be copied.
See Support for Cross-Plant Reorganization.
You can use the integration of SAP Environmental Compliance into the work area of the Environment, Health and Safety (EH&S) component to display the data
from SAP Environmental Compliance directly on a separate tab page in the EH&S work area. See Integration of SAP Env. Compl. with EH&S Work Area.
This function is only available if the OPS_EC_INTEGRATION business function is activated in addition to this business function.
Maintenance
For the mass creation of maintenance notifications, you can use a new transaction. See Mass Creation of Maintenance Notifications.
In the application for making mass changes to equipment (via transaction IE05), the two fields Position in Superior Technical Object and Construction Type
Material of the Object are available on the new Structure Data tab page. See Mass Changes for Equipment.
The function for making mass changes to equipment (via transaction IE05) is only available if the LOG_EAM_SIMP bus iness function is activated.
You can use the BAdI: Delete Personnel Number from Operations in the Distribution Business Add-In to delete personnel numbers in maintenance order
operations in the decentralized system. See Distribution of Maintenance Objects.
If you use a distributed system landscape, you can forward the change authorization for multiple objects at once. See Change Authorization.
New functions for creating, changing, and reversing measurement documents in distributed systems are available. See Measurement Documents in
Distributed Systems.
You can use the training program functions to map training programs for maintenance orders (for example, also for flights). See Training Data and Qualifications.
Support for Flight Operations
You can use the staff assignment board to plan operations for your staff.
You can use the Mass Change Usage Rate function to change the usage rate for multiple aircraft at once.
For the Status Board and Controlled Usage Rate applications, you can make technical settings to accelerate the data selection for master equipment with
hierarchical s tructures. See Status Board.
System Architecture
When distributing data to the decentralized systems of your system landscape with product data replication (PDR), you can include the following data to
make it available for functions and processes in these systems:
Hazardous substance data for material
Partner data for customers or vendors
NATO stock number for material
Additional properties of force elements that you assign using SAP Military Data Exchange functions
Logbook
Assignments of material planning objects and material containers to Human Resources Management objects
You can archive DFPS-specific additional data from the Support for Flight Operations area for maintenance notifications, maintenance orders, and equipment.
If you have activated the Distributed Maintenance scenario, note the following:
You can archive data in both the central and decentralized systems. If you are using a distributed system landscape, you must work out an archiving
concept in sync with your system landscape that fulfills the following requirements: To exclude data inconsistencies you must specify exactly in which
systems and at what times data can be archived. You can only archive data when it is no longer needed for other processes.
You can use the Data Retention Tool (DART) to extract component-specific additional data, as well as information about the previous and subsequentpurchase requisition of purchase requisitions.
Caution
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 73 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 74/148
DFPS, Logistical Operational Support 3
Technical Data
Technical Name of Business Function DFPS_OF_LOG
Type of Business Function Enterprise business function
Available As O f SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 6.0
Technical Usage Defense Forces & Public Security
Application Component Defense Forces and Pub lic Security (IS-DFS)
Business Function That You Also Have to Activate Enterprise b usiness function DFPS, Logistical O perational Supp ort 2
(DFPS_OF_OS)
This business function enables you to use new functions in the Defense Forces & Public Security (DFPS) component. The new functions support armed forces,
police, and aid agencies in domestic-base processes as well as in performing operations and exercises with a multilevel system landscape.
Prerequisites
You have installed the following components for the version mentioned and higher:
Component Type Component Only Required for the Following Functions
Software component SAP_APPL 605
EA-APPL 605
EA-DFPS 605
Portal content Business Package for Defense Forces & Public
Security 1.51
App lication for the mass change of assignments to
relocation steps
Features
Organizational Flexibility
Displaying and Editing Ass ignments
You can use an application for mass changes to edit assignments of material planning objects, equipment packages, provisions packages, positions, and
packing instructions to relocation steps for more than one force element at once.
The application for making mass changes to support relationships provides additional selection and editing functions.
You can edit the address ass ignments of more than one force element at once.
You can display the logistics work centers assigned to an organizational structure and edit assignments of work centers to force elements or positions.
Furthermore, after copying a force element or a structure, the system can use a workflow to trigger the generation of new assignments of work centers to the
copy. The processor of the work item has an application available for generating these assignments, which provides the assignments that exist for the copy
template as default values.
In the Structures Workbench, the system displays the existing role assignments for force elements, positions, jobs, persons, and users. You can also
create or edit role assignments directly in this application.
Authorized Materials
You can assign an equipment package to an assignment to the material planning object. In material planning, for the materials that are assigned to the
equipment package, the system can then determine those material p lanning objects that comprise these materials as a model. The system considers these
material planning objects as additional authorized materials.
For assignments between force elements and material planning objects, you can specify whether these assignments are to be considered for the mass
execution of material planning. This also applies for indirect assignments via material containers.
Evaluations
You can display an overview of an organizational s tructure including the authorized personnel (assigned positions) and actual personnel (assigned persons).
You can display an overview of an organizational structure including the levels of readiness for each force element.
You can determine which force elements are not included in operations or exercises (by direct assignment or as a force provider) in a particular period and
are thus available for other use.
You can perform an authorized/actual comparison for equipment in terms of materials from an organizational structures perspective.
For an organizational structure, you can perform an authorized/actual comparison for the staffing of an organizational structure. This authorized/actual
comparison displays a comparative overview of the authorized personnel (assigned positions) and the actual personnel (staffing status of positions) for each
force element.
The enhancements to Human Resources search functions described in SAP Note 1314572 are available and you can adapt them for the special features of
the Defense Forces & Public Security component:
For the structure search, you also have evaluation paths defined via Customizing available for selection. For example, you can thus use the component-
specific structures (such as operational structures or exercise targets) to search for objects.
The object manager (function in Human Resources applications) contains these enhancements to the structure search. Furthermore, the object manager
provides the evaluation paths defined in Customizing for a keyword search. In both cases, the search can determine objects with a status that is not Active.
In the header area of the Change Profile app lication (transaction PPPM), the system disp lays the status of the currently selected object. On the tab pages
Requisitions and Requirement Blocks, the system displays the status of the relationship. When creating a relationship, this field is ready for input.
In the Find Objects for Requirements application (transaction PPQ2), you can use the enhanced structure search to limit the person subgroup that you want
to synchronize. Alternatively, you can specify a period in addition to a key date.
In transactions of the components Defense Forces & Public Security and Human Resources, you can include additional search helps for each HR object type.
Customizing
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 74 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 75/148
You can include additional functions (transactions, reports, views, view clusters) in the Structures Workbench menu.
Automatic shipp ing point determination is availab le for processing stock elements and provisions elements in the Structures Workbench.
You can define system follow-up actions that are to be performed after a force element or structure has been copied.
You can specify which subtype of infotype 1952 (Address) is used in Enterprise Services for the Location Assignment value.
Materials Management
Requisitioning and Planning of Material
For the replenishment procedure with equipment packages, you can implement the functions of the later handling unit assignment and thus structure the
replenishment procedure more flexibly. Previously, the latest point at which you could assign a particular handling unit (HU) to a stock transport requisition
was when you converted this stock transport requisition to a stock transport order. Now, you can make this assignment at a later point (up until goods issue of
the delivery) during the replenishment procedure.
You can use the new Assign HU pushbutton in the Structures Workbench or in the Planning Workbench to assign a handling unit to a PReq or purchase
order. The delivery of an HU purchase order is now no longer generated in the same step; instead, you can use the new pushbutton to assign an HU to an
HU purchase order at a later point. Alternatively, it is possible to wait until the delivery to assign an HU or to pack a completely new HU. See Requisitioning
and Planning of Material.
A new transaction is available for generating a pick lis t for the creation of handling units based on equipment packages (/ISDFPS/EPA_PRINT). A pick list
based on a delivery contains new additional information in a separate line if a material originally comes from the requirement of an EPA. The EPA-relevant
information includes the number of the EPA and whether the material is the leading record, a mandatory part, or an optional part of the EPA. See Pick List for
Equipment Packages.
The authorized/actual comparison contains a new material-container-oriented view for improved planning. In this view, it is possible to display all material
containers for a material planning object (MPO) that contain the MPO and are assigned to a force element. The material containers are displayed with all
contained MPOs and with the equipment packages that are derived from the material container. See Authorized/Actual Comparison.
You can create an assignment between a "force element-material planning object" relationship and an equipment package (EPA). To consider this
assignment in the authorized/actual comparison, new MPO lines are dynamically generated in the material list. Two new columns provide you with
information about the EPA assignment. One column displays the EPA number; the other column displays the material through which the assignment
between EPA and MPO was established. You can use a pushbutton to choose between different views for the EPA assignment. The initial screen for the
authorized/actual comparison contains three new selection options that you can use to specify how the equipment packages are to be evaluated. See
Authorized/Actual Comparison.
A new transaction (/ISDFPS/MAT_COMP_PR) is available for the procurement of authorized materials. You can use this transaction to create and convert
procurement proposals. You can use this transaction in material planning to create purchase requisitions for multiple force elements and MPOs at once. You
can use the Adjust Mass Purchase Requisition for Authorized/Actual Comparison Business Add-In to adjust the generated mass purchase requisitions.
You can also access the mass generation of purchase requisitions via the material list from the detail view for the MPO and in relocation planning. See
Creation of Procurement Proposals.
You can use the Customizing activity Adjust Requested Quantity for New PReqs in Material Planning Process to adjust the requested quantity for new
purchase requisitions. You can use the Business Add-In Adjust Quantities in Material Planning to adjust quantities in material planning. See Requisitioning
and Planning of Material.
A new transaction (/ISDFPS/REORG1) is available to display and change reorganizations. You can specify warehouse assignments between issuing and
receiving force elements. In the existing transaction (/ISDFPS/CHANGE_SLOC) for grouping and distributing storage locations, you can use the specified
warehouse assignments from the reorganization as default values. If you use transaction /ISDFPS/CHANGE_SLOC with a reorganization, you can save the
issue list without posting the goods movements and can continue processing later. In this transaction, you can also distribute quantities from one storage
location to multiple storage locations, change the receiving storage location, and select the transfer posting movement type for each stock type. You can use
the BAdI Adjust Reorganizations to adapt transaction /ISDFPS/CHANGE_SLOC when it is used for reorganizations. See Report: Display /Change
Reorganizations .
You can use the Business Add-In Determine Deviation Reason for Proof of Delivery in Customizing for Shipping to determine the default deviation reason for
proofs of delivery and override this as required. See POD: Adjustment of the Reason for the Deviation.
Master Data
You can use a new transaction to hide entries that are no longer required or that are invalid in the input help for purchasing groups, material groups, and
purchasing organizations, if the assigned force elements are no longer valid with regard to time. See Hiding of Invalid Entries from Input Help .
In the transaction for displaying the change documents for material master records (transaction MM04), a new indicator is available on the initial screen. You
can use this indicator to display all change documents at field level on one screen using the SAP List Viewer. This means that you do not have to navigate
from each individual change document header to the respective change documents at field level. See Disp lay and Change Master Data.
In the transaction for making mass changes to material master data (transaction MM17), table MARA (general material data) contains four DFPS-specific
fields: MCOND (material condition management), RETDELC (return code), LOGLEV_RETO (return up to logistical level), and NSNID (NATO stock number).
See Disp lay and Change Master Data.
Maintenance
For distributed maintenance, in Customizing for maintenance orders and maintenance notifications, you can specify when (in number of days) the change
authorization for these objects is to be automatically transferred from the decentralized system to the central system after the technical completion of these
objects. See Change Authorization.
For distributed maintenance, in Customizing for measuring documents, you can specify when (in number of days) this document is to be archived in the central
system after the creation of a measurement document. See Measurement Documents in Distributed Sys tems.
You can forward maintenance notifications and orders that were generated as maintenance call objects for a maintenance plan as well as the change
authorization for these maintenance notifications and order to the system in which the responsible work center assigned to them is operational. They are thus
available in the system in which they are to be processed. See Forwarding of Maintenance Call Objects.
Support for Flight Operations
You can use the Site Equipment functions to assign a site to equipment without having to designate this equipment as master equipment. See Site Equipment.
In Customizing for master equipment, you can permit multiple assignments to sites. See Master Equipment.
System Architecture
Archiving
To ensure data consistency in a distributed system landscape, the system ensures that maintenance orders, maintenance notifications, equipment,
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 75 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 76/148
functional locations, and measurement documents can only be archived in the central system.
For measurement documents, you can specify the archiving time via Customizing.
You can use the PM_EQUI archiving object to archive site equipment data.
When archiving equipment packages with the IS-DFS_EPA archiving object, the sy stem prevents an object from being archived if it is still ass igned to an
assignment between force elements and material planning objects.
Distribution
When distributing assignments between force elements and material planning objects, the system also considers equipment packages that are assigned to
these assignments. The VMPO2EPA FO X relationship is available for this p urpose.
For distribution, the system also considers site equipment (in the same way as master equipment).
The system prevents maintenance orders, maintenance notifications, equipment, functional locations, and measurement documents that are businesscompleted in the central system or that have received the deletion indicator through the archiving process from being included in further distribution
processes.
You can use filter rules to reduce the volume of data when distributing maintenance orders and notifications and when forwarding change authorizations. You
use Business Rule Framework plus to define the rules.
DFPS, Personal Equipment
Technical Data
Technical Name of Business Function DFPS_OF_PERS_EQUI
Type of Business Function Enterprise business function
Available As O f SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 6.0
Technical Usage Defense Forces & Public Security
Application Component Defense Forces and Pub lic Security (IS-DFS)
Business Function That You Also Have to Activate Enterprise b usiness function DFPS, Logistical O perational Supp ort
(DFPS_OF_DEPL_LOG)
You can use this business function to define the authorized materials for persons for the equipment of persons with material. You can use separate applications to
issue and return personal and functional equipment for persons. Evaluation applications are available for monitoring the authorized material equipment and the
material assignment to persons.
Prerequisites
You have installed the following components for the version mentioned and higher:
Component Type Component Only Required for the Following Functions
Software component SAP_APPL 605
EA-APPL 605
EA-DFPS 605
Portal content Business Package for Defense Forces & Public
Security 1.51
Features
Organizational Flexibility
For the process of equipping persons with material, you can use Organizational Flexibility functions to define the corresponding authorized materials for
persons and evaluate the equipment of persons:
When defining the authorized materials for positions, jobs, and force elements, you can specify whether the assignment of a material planning object or a
material container for the process for the equipment of persons in terms of materials is to be used for planning authorized personal equipment or authorized
functional equipment:
When assigning material planning objects and material containers to positions or jobs, you can choose whether these assignments are to be used to plan the
equipment of persons in terms of materials as authorized personal equipment or authorized functional equipment.
When assigning material planning objects and material containers to force elements, you can choose whether these assignments are to be used to plan the
equipment of persons in terms of materials as authorized personal equipment or authorized functional equipment, or whether these assignments are not to be
used in this p rocess (structural equipment).
You can use the Equipment Status application to show, for a key date for selected persons, a comparative overview of the authorized materials of the
equipment in terms of materials according to infotype 0800 (Material Assignment) relevant to these persons.
You can use the Monitoring Equipment app lication to evaluate infotype 0800 (Material Ass ignment) for any periods.
Materials Management
Materials Management contains four applications for the process of issuing and returning personal and functional equipment of persons:Issue of Personal Equipment
Return of Personal Equipment
Issue of Functional Equipment
Return of Functional Equipment
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 76 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 77/148
You can use the applications for issuing personal and functional equipment to issue personal and functional equipment for a required period in three steps. You
can create the list of materials to be issued either manually or based on a person’s authorized material equipment.
You can use the applications for returning personal and functional equipment to return personal and functional equipment in three steps.
In the first step for each application, you select the personnel for whom equipment is to be issued or returned. In the second step, you select the materials
concerned for each person, and in the third step, you post your selection. For issued and returned materials, the system can create an issuing or return document
as a PDF file for each person.
The applications are included in the Business Package for Defense Forces & Pub lic Security as worksets.
DFPS, Investigative Case Management for SecurityOrganizations
Technical Data
Technical Name of Business Function DFPS_ICM_OF
Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function
Available As O f SAP enhancement package 4 for SAP ERP 6.0
Technical Usage Defense for Public Admin.
Application Component Case management for security organizations (IS-DFS-ICM)
Business Function That You Also Have to Activate Enterprise Business Function DFPS, Logistical Operational Support
(DFPS_OF_DEPL_LOG)
You can use this business function to create the prerequisite for integrating functions of the Organizational Flexibility area with the functions of the Investigative
Case Management System into SAP Customer Relationship Management.
Integration
You use this business function if you want to implement the Investigative Case Management System from SAP Customer Relationship Management.
Prerequisites
You have installed the following components for the version mentioned and higher:
Component Type Component Only Required for the Following Functions
Software Component EA-APPL 604
EA-DFPS 604
SAP_APPL 604
SAP Customer Relationship Management SAP CRM 7.0
You are familiar with the Defense Forces & Public Security (EA-DFP) Enterprise Extension and the DFPS, Logistical Operational Support
(DFPS_OF_DEPL_LOG) business function.
You are using the Investigative Case Management System from SAP Customer Relationship Management and are familiar with the functions of this system.
In Customizing for Defense Forces & Public Security , you have performed the activities under Investigative Case Management .
Features
The following functions are available:
The system provides the necessary technical prerequisites for accessing Organizational Flexibility functions from a CRM system for implementing the
Investigative Case Management System.If you assign a case ID to an operation, the system displays this assignment in the Structures Workbench app lication.
You can assign a position to a force element via the A/B 290 relationship to specify which position is responsible for an operation as the operation planner .
For more information, see Investigative Case Management.
DFPS, Distribution of Signatures
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 77 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 78/148
Technical Data
Technical Name of Business Function DFPS_PM_DIS_SIG
Type of Business Function Enterprise business function
Available As O f SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 6.0
Technical Usage Defense Forces & Public Security
Application Component Plant Maintenance (IS-DFS-PM), Master Data Dis tribution (IS-DFS-PDR)
Business Function That You Also Have to Activate Enterprise b usiness function DFPS, Logistical O perational Supp ort 3
(DFPS_OF_LOG)
You can use this business function to distribute digital signatures between the ERP systems in your system landscape for the following objects of the areas
Maintenance and Support for Flight Operations:
Log entry
Log notification
Order operation in logbook
Operations for a maintenance order (outside of the logbook)
If you activate this business function, you also have the option of distributing digital signatures for maintenance order operations (outside of the logbook) between
an ERP system and SAP Mobile Defense & Security .
Integration
In the ERP system, digital signatures are created using the functions of the Security component (BC-SEC) of SAP NetWeaver .
The digital signatures are distributed between the ERP systems in distribution processes of the Defense Forces & Public Security component.
If you implement SAP Mobile Defense & Security you can sign operations for a maintenance order (outside of the logbook) on mobile devices and distribute this
signature together with the relevant object to the ERP system. There, the system handles this signature in the same way as signatures that were created directly
in the ERP system. The system distributes digital signatures for operations for a maintenance order in the back-end system to the mobile device. These
operations are indicated appropriately and cannot be changed on the mobile device.
Prerequisites
You have installed the following components for the version mentioned and higher:
Component Type Component Only Required for the Following Functions
Software component SAP_APPL 605
EA-APPL 605
EA-DFPS 605
The following prerequisites must be fulfilled:
You operate the involved systems either all in Unicode mode or in non-Unicode mode with an identical character set.
Customizing, particularly for signature strategies, signatures, authorization groups, maintenance order applications, and logbook applications, is identical in the
systems involved.
To avoid data inconsistencies, open signature processes (order operations in the logbook) must have been completed or terminated in all involved systems
before this business function is ac tivated.
Features
Signature Objects
In addition to other enhancements to the standard functions for the digital signature, the signature objects LBK_OPR and EAMDISOP are available for order
operations inside and outside the logbook. These signature objects ensure that the keys of the signed documents remain the same after distribution to the target
system.
Distribution
To distribute the digital signatures between ERP systems, an additional FOX object for digital signatures and the required FOX relationships are available.
For more information about distributing digital signatures, see Distribution of Digital Signatures for Maintenance Objects.
DFPS, Integration with SAP Mobile Defense & Security
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 78 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 79/148
Technical Data
Technical Name of Business Function DFPS_MDS_INTEGRATION
Type of Business Function Enterprise business function
Available As O f SAP enhancement package 4 for SAP ERP 6.0
Technical Usage Defense
Application Component Mobile Applications (IS-DFS-MA)
Business Function That You Also Have to Activate Enterprise business function DFPS, Logistical Operational Support
(DFPS_OF_DEPL_LOG)
You can use this business function to activate additional functions in the ERP system that you require if you want to implement the full range of the features of SAP
Mobile Defense & Security 1.6 (or higher).
Integration
You use this business function if you want to implement SAP Mobile Defense & Security 1.6.
Prerequisites
You have installed the following components for the version mentioned and higher:
Component Type Component Only Required for the Following Functions
Software component EA-APPL 604
EA-DFPS 604SAP_APPL 604
Software component DEF-MDS 160
SAPMDS 160
You are familiar with the Enterprise Extension Defense Forces & Public Security and the business function DFPS, Logistical Operational Support.
In Customizing for Defense Forces & Public Security , you have performed the new activities under Mobile Applications.
Features
The following new functions are available:
The system provides the technical p rerequisites for using SAP Mobile D efense & Security 1.6.
You use new Customizing activities to make the necessary settings to be able to check whether a mobile device that is reassigned to a middleware system is
compatible with the sys tem landscape.
You use a new Customizing activity to specify various parameter values for mobile applications.
To use the Accident Report mobile app lication, you use a new Customizing activity to specify the statuses available in the system for accident reports.For more information about these functions, see the documentation for SAP Mobile Defense & Security 1.6.
DFPS, Integration with SAP Mobile Defense & Security 2
Technical Data
Technical Name of Business Function DFPS_MDS_INTEGRATION_2
Type of Business Function Enterprise business function
Available As O f SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 6.0
Technical Usage Defense
Application Component Mobile Appl ications (IS-DFS-MA)
Business Function That You Also Have to Activate DFPS, Integration with SAP Mobile Defense & Security
(DFPS_MDS_INTEGRATION)
You can use this business function in the ERP system to fulfill the technical prerequisites for using new functions of SAP Mobile Defense & Security 1.6 (or
higher) on mobile devices.
Integration
You use this business function if you want to implement all of the features of SAP Mobile Defense & Security 1.6.
Prerequisites
You have installed the following components for the version mentioned and higher:
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 79 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 80/148
Component Type Component Only Required for the Following Functions
Software component EA-APPL 605
EA-DFPS 605
SAP_APPL 605
Software component DEF-MDS 160
SAPMDS 160
You are familiar with the enterprise business function DFPS, Integration with SAP Mobile Defense & Security .
Features
In the ERP system, you can use this business function to fulfill the necessary technical prerequisites for the following functions:
Use of the s tructural authorizations to control the authorization assignment for the SAP Mobile Defense & Security (SAP MDS) mobile applications
Functions for creating and editing assignments between equipment production resources/tools and maintenance orders in SAP Mobile Defense & Security
mobile app lications
The necessary functions in the mobile applications will be available with a future SAP Mobile Defense & Security release.
Reporting Using XBRL Standards
Technical Data
Technical Name of Business Function FIN_ACC_XBRL
Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function
Available As O f SAP enhancement package 3 for SAP ERP 6.0
Technical Usage Strategic Enterprise Mgmt
Application Component XBRL Reporting (FIN-FB-XR)
Directly Dependent Business Function Requiring Activation in
Addition
Not relevant
You can use this business function to create XML documents using the internationally accepted XBRL format (specification 2.1). XBRL is particularly beneficial
for reporting in financial accounting because certain authorities and institutions require enterprises to report information in this format. You can access and prepare
the data for this purpose by means of executing queries of SAP NetWeaver Business Intelligence, thereby relinquishing the need to implement additional
software.
The new application features a portal-based, s treamlined user interface your employees can access in SAP NetWeaver Portal or SAP NetWeaver Business
Client. This user interface enables you to configure and generate XML documents.
As of February, 2009, SAP also offers the solution SAP BusinessObjects XBRL Publishing by Ubmatrix for the creation of XBRL documents. This solution
features the ability to convert Excel workbooks into XBRL documents.
As in XBRL Reporting (FIN-FB-XR), you can use SAP BusinessO bjects XBRL Publishing by Ubmatrix to create XBRL documents from all data that can be
evaluated with BI queries. Furthermore, SAP BusinessO bjects XBRL Publis hing by Ubmatrix offers several other functions:
Enhancement of XBRL taxonomies
Validation of XBRL documents
Manual editing of XBRL documents
In general, SAP recommends you use the new solution SAP BusinessObjects XBRL Publishing by Ubmatrix for the creation of XBRL documents, instead of
the present business function.
For more information about SAP BusinessOb jects XBRL Publishing b y Ubmatrix, see http://sap.com/epm. For current information about the XBRLstrategy of SAP, see SAP Note 1278989.
Integration
Reporting Using XBRL Standards is a part of the Local Close bus iness process, which is located in the system you use for SAP Solution Manager. You also can
use the reporting function in other areas - for example, Disclosure and Reporting in the SAP for Banking industry solution.
Reporting using XBRL standards uses various queries of your BI system to evaluate your business data.
Authorities that require XBRL reporting typically furnish you with a taxonomy. You also can download current taxonomies from the Internet.
Prerequisites
You have installed the following components as of the version given:
Recommendation
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 80 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 81/148
Type of Component Component Is Needed Only for the Following Features
Software Component FINBASIS 603
SEM_BW 603
SAP NetWeaver Portal As of SAP NetWeaver 7.00, SP14
Portal Content As of Business Package BP for XBRL Reporting
1.30
To use this business function, the following prerequisites also have to be met:
You have assigned the objects of business package BP for XBRL Reporting 1.30 to an existing role.You have assigned this role to all colleagues that require this role.
In your BI system, you have configured the queries you need for reporting.
In your back-end system, you have activated this business function.
In your back-end system, you have checked whether you require the two Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) Instance Documents and Adjust Time Contexts in
Background Report P rogram. To do this, in Customizing for Cross-Application Components, choose General Application Functions XBRL Reporting
Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) .
Features
This business function covers both the configuration and the execution of reporting. Essential parts of configuration are located in the Web application where
you define the following entities:
In the data basis, you centrally define which queries of your BI system you want to use for XBRL reporting.
Taxonomies are sets of rules for creating XBRL reports; for example, there are taxonomies for U.S. GAAP and for German commercial code (HGB).
You can use value selections to define selections that you need in the same way for different taxonomy elements.
You use dimension mapping to map the fields of the queries and their values to the XBRL dimensions and their values.You use the report category to define the mapping of the fields of the assigned queries to the elements of the assigned taxonomy.
You create the instance documents – that is, the various reports – in the Web application. An additional function for mass processing is available in the back-end
system.
For more information about this business function, see the following:
App lication component XBRL Reporting (FIN-FB-XR)
Business package BP for XBRL Reporting 1.30
Security Guide for the XBRL Reporting (FIN-FB-XR) component
Information Lifecycle Management: Tax Auditing
Technical Data
Technical Name of Business Function FIN_ACC_ILM
Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function
Available As O f SAP enhancement package 4 for SAP ERP 6.0
Technical Usage Central App lications
Application Component Retention Warehouse (BC-ILM-RW)
Directly Dependent Business Function Requiring Activation in
Addition
Information Lifecycle Management (ILM)
Using this business function, you can use extraction services of the Retention Warehouse for archiving the following information when you decommission an SAP
system:
Metadata from the ABAP Dictionary
Customizing data
Master data
This information completes the existing archive data by providing additional information needed for storing and evaluating the data independently of the system.
Another name for extraction services is Context Data Extractor (CDE).
Integration
You can use extraction services starting from Release 4.6C. You get the required software from SAP System Landscape Optimization (SLO).
The extraction services belong to SAP NetWeaver Information Lifecycle Management.
Prerequisites
You have installed the following components as of the version given:
Type of Component Component
Software Component SAP_APPL 604, EA-APPL 604
Note
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 81 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 82/148
Features
Before you can archive the required information, you have to configure the data being archived in Customizing. The standard system contains a complete
configuration for SAP systems. You can enhance this configuration by adding your own customer-specific objects. In Customizing for SAP NetWeaver under
Application Server Basis Services Information Lifecycle Management Context Data Extractor , you can prepare archiving information as follows:
You define applications in order to structure your archive data in the Retention Warehouse. During archiving, the system creates one archiving object for each
application. In a further step, you define archiving objects and assign them to the applications.
You define segments and assign them to the applications. When defining segments, you specify if the segment is for master data or transaction data (such as,
document-like data). You link each segment with one or more database tables (reference tables) of the SAP system that make the data available for archiving.You define the sequence in which the system archives the segments. You assign a function module to each segment for reading the data from the database
tables.
You can register existing archiving objects in the Retention Warehouse. In addition to your customer-specific archiving objects, this registration applies to
transaction data that you archived using other tools. For each added archiving object, you also have to register the relevant reference tables.
You can access the following functions on the SAP Easy Access sc reen under Tools Administration Administration ILM: Context Data Extractor :
Archive Data for ILM
After you have configured the data, you use this function to archive the data.
Data Extract Browser
After you have archived the data, you can use this function to obtain an overview of the archived data.
Display Archive Files
Using the Archive File Browser , you can disp lay the archived data in detail.
Segment Catalog
Using this program, you can obtain an overview of the current configuration of the extraction services. Since this program is also useful during the configuration,
you can also access it in Customizing for Context Data Extractor under Reporting . You can also use this overview for comparison and discussion with the
responsible departments or with auditors.Field Catalog
Using this program, you can you can display detailed information on the individual segments of the current configuration of the extraction services. You can also
call the field catalog from the segment catalog in order to display detailed information.
More Information
For more information about SAP NetWeaver ILM and about Retention Warehouse, see the SAP Library under SAP NetWeaver SAP NetWeaver by Key
Capability Information Integration by Key Capability Information Lifecycle Management .
Periodic Key Replacement for Payment Card Encryption
Technical Data
Technical Name of Business Function PCA_KEYV
Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function
Available As O f Enhancement package 1 for SAP NetWeaver 7.0
Technical Usage Central App lications
Application Component Payment Card (AP-BP-PCA)
Payment Cards (SD-BIL-IV-PC)
You can use this b usiness function to increase security for payment card handling in your system.
You use this bus iness function if you manage payment card data in your system.
Prerequisites
Type of Component Component Is Needed Only for the Following Features
Software Component SAP_ABA 7.01
You activated the Periodic Key Replacement for Payment Card Encryption (PCA_KEYV) bus iness function.
Features
By activating this bus iness function you can:
Replace the keys used for payment card encryp tion on a periodic basis
Delete keys that are no longer used
Note
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 82 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 83/148
Integration of IPM and ERP
IPM, Industry-Independent Back End
Technical Data
Technical Name of Business Function ERP_IPM_BACKEND_1
Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function
Available As O f SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP 6.0
Technical Usage Central App lications
Application Component SAP for Media
Directly Dependent Business Function Requiring Activation in
Addition
Not relevant
You can use this business function to integrate Intellectual Property Management (IPM) with SAP Product Sales and Distribution (SD) and Financial Accounting
(FI) without a specific back-end industry imp lementation.
If you have already activated the industry business function set Media, we recommend that you use the industry business function
TITLE_LIFECYCLE_MANAGEMENT instead of this enterprise business function. TITLE_LIFECYCLE_MANAGEMENT provides the same functionality that is
available with ERP_IPM_BACKEND_1.
Integration
The function of integrating IPM with SD and FI, previously available in the business function set Media, is now enabled without any dependence on an industry-
specific back end.
This integration is available for SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP CRM 7.0, business function Intellectual Property Management and for SAP enhancement
package 5 for SAP ERP 6.0.
Prerequisites
You have installed the following components as of the version mentioned:
Type of Component Component Is Needed Only for the Following Features
Software Component EA-APPL
SAP_APPL
In CRM, you have activated the enterprise business function Intellectual P roperty Management (CRM_IPM_1)
In ERP, you have activated the enterprise business function IPM, Industry-Independent Back End 1 (ERP_IPM_BACKEND_1)
Features
Integration of IPM with SD and FI
Previously, integrating IPM with SD and FI required you to activate the business function set Media. The key aspect of this business function is the enabling of
this integration without any dependence on an industry-specific back end.
The integration with SD means that the sales of products that are managed using SD are transferred seamlessly into IPM for the processing of incoming andoutgoing royalties.
Some of the benefits of integration with FI are that:
Expenses and licensing revenues per p roduct can be rolled up or used in a profitability analysis
Royalties can be transferred into Accounts Payable and licensing fees can b e transferred to Accounts Receivables
Partial cash receipts from licensees can be used in the calculation of remuneration for licensors
IPM, Download to CRM of Material-Related IP Information
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 83 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 84/148
Technical Data
Technical Name of Business Function ERP_IPM_BACKEND_2
Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function
Available As O f SAP Enhancement Package number 5 for SAP ERP 6.0
Technical Usage Central App lications
Application Component SAP for Media
Directly Dependent Business Function Requiring Activation in
Addition
Not relevant
You can use this business function to tighten integration between the material master and intellectual property (IP) master, as the download capability of the
material master is enhanced. If either the material master or media product master are downloaded to CRM, information about the assigned IP is also downloaded.
Additionally, the materials assigned to an IP are now visib le in the CRM system.
Integration
Downloading the related IP information (as described above) improves the integration of IPM with ERP Sales and Distribution.
Prerequisites
You have installed the following components as of the version mentioned:
Type of Component Component Is Needed Only for the Following Features
Software Component EA-APPLSAP_APPL
In CRM, the enterprise business function Intellectual Property Management (CRM_IPM_1) is activated
In ERP, either the business function Title Lifecycle Management (TITLE LIFECYCLE MANAGEMENT) or the business function IPM, Industry-Independent Back
End (ERP_IPM_BACKEND_1) is activated
Features
Download of Related Material IP Information
Downloading the related IP information when either the material master or the media product master is downloaded to CRM improves the integration of IPM with
ERP Sales and Distribution
The materials ass igned to intellectual properties are now visib le across sys tems
Accounting
Financial Master Data Management: Charts of Accounts
This business function is obsolete (and can no longer be activated). Activate the business function Master Data Governance for Financials, Organizational
Units (FIN_MDM_ORG).
Technical Data
Technical Name of Business Function FIN_MDM_ACC
Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function
Available From SAP enhancement package 4 for SAP ERP 6.0
Technical Usage Strategic Enterprise Management
Application Component MDG for Financials (CA-MDG-APP-FIN)
Directly Dependent Business Function Requiring Activation in
Addition
Not relevant
You can use this business function to centrally manage and make changes to the financial master data of your enterprise. The approval process is guided via a
Caution
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 84 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 85/148
workflow and you have the option of distributing the master data changes to your transactional systems via enterprise services.
Integration
This business function enables you to distribute the master data for the application components General Ledger ( FI-GL) and Business Consolidation (FIN-SEM-
BCS).
Prerequisites
You have installed the following components as of the version given:
Type of Component Component Is Needed Only for the Following Features
Software Component SAP_BS_FND 701
Software Component FINBASIS 604 Complete List of Features
Software Component SAP_APPL 604 Import of master data into General Ledger (FI-GL)
Software Component SEM-BW 604 Import of master data into Business Consolidation
(FIN-SEM-BCS)
Portal Content Business Package for Financial MDM 1.40 Complete List of Features
SAP Enterprise Services FINBASIS 604, namespace
http://sap.com/xi/FINB/Global2 and
SEM-BW 604, namespace
http://sap.com/xi/SEM-BW/Global2 or
SAP APPL 6.04, namespace
http://sap.com/xi/APPL/Global2
Distribution of Master Data Using Enterprise
Services
Business Intelligence content SAP NetWeaver 7 .0 BI Content Add-O n 4 Reports Ab out Master Data Changes
To be able to distribute the master data of the chart of accounts, you need to have made the necessary Customizing settings for General Ledger.
To be able to distribute the master data of the group chart of accounts, you need to have made the necessary settings for Business Consolidation. For more
information, see Workbench for Customizing.
You have made the required settings in Customizing under Cross-Application Components Processes and Tools for Enterprise Applications Financial
Master Data Management .
Features
The following functions become available when you activate this business function:
Approval Process for Master Data Changes
You can use a workflow to perform the approval process for changing master data, and document the approval process for reviewing purposes. The processbegins with a request for a change, which can b e evaluated and commented by various p ersons. Once the request has been evaluated, considered and
approved, the system executes the changes. The changes then undergo a final check and are either approved or rejected. Change requests document and
manage all steps in the approval process.
Master Data Change
You can access and change the master data from within a worklist in the portal. For more information, see the documentation of the business package.
Versioning of Master Data
The changes are stored in editions. Editions let you display past values of the master data at any time and define future values. Change documents document
when master data was changed and by whom the changes were made. You also can display the approval process and review the reasoning behind the
changes.
Replication of Master Data
You can distribute the master data changes from the system in which you centrally made the changes to the transactional systems: You can use enterprise
services to distribute new and changed chart of accounts master data. You also can download the master data as files for upload into the transactional systems.
Data Modeling
In the standard delivery, the business function contains a data model for changing charts of accounts. You can adjust the data model to suit your master data.
Master Data Governance for Financials, Organizational Units
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 85 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 86/148
Technical Data
Technical Name of Business Function FIN_MDM_ORG
Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function
Available From SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 6.0
Technical Usage Strategic Enterprise Management
Application Component MDG for Financials (CA-MDG-APP-FIN)
Required Business Function Master Data Governance, Generic Functions (MDG_FOUNDATION)
You can use this business function to configure a governance process for your master data in Financials. The governance of the master data is centralized and is
managed by an app roval p rocess. The changes can be replicated in the decentralized systems and is documented at all times.
This business function offers the following advantages for your enterprise:
More efficient master data management
Improved compliance with the fundamentals of adequate enterprise governance by means of automated, secure, and documented replication of master data
Faster individual and consolidated financial statements
All this reduces your total cost of ownership (TCO).
Integration
This business function has the same features as the business function Financial Master Data Management: Charts of Accounts (FIN_MDM_ACC), but has some
additional features and entity types. The business function FIN_MDM_ACC is obsolete as of SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 6.0. Therefore, if you
want to use Financials content, activate the present business function.
If you want to use enterprise services to import the master data into the application components General Ledger (FI-GL) and Controlling (CO), you need to
activate the business function Master Data Governance for Financials, SOA Organizational Units (FIN_MDM_SOA_ORG).
If you want to use enterprise services to import the master data of charts of accounts and item hierarchies into the application component Business Consolidation
(FIN-SEM-BCS), you need to activate the business function Master Data Governance for Financials, SOA ChtAccts and FRS (FIN_MDM_SOA_CU).
Prerequisites
You have installed the following components as of the version given:
Type of Component Component Is Needed Only for the Following Features
Software Component FINBASIS 605 and SEM-BW 605
Portal Content Business Package for Financial MDM 1.51
BI Content SAP NetWeaver 7.0 BI Content Add-On 5 SP01 Master data reports
XI/ESR Content FINBASIS 605, namespace
http://sap.com/xi/FINB/Global2 and
http://sap.com/xi/FIN/MDG/Global2
Replication of Master Data Using Enterprise
Services
You have made the required settings in Customizing under Cross-Application Components Processes and Tools for Enterprise Applications Master Data
Governance Master Data Governance for Financials .
If you want to use point-to-point communication for the enterprise services (see below), in addition to this business function you also need to activate the business
function Improvements for SOA Reuse Functions (FND_SOA_REUSE_1).
Features
This business function provides you with data model 0G , which models the following business objects in the system as entity types:
Account
Company
Profit Center
Cost Center
Consolidation Unit
Cost ElementThis enables you to use the following functions for these business objects:
Approval Process for Master Data Changes
You can use a workflow to perform the approval process for changing master data, and document the approval process for reviewing purposes. You can choose
one of several workflow processes, which have different levels of approval details. For more information, see Workflow Templates for Financials.
The most detailed process begins with a request for change, which can be evaluated and commented by various persons. Once the request has been evaluated,
considered and approved, the system executes the changes. The changes then undergo a final check and are either approved or rejected. Change requests
document and manage all steps in the approval p rocess.
Master Data Change
You can access and change the master data from within a worklist in the portal. For more information, see Master Data Processing.
Versioning of Master Data
The changes are stored in editions. Editions let you display past values of the master data at any time and define future values. Change documents document
when master data was changed and by whom the changes were made. You also can display the approval process and review the reasoning behind the
changes.
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 86 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 87/148
Replication of Master Data
You can replicate the master data changes from the Master Data Governance hub to your decentralized systems. The data replication framework enables the
automated replication of data. You can run such replications either on a regular basis or on demand.
Enterprise services for replicating the data are available in the following application components:
General Ledger (FI-GL)
Controlling (CO)
Business Consolidation (FIN-SEM-BCS)
If you want to use enterprise services to replicate master data, you can point-to-point communication.
Master Data Governance for Financials, SOA OrganizationalUnits
Technical Data
Technical Name of Business Function FIN_MDM_SOA_ORG
Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function
Available From SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 6.0
Technical Usage Central App lications
Application Component General Ledger (FI-GL) and Controlling (CO)
Required Business Function Not relevant
This business function allows you to use enterprise services to import the master data of accounts and cost elements, including hierarchies thereof, from the
Master Data Governance hub into your decentralized systems. This provides your enterprise with the following benefits:
More efficient master data management
Improved compliance with the fundamentals of adequate enterprise governance by means of automated, secure, and documented replication of master data
Faster individual and consolidated financial statements
All this reduces your total cost of ownership (TCO).
Integration
For processing master data and using enterprise services for exporting data from the Master Data Governance hub, you can use the business function Master
Data Governance for Financials, Organizational Units (FIN_MDM_ORG).
Prerequisites
You have installed the following components as of the version given:
Type of Component Component Is Needed Only for the Following Features
Software Component SAP_APPL 605 and EA-APPL 605
XI/ESR Content SAP_APPL 6.05, namespace
http://sap.com/xi/APPL/Global2
To be able to import the master data, you need to have made the required Customizing settings for the receiving application component.
You have made the required settings in Customizing under Cross-Application Components Processes and Tools for Enterprise Applications Master Data
Governance Master Data Governance for Financials Enterprise Services Inbound Services for Financials Master Data .
FeaturesThe following enterprise services are available for importing master data:
Replicate Chart of Accounts
Confirm Chart of Accounts Replication
Replicate General Ledger Account Master as Bulk
Confirm General Ledger Account Master Replication as Bulk
Replicate Financial Reporting Structure
Confirm Financial Reporting Structure Replication
Replicate Company as Bulk
Confirm Company Replication as Bulk
Replicate Profit Centre as Bulk
Confirm Profit Centre Replication as Bulk
Replicate Profit Centre Group Hierarchy
Confirm Profit Centre Group Hierarchy Replication
Replicate Cost Centre as Bulk
Confirm Cost Centre Replication as Bulk
Replicate Cost Centre Group Hierarchy
Confirm Cost Centre Group Hierarchy Replication
Replicate Cost Element as Bulk
Confirm Cost Element Replication as Bulk
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 87 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 88/148
Replicate Cost Element Group Hierarchy
Confirm Cost Element Group Hierarchy Replication
Master Data Governance for Financials, SOA ChtAccts and FRS
Technical Data
Technical Name of Business Function FIN_MDM_SOA_CU
Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function
Available From SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 6.0
Technical Usage Strategic Enterprise Management
Application Component Business Consolidation (FIN-SEM-BCS)
Required Business Function Not relevant
This business function allows you to use enterprise services to import the master data of consolidation charts of accounts and item hierarchies from the Master
Data Governance hub into your decentralized systems. This provides the following benefits for your enterprise:
More efficient master data management
Improved compliance with the fundamentals of adequate enterprise governance by means of automated, secure, and documented replication of master dataFaster individual and consolidated financial statements
All this reduces your total cost of ownership (TCO).
Integration
You can use the bus iness function Master Data Governance for Financials, Organizational Units (FIN_MDM_ORG) for processing the master data and for
exporting the data from the Master Data Governance hub using enterprise services.
Prerequisites
You have installed the following components as of the version listed:
Type of Component Component Required for the Following Features Only
Software Component SEM_BW 605
XI/ESR Content FINBASIS 604 and SEM-BW 605, namespace
http://sap.com/xi/SEM-BW/Global2
You have made the required settings in Customizing under Cross-Application Components Processes and Tools for Enterprise Applications Master Data
Governance Master Data Governance for Financials Enterprise Services Inbound Services for Business Consolidation .
Features
The following enterprise services are available for importing master data:
Replicate Chart of Accounts
Confirm Chart of Accounts Replication
Replicate Financial Reporting Structure
Confirm Financial Reporting Structure Replication
FI, Enablement for Financial Shared Services
Technical Data
Technical Name of Business Function FIN_SSC_AIC_1
Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function
Available as of SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 6.0
Technical Usage Central Applications
Application Component Controlling (CO)
Financial Accounting (FI)
SAP Collections Management (FIN-FSCM-COL)SAP D ispute Management (FIN-FSCM-DM)
Required Business Function FSCM Integration 3 (FIN_FSCM_CCD_INTEGRATION_3)
You can use the this business function to enable use of the Shared Services Framework functions, that are available cross-component in multiple SAP
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 88 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 89/148
applications.
In connection with SAP Enhancement Package 1 for SAP CRM 7.0, this business function in particular optimizes the setting up and operation of an Accounting
Interaction Center (AIC) that runs in SAP Customer Relationship Management (SAP CRM). It is therefore closely linked to the Multifunctional Shared Service
Interaction Center business function in the SAP CRM system.
Using this business function offers the following business advantages:
Reduced processing times for service requests and the resultant potential for savings
Integration of Financial Accounting (FI) and Controlling (CO) in the Shared Services Framework
AIC agents can process large numbers of service requests in the AIC user interface, due to direct access to business objects in ERP systems.
Reduction in the number of errors when processing service requests
Enhanced quality of serviceWith this business function, you can use the following functions in the Shared Services Framework:
Manual creation of service requests from an ERP system
Search for service requests from an ERP system
Start ERP transactions from the Interaction Center
Link ERP objects with service requests
Integration of SAP Collections Management with the Accounting Interaction Center
Integration of SAP Dispute Management with the Accounting Interaction Center
Irrespective of whether you use the Share Services Framework, this business function provides you with the option of connecting non-SAP systems and various
SAP systems to SAP Collections Management.
Prerequisites
You have installed the following components as of the version given:
Type of Component Component Is Needed Only for the Following Features
Software Component EA-APPL 605
SAP_APPL 605
Software Component BBPCRM 701 Integration with the AIC
Software Component FINBASIS 605 * Integration of SAP Collections Management and
SAP Dispute Management with the AIC
Software Component FINBASIS 604 * Connection of non-SAP systems and various SAP
systems to SAP Collections Management
* Software component, in which SAP Collections Management and SAP Dispute Management run
You have set up the application components that you are using.
You have made the required settings in Customizing for all of the application components that you use. For additional information on specific Customizing for this
business function, see the related release note FIN_SSC_AIC_1: Business Function FI , Enablement for FSS (New) (FIN_605_AIC_1_M).
You have activated the following business functions in addition to this business function:
FSCM Integration 3 (FIN_FSCM_CCD_INTEGRATION_3)
Multifunctional Shared Service Interaction Center (CRM_SHSVC) in the system in which CRM runs.
You need this business function to integrate with the AIC. For additional information on this business function , see the SAP Library for SAP CRM on SAP
Help Portal under http://help.sap.com/crm SAP CRM 7.0 for Enhancement Package 1 Application Help Business Functions (SAP
Enhancement Package 1 for SAP CRM 7.0) Business Functions for SAP Customer Relationship Management Multifunctional Shared Service
Interaction Center .
FSCM, Enablement for Financial Shared Services (FIN_FSCM_SSC_AIC_1) in the system in which SAP Collections Management and SAP Dispute
Management run.
You require this business function if you use the integration of these two applications with the AIC.
The following prerequisites must be met for the users:
So that ERP users can create and find service requests from the ERP system, they must have a user with the same name in the CRM system, to which the
business role Occasional User (SSF_OCCUSER) is assigned.
So that AIC agents can call ERP transactions from the AIC and link ERP objects with service requests, they must have a user with the same name in the
ERP systems, to which the roles are assigned that authorize then to execute ERP transactions (transaction PFCG).
Features
Manual cr eation of service req uests from an ERP system
Service requests are used for quick reporting and resolution of problems and errors. Consequently, you can create a service request in the transactions for
Financial Accounting (FI) and Controlling (CO) direct, for example in the Change Vendor (FK02) or Display General Ledger Documents (FV53) transactions.
When you create a service request, the system opens it in the SAP CRM Interaction Center direct. It transfers contextual data, and gives you the option of
enclosing a screenshot. Moreover, you can link various ERP objects, for example, the vendor master record or the document.
The AIC agent in turn can later call up the linked objects by navigating direct from the service request to the ERP system.
Search for service r equests from an ERP system
In addition to the option of creating service requests direct from an ERP system, you can search for services requests. You can check their status and update the
service requests, without an AIC employee having to be active. You can choose whether you want to see only those service requests that have been created in
the ERP system in the UI of SAP CRM, or whether you want to see all of the service requests irrespective of where they were created.
Support for launching ERP transactions from the AIC
When you start an FI or CO transaction from the AIC, the ERP system calls a search screen, making it easier for the AIC agents to access the required data
records. The search screen already contains the data that is known from the account identification in the AIC (customer/vendor and company code).
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 89 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 90/148
Enhanced Generic O bject Services for linking ERP objects with service requests.
In many FI and CO transactions in the ERP system you can link individual business objects with a service request in the AIC, for example, the master data of a
customer or vendor, using Generic Object Services (GOS). AIC agents can use this link to start the transaction with the ERP object in the ERP system from a
service request.
Generic Object Services for linking ERP objects with service requests in the AIC are only available if an AIC agent has started the ERP transaction from the AIC,
and the account in the AIC has been identified and confirmed. If at the point when the ERP transaction was started from the AIC a service request had been
opened in the AIC, the system inserts the link in the business context of the service request. If no service request had been opened in the AIC, the system
inserts the link in the interaction records of the accounts currently confirmed in the AIC.
Fact Sheet for Customer and Vendor
The Accounting Interaction Center contains the account fact sheet that is used in financial scenarios as a support tool for communication with partners. It provides
context-related information about the communication partner, where the partner can be a customer or a vendor.
The fact sheet for the customer contains information about the special business context that ranges from purchasing volumes to the latest dispute cases for the
customer. The AIC agent is therefore able to access a complete picture of the current and past relationship with the communication partner in his daily work.
The fact sheet for the vendor contains data such as open invoices, payments, and master data. It assists the AIC agent in giving informed replies to inquiries from
the vendor.
Search for External Documents
The Accounting Interaction Center employee must be in a position to access information about the communication with the customer to date that is as complete as
possible. This includes documents that are stored in the optical archive.
The Find Document function of the CRM user interface gives the AIC agent the option of searching from one place for documents relevant to a business partner in
a series of back-end systems, and of displaying them if necessary.
Roles
Both accounting clerks from various SAP ERP applications and agents from the SAP CRM Interaction Center are involved in the Shared Services Framework
processes. All of those involved have to navigate between various SAP systems. Such navigation is supported by the following new roles:
Occasional User (SSF_OCCUSER)
This business role allows ERP users to create service requests from ERP systems, and to search for service requests.
Accounting IC Agent (IC_AIC_AGENT)
With this business role, agents in the AIC can process service requests from Financial Accounting and Controlling, execute the appropriate ERP transactions,
and link ERP objects with service requests.
AIC Manager (AIC_MANAGER)
AIC managers are IC managers who have the additional option of linking particular categories of service requests with particular categories of dispute cases.
Based on this, AIC managers can have particular dispute cases created automatically.
For additional information about this business function – in connection with the Multifunctional Shared Service Interaction Center – see the SAP Library on
SAP Help Portal under http://help.sap.com/crm SAP CRM 7.0 for Enhancement Package 1 Application Help Interaction Center Interaction
Center WebClient Shared Services Framework Integration with SAP ERP .
Connection of non-SAP systems and various SAP systems to SAP Collections Management
This function increases the range of accounting systems the data of which you can access with SAP Collections Management. You set up the connection with the
help of a substitute system that you connect to SAP Collections Management, and to which you transfer the required master and transaction data. In this way you
can centralize and standardize the processes for collecting open receivables, irrespective of the system architecture used in your company. In the standard
system, the sample loading procedureSAP_46C is available for an SAP system with Release SAP R/3 4.6C.
Without this business function you can only connect SAP systems where Accounts Receivable Accounting (FI-AR) has at least the status SAP R/3 Enterprise
4.70.
For more information, see:Connection of Non-SAP Systems and Various SAP Systems
Configuration Guide for SAP Collections Management, which you can find at SAP Service Marketplace under http://service.sap.com/fscm
Financial Accounting (FI)
Note
Note
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 90 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 91/148
General Ledger Accounting (FI-GL) (New)
New General Ledger Accounting
Technical Data
Technical Name of Business Function FIN_GL_CI_1
Type of Business Function Enterprise business function
Available As O f SAP enhancement package 3 for SAP ERP 6.0
Technical Usage Central App lications
Application Component FI-GL (New)
Directly Dependent Business Function Requiring Activation in
Addition
Not relevant
You use the New General Ledger Accounting business function to optimize the FI-GL (New) application component for the processes of parallel accounting as
well as planning and reporting on the basis of profit centers. The following functions are provided:
Posting and Clearing for Specific Ledger GroupsTransfer of External Plan Data to New General Ledger Accounting
Integrated Planning with Controlling for Secondary Cost Elements
Cumulative Plan Data Entry for Balance Sheet Accounts
Drilldown Reports for Profit Centers and Segments
Tool for Transferring Report Writer/Report Painter Reports from Profit Center Accounting
Use of the "Elimination Profit Center" and "Origin Object Type" Fields in Reports
Line Item Extractor
Authorization Check for Profit Centers
Switch to Open Item Management for G/L Accounts
Analysis of Posted Documents for Document Splitting
Integration
For planning purposes, you can transfer plan data for secondary cost elements from Controlling (CO) to new General Ledger Accounting. During the transfer,
account determination is performed in the same way as with the real-time integration of Controlling with Financials. A Business App lication Programming Interface (BAPI) enables you to transfer plan data from an external data source to new General Ledger Accounting.
Prerequisites
You have installed the following components from the version specified:
Type of Component Component Is Needed Only for the Following Features
Software Component SAP_APPL 603
SAP NetWeaver Business Intelligence (BI) From SAP NetWeaver 7.0 BI Content Add-On 3
Support Package 08
Line Item Extractor
You have set up the General Ledger Accounting (FI-GL) (New) application component. In this way, new General Ledger Accounting is active.
You have activated the New General Ledger Accounting business function.
For information about activating individual functions in Customizing, see the release note FIN_GL_CI_1: New General Ledger Accounting.
Features
Parallel Accounting: Posting and Clearing for Specific Ledger G roups
You use clearing specific to ledger groups if you perform parallel accounting using the ledger approach (and not the account approach). Clearing and making
postings specific to ledger groups supports you with your closing tasks. You can use the function for all items that, due to parallel accounting, are posted to
multiple ledgers and valuated differently in those ledgers, in particular for provisions (such as provisions for commission, for rebates, for process risks, or
provisions for creating and check ing year-end closing).
This function achieves greater transparency and efficiency in monitoring individual business transactions as well as during closing.
You can restrict authorization for ledger group-specific posting and clearing to individual users by giving those users authorization for the relevant transactions and
ledgers.
For more information, see the SAP Library under Clearing and Posting Specific to Ledger Groups.
Planning
Transfer of External Plan Data to New General Ledger Accounting
A BAPI enables you to transfer plan data from an external data source to new General Ledger Accounting. For each data callup, you can transfer data to a ledger
for a plan version, a company code, and a fiscal year. You can also transfer values for selected periods of a fiscal year.
Existing plan data is overwritten during the transfer.
For the transfer of account assignments, the sys tem checks whether they exist and checks their validity. You can use a Bus iness Add-In (BAdI) to specify in
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 91 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 92/148
addition that the system only transfers plan data records that meet specific criteria.
This function considerably simplifies and shortens the process for transferring plan data.
For more information, see the SAP Library under External Plan Data Transfer .
Integrated Planning with Controlling for Secondary Cost Elements
To reconcile planning in Financials with planning in Controlling, you can transfer plan data for secondary cost elements from Controlling to new General Ledger
Accounting. During the transfer, the accounts are determined in the same way as for CO real-time integration.
This function enhances the existing integrated planning function for primary cost elements. It increases the consistency between the plan data in Controlling and
the plan data in Financials.
If necessary, you can activate this function in Customizing independently of the other functions in the New General Ledger Accounting business function. The
function is not activated automatically when the business function is activated.For more information, see the SAP Library under Transferring Plan Data from Controlling.
Cumulative Plan Data Entry for Balance Sheet Accounts
When manually planning balance sheet accounts, you can choose at the client level whether you want to plan balance sheet changes or cumulated balance
sheet values.
If you plan cumulated balance sheet values, you can carry forward balances for plan data. The system considers the balance carryforward values when
determining the balance sheet values for the individual periods but does not display them separately.
If necessary, you can activate this function in Customizing independently of the other functions in the New General Ledger Accounting business function. The
function is not activated automatically when the business function is activated.
For more information, see the SAP Library under Setting Up Planning.
Reporting
Drilld own Reports for Pr ofit Centers and Segments
You can use the following standard drilldown reports for profit center and segment reporting. These reports have a structure that is similar to that of the reports from
Profit Center Accounting (8A-PCA001G, 8A-PCA004G, and 8A-PCA011) that they are based on.
Report in FI-GL (New) Description
0SAPBSPL-03 Profit Centerr Group: Plan/Actual/Variance
0SAPBSPL-04 Profit Center Group: Plan/Plan/Actual
0SAPBSPL-05 Profit Center Group: Key Figures
0SAPBSPL-06 Profit Center Comparison: Return on Investment
0SAPBSPL-13 Segment: Plan/Actual/Variance
0SAPBSPL-14 Segment: Plan/Plan/Actual
0SAPBSPL-15 Segment: Key Figures
0SAPBSPL-16 Segment Comparison: Return on Investment
You can call the executed reports for an individual profit center, for a range of profit centers, for a profit center group, for an individual segment, or for a range of
segments.
In the reports, you can drilldown by profit center, by partner profit center, or by segment and by partner segment.
In a drilldown report, you can navigate from the G/L account line item list to an original document in Controlling. Furthermore, you can navigate to the plan line item
list.
For more information, see the SAP Library under Drilldown Reports for Profit Centers and Segments.
Tool for Transferring Report Writer/Report Painter Reports from Profit Center Accounting
You can transfer Report Writer reports or Report Painter reports from Profit Center Accounting to new General Ledger Accounting. For this, you can use a tool that
supports you as follows:
You can choose a source library and a target library.
If required, the system can also transfer dependent objects (such as sets) with the reports to the new environment.
For fields in the report, you can use substitution (for example, to replace the account number from Profit Center Accounting with the cost element in new
General Ledger Accounting).
You can perform the report transfer either in a test run or in an update run. The transfer can also be run during background processing.
Before the reports are actually transferred, the system analyzes for each report in Profit Center Accounting whether the report can be transferred without any
problems or with the need for postprocessing, or whether the report cannot be transferred at all.
The report transfer is valuated in detailed logs that are also saved during an update run.
For more information, see the SAP Library under Transfer of Report Writer / Report Painter Reports from Profit Center Accounting.Use of the "Elimination Profit Center" and "O rigin Object Type" Fields in Reports
You can define Report Writer reports or Report Painter reports with elimination of internal business volume by using the Elimination Profit Center (ZZEPRCTR)
field.
In drilldown reports, you can use the Origin Object Type (ZZHOART) field.
For more information, see the SAP Library under Including Fields HOART and EPRCTR in Reports.
Line Item Extractor
You can use the extractor 0FI_GL_14 to extract the leading ledger documents for BI Reporting.
For more information, see the Release Note Line Item Extractor for New General Ledger Accounting (New) as well as the SAP Library under General Ledger
Accounting (New): Line Items of the Leading Ledger .
Postings to Ad ditional Account Assignments
Authorization Check for Profit Centers
You can assign profit center authorizations for posting, displaying, or clearing documents. When you have activated the authorization check for profit centers, the
system reacts as follows:
A document can only be posted if the user has authorization for all profit centers to which postings were made in the document. The authorization check is
performed simultaneously during data entry.
For manual clearing, the system only selects those open items that, in accordance with the general ledger view, make postings to profit centers that are initial
or for which the user is authorized.
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 92 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 93/148
For document display, the system only displays those line items for which the profit centers are initial or in which postings are made to authorized profit centers.
If necessary, you can activate this function in Customizing independently of the other functions in the New General Ledger Accounting business function. The
function is not activated automatically when the business function is activated.
For additional information, see Authorizations for Profit Centers in the SAP Library.
Switch to Open Item Management for G/L Accounts
You can subsequently apply open item management for G/L accounts with line item management.
You can choose between ordinary open item management and open item management for clearing specific to ledger groups.
Analysis of Posted Documents for Document Splitting
To adjust previously posted documents in accordance with the current Customizing settings for document splitting, you can use an analysis program. It is possible
to run an analysis for individual documents or for multiple documents at the same time.For the analysis, the system compares the posted version of a document against a simulated version of the document for which the current Customizing settings
were applied. The output log lists all documents for which error messages are issued or for which the comparison between the posted and the simulated version of
the document shows differences due to changed Customizing settings.
See also:
For a detailed list of the new and changed functions, see the central release note FIN_GL_CI_1: New General Ledger Accounting and the detailed release
notes.
For detailed documentation on the individual functions of new General Ledger Accounting, see the SAP Library under SAP ERP Central Component
Accounting Financial Accounting General Ledger Accounting (FI-GL) (New) .
From SAP ECC 6.0, enhancement package 3, you have the option of subsequently implementing document splitting. This does not require the New General
Ledger Accounting business function to be activated.
New General Ledger Accounting 2
Technical Data
Technical Name of Business Function FIN_GL_CI_2
Type of Business Function Enterprise business function
Available As O f SAP enhancement package 4 for SAP ERP 6.0
Technical Usage Central App lications
Application Component FI-GL (New)
Directly Dependent Business Function Requiring Activation in
Addition
New General Ledger Accounting (FIN_GL_CI_1)
You use the New General Ledger Accounting 2 business function to improve your processes for parallel accounting in the component FI-GL (New) and to ensure
the integration with Controlling.
The following functions are provided:
Assignment Monitor for Profit Centers
Wizards for Customizing Document Splitting
Enhanced standard configuration of document splitting
Navigation from FI Reports to CO Reports
Validation of Account Assignment Combinations
Document display specific to ledger groups
Closing/Opening Postings for the Leading Ledger (Country-Specific)
Separate check on posting period for postings from CO to FI
Check Posting Period for Non-Representative Ledgers
Integration
The enhanced standard configuration of document splitting also forms part of the following business functions: PSM, Cash Flow Reporting (PSM_FA_CASH) as
well as PSM, Funds Management 2 (PSM_FM_CI_2).
Prerequisites
You have installed the following component from the version specified:
Type of Component Component Is Needed Only for the Following Features
Software Component SAP_APPL 6.04
For you to be able to use the business function, the following criteria must be met:
You have set up the General Ledger Accounting (FI-GL) (New) application component. In this way, new General Ledger Accounting is active.
You have activated the New General Ledger Accounting bus iness function.
You have activated this business function, New General Ledger Accounting 2 .
For information about activating the individual functions in Customizing, see the Release Note FIN_GL_CI_2: New General Ledger Accounting 2 .
Features
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 93 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 94/148
New General Ledger Accounting and Profit Center Accounting
Assignment Monitor for Profit Centers
The assignment monitor for profit centers enables you to easily locate missing or incorrect assignments of objects to profit centers. This function also supports you
in performing closing correctly at the profit center level.
Now you can also check the assignment to profit centers for the following objects:
Sales order items and
Real estate objects for Flexible Real Estate Management (RE-FX)
For more information, see Assignment Monitor for Profit Centers in the SAP Library.
Wizards for Customizing Document Splitting
The wizards provide a new and user-friendly way of accessing the Customizing settings for document splitting. The following wizards are available:
Wizard for Configuring Document Splitting
Wizard for Creating a Document Splitting Rule
Both wizards contain step-by-step instructions that enable you to make the Customizing settings and to check those settings. With the wizard for creating a
document splitting rule, you can also simulate documents on the basis of existing documents.
Enhanced Standard Configuration of Document Splitting
Using these standard settings for document splitting considerably s implifies configuring some of the bus iness processes, such as those for nonassigned
payments. Configuration of these processes in document splitting is now restricted principally to assigning the default account assignment values of the
predefined constant and to assigning the new document splitting rule to the relevant document type.
Navigation from FI Reports to CO Reports
This function enables you to improve the integration of Financial Accounting (FI) with Controlling (CO) for reporting, to reduce the effort required for reconciliation,
and to make the origin of values more transparent. From within the profit center reports and segment reports in new General Ledger Accounting, you can use the
report-report interface to call up various summary reports from Controlling. The profit center and the origin object type (such as cost center or internal order) are the
points of connection between the sender report in new General Ledger Accounting and the receiver report in Controlling. In other words, the receiver reports are
derived from the selected origin object type of the sender report. You can use either predefined standard reports or your own reports and transactions as receiver
reports.
For more information, see Navigation from FI Reports to CO Reports.
Validation of Account Assignment Combinations
This function prevents postings with invalid account assignment combinations from being posted and thereby ensures the consistency of your reporting. You can
define your own validation rules and use them to check whether different account assignment combinations are useful from a business point of view and, where
necessary, prevent invalid postings. You can also extend the check to include an account assignment combination of G/L accounts and cost centers and prevent
postings with this account assignment combination. The system only checks documents that are in the process of being posted; it does not check parked
documents. During postings, you can display the account assignments to be checked and determine the result. In Customizing, you can assign a validation
strategy with validation rules to an entire company code as the default strategy. You can define exceptions for specific ledger groups. You can use the validation
log to analyze validation rules.
For more information, see the SAP Library under Validation of Account Assignment Combinations.
Parallel Ledg ers
Document Display Specific to Ledger Groups
The selection criterion for the ledger group has been added to the logical database BRF (Business Rule Framework, the document database). You can therefore
make selections by ledger group or by ledger in all reports that use the logical database BRF to select data.
The following reports have been adapted so that they now contain the ledger group as a selection criterion:
Compact Document Journal (RFBELJ00)
Compact Document Journal [not accessible] (RFBELJ00_NACC)
Document List (RFBUEB00)
Furthermore, you can also add the ledger group as a selection criterion to your own reports that are based on the logical database BRF .
Closing/Opening Postings for the Leading Ledger (Country-Specific)
You can make year-end closing entries and opening entries for specific ledgers, including for the leading ledger. For this, you use the program Closing/Opening
Postings at Year End . This program is intended mainly for the following countries: Italy, Slovakia, Turkey, Portugal, Romania, and Columbia.
Local Close
Separate Check on Posting Period for Postings from CO to FI
This function enables closing operations in Controlling and Financial Accounting to be performed more smoothly. Previously, the FI period had to remain open
during closing operations at period end all the while postings from Controlling were being transferred to Financial Accounting. Now, you can continue to post CO
transactions in the preceding period even if this period has been closed for FI postings. For this, you can use the additional period interval in the Customizing
settings for the posting periods; this period interval is only relevant for postings from Controlling to Financial Accounting. It is valid for postings created with the real-
time integration as well as for postings created using the CO-FI reconciliation ledger during closing operations.
For more information, see the SAP Library under Opening and Closing Posting Periods.
Check Posting Period for Non-Representative Ledgers
This function reduces the effort required for coordination between the different accounting principles during closing operations. Previously, when a posting was
made to different ledgers, the period check was only performed for the representative ledger. This meant that posting periods in non-representative ledgers were
not considered. You can now specify that the posting period check is also performed for non-representative ledgers. In this way, postings can still be made in non-
representative ledgers even after the posting period in the representative ledger has been closed. Furthermore, you can specify a different fiscal year variant for
non-representative ledgers.
For more information, see the SAP Library under G/L Account Posting.
More Information
For a detailed list of the new and changed functions, see the central release note FIN_GL_CI_2: New General Ledger Accounting 2 and the detailed release
notes.For detailed documentation on the individual functions of new General Ledger Accounting, see the SAP Library under SAP ERP Central Component
Accounting Financial Accounting General Ledger Accounting (FI-GL) (New).
From SAP ECC 6.0, enhancement package 4, you can transfer document splitting information that already exists in Special Purpose Ledger (FI-SL) to new
General Ledger Accounting. This migration function is only available as part of the SAP General Ledger Migration Service in the Migration Cockpit . This does
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 94 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 95/148
not require the New General Ledger Accounting 2 business function to be activated. For more information, see SAP Note 1163997.
New General Ledger Accounting 3
Technical Data
Technical Name of Business Function FIN_GL_CI_3
Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function
Available As O f SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 6.0
Technical Usage Central App lications
Application Component General Ledger Accounting (New) (FI-GL)
Depending on the function, also the following application components:
Materials Management (MM), Asset Accounting (FI-AA)
Prerequisite Business Function Not relevant
You can use this business function to improve your processes for periodic tasks and optimize how you use the archive. As part of the financial statement
analysis, you can perform actual/actual comparisons between different ledgers. Furthermore, the business function enables you to manage how numbers are
assigned when assets are transferred.
The following functions are provided:
Impairment of Assets in Accordance with IAS 36
Parallel Valuation of Material Stocks
Enhanced Reports for Reconciliation Between Materials Management and New General Ledger Accounting
Reading of General Ledger Accounting Totals Records from the Archive
Actual/Actual Comparison Between Different Ledgers
Number Ass ignment During Asset Transfer
Update of Internal Revenues Between Profit Centers
Prerequisites
You have installed the following components as of the specified version (or higher):
Type of Component Component Only Needed for the Following Functions
Software Component SAP_APPL 6.05
BI Content SAP NetWeaver 7.0 BI Content Add-On 5 SP01 Reading of General Ledger Accounting Totals
Records from the Archive (for BI Reporting)
You have activated this business function, New General Ledger Accounting 3.
Depending on the functions that you want to use, you have set up the General Ledger Accounting (New) (FI-GL (New)) application component or the classic
General Ledger Accounting (FI-GL) application component. In these application components, the functions are available as follows:
Function New General Ledger Accounting Classic General Ledger Accounting
Impairment of Assets Available Available
Parallel Valuation of Material Stocks Available Available
Reconciliation Between MM and FI-GL Available Not available
Reading Totals Records from Archive Available Not available
Actual/Actual Comparison Between Different
Ledgers
Available Not available
Number Assignment During Asset Transfer Available Available
Update of Internal Revenues Between Profit
Centers
Available Not available
For information about activating individual functions in Customizing, see the release note FIN_GL_CI_3: New General Ledger Accounting 3.
Features
Impairment of Assets in Accordance with IAS 36
You can use this function in Asset Accounting to post the impairment of fixed assets by means of mass processing. You can use a worklist to portray the asset
master records of a cash-generating unit (CGU) and specify a total amount for the impairment. You have the following options for distributing the total amount for the
impairment:
Impairment with dependency on net values of the individual fixed assets
Impairment down to a net book value of zero
Impairment using customer-specific distribution by means of a Business Add-In (BAdI)
Impairment is posted either as an increase of cumulated depreciation or as a reduction of the asset acquisition value.
For more information, see the SAP Library under Impairment.
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 95 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 96/148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 97/148
For detailed documentation on the individual functions of new General Ledger Accounting, see the SAP Library under SAP ERP Central Component
Accounting Financial Accounting General Ledger Accounting (FI-GL) (New) .
.
FI-GL (New), Profit Ctr Reorganization and Segment Reports
Technical Data
Technical Name of Business Function FIN_GL_REORG_1
Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function
Available From SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 6.0 (SAP_APPL 605)
Technical Usage Central App lications (of which SAP_APPL is relevant)
Application Component FI-GL (New)
FI-AA
Other application components with objects for which you want to change the
profit center assignments during the profit center reorganization (see details
below)
Directly Dependent Business Function Requiring Activation inAddition
For segment reporting for fixed assets in new General Ledger Accounting:Business Function Reporting Financials 3 (FIN_REP_SIMPL_3)
You can use this business function to portray the reassignment of profit centers in new General Ledger Accounting (Profit Center Reorganization).
A change to the profit center structure is generally triggered by a management decision. The profit center reorganization assists you in dividing up, combining, and
replacing profit centers. A change to the profit center structure necessitates a change to the assignment of profit centers to objects (such as materials, orders,
purchase orders, or sales orders).
This often entails changing thousands of objects and making corresponding adjustment postings. With the profit center reorganization, this business function
provides a standard process for this.
You can use this standard process to change the profit center assignment on a key date in the future. Profit center reporting can be performed consistently in new
General Ledger Accounting both before as well as after changes to profit center assignments. Objects affected by the reorganization (such as materials and
orders) are reassigned and their stocks or balances are transferred in new General Ledger Accounting. All steps are logged and are therefore verifiable.
Furthermore, you can use this business function in Asset Accounting as well as in new General Ledger Accounting to create asset reports at the profit center
or segment level.
Contact your SAP Account Executive to establish whether using Profit Center Reorganization causes additional license fees to be incurred by you.
Integration
You can use the reorganization to change the profit center assignments of objects from different application components (such as FI-AA, CO, or SD). For a
detailed list of the objects that can be reorganized, see below.
Prerequisites
For you to be able to use this business function, the following criteria must be met:
You have installed the following components as of the version mentioned:
Type of Component Component Required for the Following Features Only
Software Component SAP_APPL 605
Technical Component NetWeaver Portal 7.02 or
NetWeaver Business Client
Portal Content If you use the NetWeaver Portal:
Business Package for Reorganization
Management 1.50
Work center pool role 1.50 of Business Package
for Common Parts
Reorganization
You have set up and activated the application component General Ledger Accounting (FI-GL) (New).
You have activated this business function FI-GL (New), Profit Ctr Reorganization and Segment Reports (FIN_GL_REORG_1).
In Customizing for the Reorganization, you have activated the reorganization plan type Profit Center .
You need to activate segment reporting for assets separately in Customizing for Asset Accounting .
Segment reporting for fixed assets must be activated and set up before the reorganization of fixed assets is possible.
To be able to use segment reporting for fixed assets in new General Ledger Accounting, you need to have activated the business function Reporting Financials
3 (FIN_REP_SIMPL_3) and the related portal content.
For more information, see Reporting Financials 3.
For the profit center reorganization, you need to perform additional preparatory activities as well as make the necessary Customizing settings.
For information on this, see the release note FIN_GL_REORG_1: Profit Ctr Reorganization and Segment Reports (New).
Note
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 97 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 98/148
The reorganization is available as a Web Dynpro application in the portal as well as in the NetWeaver Business Client.
To be able to use the reorganization in the portal, you need to have installed the following business package: Business Package for Reorganization
Management 1.50.
For more information on using the reorganization in the portal and in the NetWeaver Business Client, see the release note FIN_GL_REORG_1: Profit Ctr
Reorganization and Segment Reports (New).
Features
Reorganization
Roles
The reorganization supports the following users with their tasks:
The Reorganization Manager is responsible for the entire reorganization project. He or she creates the reorganization plan and performs the steps for generating
the object lists (that is, determining the objects involved), for reassignment, and for performing transfers on the basis of specifications made by object owners in
the system. The reorganization manager ends the reorganization by closing the reorganization plan.
The Object Owner assigns the new profit centers to the objects in his or her area of responsibility. The reorganization manager cannot make any further
changes to these assignments during reassignment and transfer postings.
Process Flow
The reorganization manager creates a reorganization plan. This is where the reorganization date is specified. The reorganization date occurs in the future, is the
start date of a posting period of the leading ledger, and is also the start date of the reorganization period. The reorganization also contains the controlling area and
the assignment of new to old profit centers. In the next step, the reorganization manager starts object list generation from within the reorganization plan. When
generating the object list, the system looks for the objects (such as materials or WBS elements) that are affected by the profit center reorganization and to which a
new profit center needs to be assigned. These objects are entered in the object lists belonging to the object owners. An object list serves as a worklist for an
object owner. Before the reorganization period is opened, the object owners need to store the new profit center assignments in the system.
Once the previous period (including any assessments, settlements, and so on) has been closed, the reorganization manager performs the reassignment from
within the reorganization plan. This changes the profit centers stored in the master data of the objects determined in the previous step. The system determines any
dependent objects for successfully reassigned objects that have imparted the profit center and reassigns such dependent objects in the same way. This ensures
in particular that floating processes (such as the clearing of any open items) are diverted to the new profit centers.
Then, from within the reorganization plan, the reorganization manager starts the balance transfers for objects that have already been reassigned. This enables
balances to be displayed consistently for key dates at the profit center level. Transfer postings are made in new General Ledger Accounting. In the case of fixed
assets, the system performs an integrated transfer posting (in new General Ledger Accounting as well as in Asset Accounting). The system logs all affected
objects, their old and new assignment, and the relevant object owner. It also logs the transferred balances for each object. Separate consolidation transaction
types can be used to see the transferred balances in totals reports in new General Ledger Accounting.
For a more detailed introduction, see Profit Center Reorganization.
For more information about the process flow of the reorganization, see Reorganization Process.
Objects that Can Be Or ganized
The following object types that have profit centers in their master data record are reassigned consistently: Fixed asset, material, purchase order, sales document
(such as sales order or contract), cost center, cost object, WBS element, network, network activity, internal order, accrual order, CO production order, product cost
collector, Q M order, PP p roduction order, service and maintenance order, process order, payable, and receivable.
During the transfer of the balances of the affected objects, the system only transfers balances that can be assigned directly to the affected objects. The following
balance sheet items are reorganized:
Fixed assets
Inventory (raw materials, work in process, finished products)
Receivables from goods and services
Payables from goods and services
In the profit and loss (P&L) statement, no transfer postings are made. In the case of cost-relevant transactions, the following applies: Provided that the P&L line
items contain a cost object carrying a profit center, the system makes postings to the new profit center in the reorganization period in the P&L statement; in the
prior period, the system makes postings to the old profit center.
For more information, see:
Reorganization of Materials and Purchase Orders
Reorganization of WIP and SD Objects
Reorganization of Cost Centers
Reorganization of Fixed Assets
Reorganization of Receivables and Payables
Segment Reporting for Fixed Assets
You can specify the account assignment objects Profit Center and Segment in the master data of the fixed assets. (You use a corresponding program to derive
the profit center or segment for fixed assets already present in the system as well).
This enables you to create asset reports at the profit center or segment level.
In Asset Accounting, you can create various reports at the profit center or segment level.
In new General Ledger Accounting, you can create an aggregated report on changes in tangible assets. In the report, the values are cumulated on the basis of
the G/L accounts. The report is provided via POWL technology.
For more information, see the application documentation:
For new General Ledger Accounting under SAP ERP Central Component Accounting Financial Accounting General Ledger Accounting (FI-GL) (New)
Reporting Financial Statements Segment Reporting for Fixed Assets (for the report itself, see Aggregated Report on Changes in Tangible Fixed Assets)
For Asset Accounting under SAP ERP Central Component Accounting Financial Accounting Asset Accounting (FI-AA) Information System Standard
Reports Segment Reporting for Fixed Assets (for the reports themselves, see Segment Reports and Profit Center Reports)
More InformationFor a detailed list of the new functions delivered with this business function as well as information on the Customizing settings, see the central release note
FIN_GL_REORG_1: Profit Ctr Reorganization and Segment Reports (New) as well as the detailed release notes accessible from this central release note.
For detailed documentation on the individual functions of new General Ledger Accounting, see the SAP Library under SAP ERP Central Component
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 98 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 99/148
Accounting Financial Accounting General Ledger Accounting (FI-GL) (New) .
There is a business function corresponding to this business function in Public Sector Management (PSM), allowing you to reassign account assignments in
Funds Management. For more information on this PSM business function, see PSM, Reassignment with New General Ledger Accounting.
FI-GL (New), Transfer of Totals and Single Documents inDistributed Systems
Technical Data
Technical Name of Business Function FIN_GL_DISTR_SCEN_1
Type of Business Function Enterprise business function
Available As O f SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 6.0 (SAP_APPL 605)
Technical Usage Central App lications (of which SAP_APPL is relevant)
Application Component FI-GL (New)
Directly Dependent Business Function Requiring Activation in
Addition
Not relevant
This business function provides you with an ALE distribution scenario for new General Ledger Accounting.
In a system landscape with distributed production systems (such as a central FI system as a receiver system with local Logistics systems as sender systems),
you can transfer FI documents individually or grouped together in aggregated form. In the case of aggregated document transfer, the system collects business
transactions of the same type, summarizes them in an aggregated document, and transfers this aggregated document to the receiver system. Transferring
documents in aggregated form reduces the data volume considerably, thereby improving performance.
The new distribution scenario replaces the previously used distribution scenarios for Financial Accounting.
Integration
You activate the new distribution scenario for a specific company code. Once you have activated the new distribution scenario for a company code and the same
receiver system is set up with the old distribution scenario for that company code, only the IDoc of the new distribution scenario is generated. Otherwise, you can
continue to use the old distribution scenario as before.
Prerequisites
For you to be able to use the business function, the following criteria must be met:You have installed the following components as of the specified version (or higher):
Type of Component Component Only Needed for the Following Functions
Software Component SAP_APPL 605
You have set up the General Ledger Accounting (FI-GL) (New) application component. In this way, new General Ledger Accounting is active.
You have activated this business function FI-GL (New), Transfer of Totals and Single Documents in Distributed Systems (FIN_GL_DISTR_SCEN_1).
For more information on the Customizing settings for the individual functions, see the release note FIN_GL_DISTR_SCEN_1: Transfer of Totals and Single
Documents in Distributed Systems (New).
Features
You specify which documents are transferred individually and which are transferred in aggregated form by using the corresponding indicator in the account master
record. When this indicator is set, all documents that contain that account are transferred individually. Similarly, all documents containing taxes are transferred
individually. Furthermore, you can specify additional criteria for the single document transfer.
With the single document transfer, document splitting information is also transferred to the receiver system.
All documents that have not been transferred individually are collected and can be transferred in an aggregated document. With the aggregated document transfer,
as many single documents as possible are summarized in an aggregated document and then transferred as one document.
The single document transfer is performed automatically at the time of posting. You have to start the transfer of aggregated documents explicitly from the menu.
To compare the transferred documents with the transaction figures at the ledger level, you can use the existing reconciliation report Compare Documents /
Transaction Figures, which you start in the central system. To check the totals of the transferred documents at the account level in the receiver system and to
display any variances, you can use the reconciliation report Compare Documents from Totals Document Transfer .
You can reverse a transfer run for aggregated documents. You can control the reversal with the reconciliation report Compare Documents from Totals Document
Transfer .
The new basic type FAGLDT01 belongs to the new distribution scenario. There are the following new message types:
FAGLDT01 for single document transfer, and
FAGLST01 for aggregated document transfer
There are various Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) available for the new distribution scenario in the sender and receiver systems (such as for appending customer
fields to the IDoc). These BAdIs correspond to the customer exits of the old distribution scenarios. We recommend using the BAdIs for the new distribution
scenario.
More Information
For more information about each function, see the SAP Library under SAP ERP Central Component Accounting Financial Accounting General Ledger
Accounting (FI-GL) (New) Tools Document Transfer Using ALE (FI-GL (New)) .
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 99 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 100/148
Average Balances
Technical Data
Technical Name of Business Function FIN_GL_ADB
Type of Business Function Industry Business Function
Available As O f SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 6.0
Technical Usage Central App lications (of which SAP_APPL is relevant)
Application Component General Ledger Accounting (New) and Classic General Ledger Accounting
(FI-GL)
Required Business Function Not relevant
You can use this b usiness function at any time during the fiscal year to calculate average daily balances. For example:
Month-to-date average balance
Quarter-to-date average balance
Year-to-date average balance
The system calculates average daily balances on the basis of the posting date of the document. You can correct and adjust average daily balances manually.
You can also calculate various key figures, such as the prior day balance and the year-to-date average balance.
You can use average daily balances for regulatory reporting, for instance, or to analyze your funding costs.
Integration
Prerequisites
You have installed the following components as of the specified version (or higher):
Type of Component Component Only Needed for the Following Functions
Software component SAP_APPL 6.05
BI Content SAP NetWeaver 7.0 BI Content Add-On 5 SP01
Depending on the functions that you want to use, you have set up the General Ledger Accounting (New) (FI-GL (New)) application component or the classic
General Ledger Accounting (FI-GL) app lication component, p lus the Special Ledger (FI-SL) application component.
Features
Key Figure Calculation
You can use this function to calculate all or a selection of the key figures provided in the system.
Calculate Monthly Averages
You can use this function to update the monthly average ledger. You should do so once a month. This improves system performance and minimizes rounding
errors.
Correct Monthly Average Balances
You can use this function to correct average balances from the monthly average ledger.
Move and Merg e
You use this function to move balances to different ledger combinations.
Import of precalculated averages
You can use this function to post averages that have already been calculated (such as the month-to-date average activity) to FI.
More Information
For a detailed list of the new and changed functions, see the release information FIN_GL_ADB: Average Daily Balance (New).
For more information about each function, see SAP Library under SAP ERP Central Component Accounting Financial Accounting General Ledger
Accounting (FI-GL) (New) Reporting Financial Statements Average Daily Balance .
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 100 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 101/148
FI Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable
FI, Enterprise Service For Sending Payment Advice Notes
Technical Data
Technical Name of Business Function FIN_APAR_PAYMT_ADV
Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function
Available From SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 6.0
Technical Usage Central Applications
Application Component Accounts Payable (FI-AP)
Accounts Receivable (FI-AR)
Prerequisite Business Function Not relevant
You can use this business function to automate the processing of payment advice notes by employing enterprise services also for outgoing payment advice
notes. For this purpose, the following new operation is available in process component Payment Processing :
http://sap.com/xi/APPL/Global2/PaymentAdviceNotification_Out
The operation for incoming payment advice notes http://sap.com/xi/APPL/SE/Global/PaymentAdviceNotification_In is already available
to you with software component version ESA ECC-SE 604.
Prerequisites
You have installed the following components as of the version mentioned:
Type of Component Component Required for the Following Features Only
Software Component EA-APPL 605
SAP_APPL 605
SAP Enterprise Services with the use of SAPNetWeaver Process Integration
SAP NetWeaver 7.02 , software componentversion SAP_APPL 605, namespace
http://sap.com/xi/APPL/Global2
You have made the necessary settings in Customizing for all application components that you use. For additional information on the specific Customizing for this
business function, see the related release note FIN_APAR_PAYMT_ADV: Business Function FI, ES Sending Payment Advices (New).
You activated this business function.
Features
You have the following options for sending payment advice notes electronically in the form of an XML file:
Point to Point Connection of the PI Systems
You use the direct connection between your system and the receiver system, meaning between two systems in which SAP NetWeaver Process Integration
(SAP NetWeaver PI ) is running. These systems are referred to as PI systems below. Your PI system sends in this instance an XML message direct to the
receiver PI system.
Sending an E-Mail
You use the e-mail address of the recipient. Your PI system sends in this instance an e-mail that includes the payment advice note in the form of an XML file as
an attachment. The recipient extracts the XML file and forwards it for processing to the enterprise service PaymentAdviceNotification_In.
For more information on enterprise service http://sap.com/xi/APPL/Global2/PaymentAdviceNotification_Out, vis it the SAP Help Portal
under http://help.sap.com SOA .
Example
You can use enterprise services for outgoing payment advice notes for the following business transactions:
You pay your incoming invoices using the payment program (transaction F110) and transfer a payment advice note to the vendor via the cleared documents.
You collect the money for your outgoing invoice with the payment program for payment requests (transaction F110) and transfer a payment advice note to the
customer via the cleared documents.
Note
Note
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 101 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 102/148
Subcontractor Management (Down Payment Chains)
Technical Data
Technical Name of Business Function LOG_FI_DPC_MM_1
Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function
Available From SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 6.0
Technical Usage Central App lications
Application Component Down Payment Chains (FI-AF-DPC), Purchasing (MM-PUR)
Directly dependent business function requiring activation in addition Enterprise Extension Financials Extension (EA-FIN)
This business function enables you to enter the various b usiness transactions with your business partners, such as the ordering party, vendor, and
subcontractors, for projects that extend over a long time period.
You can create transactions s uch as advance payments, partial invoices, a final invoice, and adjustments/corrections. When you create partial invoices, final
invoices, and adjustments/corrections, you can take retention amounts and additional costs into account. Debit-side and credit-side down payment chains are
used for this kind of settlement.
The debit-side down payment chain comprises invoice processes and payment transactions with a customer, such as the ordering party of a construction project.
The credit-side down payment chain comprises invoice processes and payment transactions with a vendor, such as a subcontractor.
Prerequisites
You have installed the following components as of the version mentioned:
Type of Component Component Required for the Following Features Only
Software Component EA-APPL 605
SAP_APPL 605
You have activated the Enterprise Extension Financials Extension (EA-FIN).
For more information about this Enterprise Extension, see Financials Extension (EA-FIN).
If you have activated both business functions MM, Integration of Materials Management and Financial Accounting (LOG_MMFI_P2P) and Subcontractor
Management (down payment chains) (LOG_FI_DPC_MM_1), you cannot use their functions simultaneously in the same purchase order item. You can activate
both business functions, but you cannot use them in the same purchase order item.
For more information, see the documentation for the business function MM, Integration of Materials Management and Financial Accounting.
For more information about the required Customizing settings, see the SAP Customizing Implementation Guide under Financial Accounting (New) Accounts
Receivable and Accounts Payable Accounting Business Transactions Debit-Side and Credit-Side Down Payment Chains Enhance Debit-Side and Credit-
Side Down Payment Chains .
Features
Integration of the Down Payment Chain in Purchasing
If you have assigned the item category Service to an order item in the purchase order and the Customizing activity Assign Chain Type to Purchase Order
Document is configured accordingly, a contract for the credit-side down payment chain is created or changed for this order item. In credit-side down payment
chains, the contract can be settled as follows:
Advance payment, several partial invoices taking account of retention amounts and service charges, a final invoice, and adjustments after the final invoice. The
following features are available:
Invoices and credit memos are only entered in the credit-side down payment chain and not in the logistics invoice verification.
When an invoice is created in the down payment chain, the system enters a default gross value determined from the service entry sheets that have been
entered and released so far. You can overwrite this default value. Using message control in Customizing, you can specify that the gross value cannot just be
changed as required.
For more information, see the Implementation Guide under Enhance Debit-Side and Credit-Side Down Payment Chains Change Message Control .
If you post or cancel invoices in a down payment chain, the system updates the commitment for the corresponding purchase order item. The cancellation
recreates the commitment items, and a final invoice clears the commitment.
You can make an account assignment for the contract to WBS elements, a cost center, a network/activity, or an order.
For more information, see SAP Library under Debit-Side and Credit-Side Down Payment Chains.
Integration of the Debit-Side Down Payment Chain in the Sales Process within the Sales Order Item
If you create or change a sales order, the system checks if a chain type of a debit-side down payment chain has been assigned to the selected item category of a
sales document item.
If there is an ass ignment, the sys tem displays the DP Chain tab page in the details of the sales document item and prepopulates the chain type.
If the user has entered all the required data for creating a debit-side down payment chain, the system creates a debit-side down payment chain contract when
the user saves the sales order.
You can use WBS elements and orders as account assignment objects.
You create billing documents using the standard billing transaction, for example, transaction VF01 in the SAP Easy Access screen under Logistics Sales
and Distribution Billing Billing Document Create .You can only release billing documents for down payment chains in transaction /SAPPCE/DPC_REL_INV in the SAP Easy Access screen under
Accounting Financial Accounting Additional Functions Down Payment Chains Release Billing Documents for Down Payment Chains .
If the accounting employee releases the billing document for the debit-side down payment chain, the system checks if a transaction category of the down
payment chain is assigned to the billing document type.
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 102 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 103/148
If there is an assignment, the system triggers posting for the corresponding transaction in the debit-side down payment chain. The employee can enter retention
amounts and additional costs. The gross amount of the transaction is copied from the billing document and cannot be changed by the employee.
When the posting is saved, an entry is created in the debit-side down payment chains and an accounting document is created in FI.
You post the incoming / outgoing payments for advance payments, partial invoices, final invoices, and corrections/adjustments in Accounts Payable
Accounting (FI-AP). The payments are cleared in the down payment chain transactions and disp layed in the posting data.
You can only cancel billing documents that are relevant for down payment chains using transaction /SAPPCE/DPC_CANC_INV in the SAP Easy Access
menu under Accounting Financial Accounting Additional Functions Down Payment Chains Cancel Billing Documents Relevant for Down Payment
Chains . In the first step select the billing document for a specific billing date. Detailed information about the cancellation appears in a log.
Customer Enhancements
You can use the Business Add-In (BAdI) Posting the Down Payment Chain to design your own subscreen for posting a new down payment chain transaction.
The Business Add-In (BAdI) Customer-Specific Tab Pages in Contracts allows you to develop your own tab pages in down payment chain contracts.
For more information about the Business Add-Ins, see the Customizing section Enhance Debit-Side and Credit-Side Down Payment Chains under Define
Customer Enhancements.
Account Assignment Objects
You can make an account assignment for the contract of a debit-side or credit-side down payment chain to WBS elements, a cost center, a network/activity, or an
order. When you integrate debit-side down payment chains in the sales process, you can use the WBS element and the order as account assignment objects.
Advance Payment
Advance payments are used for advance financing. If you post partial invoices as invoices, you can enter advance payments up until you enter a final invoice.
Advance payments can be cleared with the following partial invoice completely, partially, or not at all. Retention amounts and additional costs are not taken into
account in advance payments. Advance p ayments only affect payments, not revenues. You post an advance payment entirely to an account assignment object
(for example, a WBS element).
Retention Amounts
In the down payment chain contract, you can agree on the following retention amounts with your business partner:
Security retention amounts for partial invoices (that are cleared in the final invoice)
Security retention amounts for final invoices
You can consider the following retentions in the down payment chain transactions:
Security retention amounts for partial invoices (that are cleared in the final invoice)
Security retention amounts for final invoices
Special retention amounts (quality defects or incorrect invoicing)
When advance payment requests are created, no retention amounts are considered.
If you enter partial invoices as down payment requests, the retention amounts are posted statistically to the down payment chain. The accounting document shows
the open receivab le or payable.
If you enter partial invoices as invoices, final invoices, or adjustments/corrections, the security retention amounts and special retention amounts are:
Posted as payables with a special G /L indicator and assigned a payment block for a credit-side DP chain
Posted as receivab les with a special G/L indicator and assigned a payment block for a debit-side DP chain
You define the special G/L indicator in Customizing either based on the company code or based on the company code and the retention category for debit-side
and credit-side down payment chains.
The special G/L indicator determines the reconciliation accounts of the general ledger to which the system updates the retention amounts (security retention
amounts and special retention amounts). You define the payment block in Customizing based on the company code for debit-side and credit-side down payment
chains for partial invoices and final invoices. In Customizing, you can still configure the net amount or gross amount as the base amount for the percentage
calculation of the security retention amounts.
Additional Costs
In the down payment chain contract, you can enter additional costs or contractors' all risk insurance that you agreed on with your business partner. For contractors'
all risk (CAR) insurance, you can choose the invoicing method:
Complete amount (percentage amount of the contract value) with the first partial invoice, and possible corrections when posting the final invoice and
adjustments
Percentage of invoice amount
If the accounting employee posts a document, the system uses the percentage stored in the contract and the base amount defined in Customizing to calculate anamount for the additional cost category. The employee can make a value-based or percentage-based change to this amount when processing the posting. In
Customizing, you define if the additional costs should be updated such that they decrease expenses or decrease revenues. The additional costs reduce the
amount of the down payment request in Accounting and are updated statistically in the down payment chains. For invoices, the additional costs reduce the
receivable or payab le and are updated in Accounting such that they decrease revenues or decrease expenses .
Verifications
You can maintain agreed verifications in the contract. You can agree on a payment block for verifications if the verification does not arrive in the period specified.
You define the payment block in Customizing.
Deferred Tax
Deferred taxes (known as minimum actual taxes in the construction industry) are taxes that are not reported to the tax authorities at the time of the incoming
invoice, but at a later time. Depending on the legal requirements in your country, you can define the reporting time in Customizing, that is when the deferred tax
should be reported to the tax authorities. The following procedures are supported:
In Germany, the reporting time before the final invoice is the time of payment. After a final invoice of a down payment chain has been created, the reportingtime is the time of the incoming or outgoing invoice. That means there is a change from actual taxation to taxation on an accrual basis.
In France, the reporting time is generally the time of payment.
Determine Accounting Document Type
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 103 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 104/148
In Customizing, you can store which document type should be used for the accounting documents when a posting is created in the DP chain. If the available
Customizing settings are not sufficient, you can store your own logic for determining the document type in a customer-specific implementation.
FI, Exclusions in Extended Withholding Tax
Technical Data
Technical Name of Business Function FIN_EWHT_EXCL
Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function
Available From SAP enhancement package 4 for SAP ERP 6.0
Technical Usage Central App lications
Application Component Accounts Payable (FI-AP-AP)
Required Business Function Not relevant
You can use this business function to exclude line items from the base amount used to calculate withholding tax. You can define the exclusion parameters and
include account assignments, document types, document ranges, and other fields.
You define a derivation strategy with criteria that specifies which line items are excluded from the base amount used in the withholding tax calculation. If new
General Ledger Accounting, Grantee Management, or the US Federal ledgers are used with a splitting method that splits the base item category of withholdingtax, the resulting lines for withholding tax are split based on the characteristics that have not been excluded. The withholding tax data screen shows the details of
included and excluded lines.
Integration
This business function does not alter the existing extended withholding tax functionality; it makes it more flexible by redefining the withholding tax base amount.
Limitation
If you are using automatic down payment transfer functionality as described in the following list, the withholding tax information is not stored on the down payment
transfer lines, and therefore, the withholding tax calculation does not consider previously calculated withholding amounts.
Down payment offset for purchase order-related documents (ERP 2005) including transfer lines calculated in goods receipt (for valuated purchase order line
items) and transfer lines in logistic invoice verification documents (for non-valuated purchase orders)
Down payment offset for earmarked funds-related Financial Accounting (FI) invoices (EHP4 functionality included in the PSM_FM_CI_2 business function)
Down payment offset for earmarked funds-related FI invoices at the header level (EHP5 functionality included in the PSM_USFED_PPAP_3 business function)
If you need to use any of the above functionality, we recommend that you manually post the down payment transfer lines using the Clear Vendor Down Payment
transaction.
The automatic down payment transfer functionality for purchase order-related down payments in logistic invoice verification (EHP4 functionality included in the
LOG_MMFI_P2P business function) is excluded from this limitation.
Prerequisites
You have installed the following components as of the version mentioned:
Type of Component Component Required for the Following Features Only
Software Component SAP_APPL 604 or higher
Features
In Customizing for Financial Accounting (New) under Financial Accounting Global Settings (New) Withholding Tax Extended Withholding Tax Calculation
Exclusions Define Exclusions , you can maintain the exclusion rules depending on various parameters such as G/L account and fund.
Error Correction System
Note
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 104 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 105/148
Technical Data
Technical Name of Business Function FIN_GL_ERR_CORR
Type of Business Function Enterprise business function
Available As O f SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 6.0
Technical Usage Central App lications (of which SAP_APPL is relevant)
Application Component General Ledger Accounting (New) and Classic General Ledger Accounting
(FI-GL)
Required Business Function Not relevant
You can use this business function to correct FI documents from feeder systems. You can correct individual documents manually, or you can correct mass
documents. The data for can come from SAP systems or non-SAP systems. There is a predefined interface that you can use to integrate the systems into the Error
Correction System.
Integration
Prerequisites
You have installed the following components as of the specified version (or higher):
Type of Component Component Only Needed for the Following Functions
Software component SAP_APPL 6.05
BI Content SAP NetWeaver 7.0 BI Content Add-On 5 SP01
Depending on the functions that you want to use, you have set up the General Ledger Accounting (New) (FI-GL (New)) application component or the classic
General Ledger Accounting (FI-GL) application component.
Features
Posting of FI Documents
This function contains the following options for posting FI documents in the target system:
ECS direct input
Direct input
BAPI_ACC_DOCUMENT_CREATE
The enterprise service AccountingDocumentERPBulkNotification_In
Incorrect postings are handled in different ways. For example, the system creates an ECS item, which it converts into an FI document after you have corrected the
document manually.
Mapping data from a feeder system to an SAP target system
You can use this function to map data from feeder systems to the Error Correction System, and continue processing the data in the Error Correction System.
Mass correction
You can use this function to correct FI documents in mass processing, and to correct individual documents manually.
Reversal
You can use this function to reverse incorrect FI documents and to delete the ECS items that were generated.
Document splitting
You can use this function to split documents that have more than 990 line items into multiple documents.
More Information
For a detailed list of the new and changed functions, see the release information FIN_GL_ERR_CORR: Error Correction System (New)
For more information about each function, see SAP Library under SAP ERP Central Component Accounting Financial Accounting General Ledger
Accounting (FI-GL) (New) Business Transactions Post G/L Account Posting Error Correction and Suspense Accounting .
Error Correction System: Suspense Accounting
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 105 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 106/148
Technical Data
Technical Name of Business Function FIN_GL_ERR_CORR_SUSP
Type of Business Function Industry Business Function
Available As O f SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 6.0
Technical Usage Central App lications (of which SAP_APPL is relevant)
Application Component General Ledger Accounting (New) and Classic General Ledger Accounting
(FI-GL)
Required Business Function Error Correction System (FIN_GL_ERR_CORR)
You can use this business function to correct mass FI documents from feeder systems and to post them to a suspense account. The data for can come from SAP
systems or non-SAP systems. There is a predefined interface that you can use to integrate the systems into the Error Correction System.
Integration
Prerequisites
You have installed the following components as of the specified version (or higher):
Type of Component Component Only Needed for the Following Functions
Software component SAP_APPL 6.05
BI Content SAP NetWeaver 7.0 BI Content Add-On 5 SP01
Depending on the functions that you want to use, you have set up the General Ledger Accounting (New) (FI-GL (New)) application component or the classic
General Ledger Accounting (FI-GL) application component.
Features
Posting to a suspense account
You use the Error Correction Sys tem (FIN_GL_ERR_CORR) bus iness function.
You can use this function to post incorrect documents as ECS items to a suspense account.
More Information
For a detailed list of the new and changed functions, see the release information: FIN_GL_ERR_CORR_SUSP: Error Correction System: Suspense Accounting
(New).
For more information about each function, see SAP Library under SAP ERP Central Component Accounting Financial Accounting General Ledger
Accounting (FI-GL) (New) Business Transactions Post G/L Account Posting Error Correction and Suspense Accounting .
Leasing
Full Service Leasing
Technical Data
Technical name of the business function LAM_GEN_FSL
Available as of SAP ERP 6.0 Enhancement Package 2
ECC software component EA-APPL 602, SAP_APPL 6.02
ECC application component Lease Accounting (FI-LA)
Business Intelligence Content Not relevant
SAP Enterprise Services As of SWC EA-APPL 602, namespace http://sap.com/xi/AB/FS/VP
Java software component Not relevant
Portal Content Not relevant
Additional content available in other SAP applications Not relevant
Business function that has to be activated EA-FIN Financials Extension
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 106 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 107/148
Use
You can use this business function in leasing processing to create, check, and post large numbers of invoices from service providers (such as service c enters).
You create service invoices in the settlement request list. When you process settlement request lists, the system compares the invoices with the existing leasing
documents in SAP Customer Relationship Management (SAP CRM). It checks whether the service invoice to be settled is covered by the leasing document and
which conditions apply to this service.
Integration
The processing of service invoices in agency b usiness is part of the SAP Leasing solution.
For more information, see SAP Help Portal at help.sap.com → SAP for Industries → SAP for Banking → SAP Leasing .
Prerequisites
● The business function LAM_GEN_FSL is part of the Lease Operations business scenario.
Note the entries in the business scenario component list.
● To be able to use the functions of the business function LAM_GEN_FSL, you have to activate the business function in Switch Framework Customizing
(transaction SFW5).
● You have made the Customizing settings for leasing processing in agency business.
For more information, see Customizing for SAP ERP under Logistics - General → Agency Business → Enhancements for Full Service Leasing.
Features
● When invoices are received for services previously authorized by the lessor, the system checks whether the corresponding service order exists in SAP
CRM.
● When invoices are received for services that have not been authorized, the system checks in SAP CRM whether the lease covers this service and what
proportion of the costs are accepted by the lessor.
● In agency bus iness, invoices are received that are initially paid by the lessor but are then forwarded to the customer, for example fuel card accounts. In the
case of fuel card accounts, the system checks the validity of the fuel card and offsets the sales for each fuel card against the advance payments made by
the customer.
Travel Management
Travel Management
Technical Data
Technical name of business function FIN_TRAVEL_1
Type of business function Enterprise business function
Available as of SAP ERP 6.0 Enhancement Package 2
ECC software component EA-HR 602
ECC application component Travel Management (FI-TV)
Business Intelligence Content Not relevant
SAP Enterprise Services Not relevant
JAVA Software Component Not relevant
Portal Content As of Business Package ESS 602,
Business Package MSS 603 (optional)
Enhancing elements in other SAP applications Not relevant
Additional business function you need to activate Enterprise Extension Travel Management Extension (EA-TRV)
Use
This business function encompasses the new and extended functions of the Travel Management (FI-TV) component described below.
Integration
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 107 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 108/148
This business function contains a switch, which activates the Business Add-ins (BAdIs) and programs for the new enterprise services (see the section
"Enterprise Services"). If you activate the Travel Management (FIN_TRAVEL_1) business function in your back-end system, the BAdIs and programs for the
enterprise services become available.
Prerequisites
You have installed the Business Package for Enterprise Self-Service 1.2.
You have activated the Travel Management Extension(EA-TRV) enterprise extension in your back-end system.
You have activated the Travel Management (FIN_TRAVEL_1) business function in your back-end system.
You have configured the Travel Management (FI-TV) application component.If you want to use the worklist for approving managers in Manager Self-Service (MSS) of SAP NetWeaver Portal, you also need to install SAP enhancement
package 3 for SAP ERP 6.0 and Business Package for Manager Self-Service 1.3.
Features
Unless indicated otherwise in the details that follow, the new or enhanced functions are available only in the new user interfaces and in Web browsers.
New User Interfaces
SAP NetWeaver Portal
The extended travel management applications in Employee Self-Service (ESS) of SAP NetWeaver Portal are based on Web Dynpro ABAP technology. If you
activate this business function, SAP NetWeaver Portal no longer launches the Web Dynpro Java-based app lications, b ut rather the new Web Dynpro ABAP-
based applications. Employees require new authorization profiles, which are defined in the new standard roles.
For more information, see Web Dynpro ABAP-based Applications in Travel Management.
SAP NetWeaver Business Client (NWBC)
NWBC represents an alternative means of access ing the Web Dynpro ABAP-based applications of Travel Management. Employees can run the same
applications in NWBC as in the SAP NetWeaver Portal, depending on which new standard roles are assigned to the employees. Employees with the new role
Travel Policy Administrator can execute the Customizing applications for managing travel policy.
For more information, see SAP NetWeaver Business Client in Travel Management.
Integration of Travel Requests and Travel Planning
The areas Travel Requests, Travel Planning, and Travel Expenses are fully integrated in the new Web Dynp ro ABAP-based user interface. Employees can copy
the following travel data:
● When creating travel plans, emp loyees can copy data from their travel requests. When employees create a new travel plan, the sys tem displays a list of
open travel requests, from which employees can copy data to the new travel plan.
● When creating expense reports, employees can copy data from their travel requests and travel plans . When employees create a new expense report, the
system displays a list of open travel requests and travel p lans, from which employees can copy data to the new expense report.
The personal object worklist (POWL) of each user shows the status of the user's trips and expenses, and p rovides emp loyees with quick access to the
subsequent actions that are possible based on that status. For example, once a travel request is approved, the user can create a travel plan.
Integration of Travel Services and Travel Preferences in Travel Requests
In travel requests, you can specify which travel services are required for the following modes of travel (but you cannot reserve or book them here):
● Flight
● Hotel
● Car rental
● Rail
● Other travel services
The system displays the preferences of an employee based on his or her travel profile. At a later date, employees can transfer the data of a travel request to a
travel plan, and book the trip. Alternatively, employees can use the Send PDF function to transmit the travel request in PDF format to a travel agency, which then
books the trip.
Copying of Travel Requests
Employees can copy travel requests. Travel assistants can copy travel requests of one employee for another employee, and edit the new request. (Both
employees need to be on the employee list of the travel assistant.)
Other Travel Services
In travel requests, employees now can specify (but not reserve or book) other travel services, such as ferries or airport shuttles.
Saving of Drafts of User Entries
Employees can temporarily save their entries in the app lications (except when entering travel plans). The system saves the incomplete entries with the status
Open.
Expense Types per Settlement Schema
For each settlement schema (trip schema), you can assign those expense types (travel expense types) that need to be availab le in the respective settlement
schema. If you do not sp ecify any expense types for a settlement schema, then all expense types stored in the system are valid for that settlement schema. You
can use this function, for example, to create a settlement schema for miscellaneous receipts, which enables employees to enter receipts that are not directly
related to a specific trip. These might be expenses for phone costs, office supplies, or promotional gifts on behalf of consultants or sales staff.
This function is also available in SAP GUI.
Advanced Passenger Information
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 108 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 109/148
In travel plans, you can enter additional passenger data for Advanced Passenger Information System (APIS). When a flight is booked, this data is transmitted to
the airlines via a Global Distribution System (GDS). This passenger data is required for entering the U.S.A. (and other countries).
Sarbanes-Oxley Compliance
The following functions ensure audit ability of statutory rules, such as those p rescribed by the Sarbanes-Oxley Act:
● Credit Card Receip ts in Expense Reports
○ You can define in Customizing that employees cannot delete credit card receipts.
○ In expense reports, you can itemize your private expenses as separate receipts, and allocate them to private expense types (for example, for mini-bar use in
hotels). This documents the personal portion of expenses in the system.
● Additional Receipt Information in Expense Reports
When entering expenses, you can specify internal and external participants of an entertainment event in the form of a table under additional receipt
information. You can evaluate this information in reporting.
In Customizing, for each trip provision variant and expense type, you can determine whether employees are required to enter such participants.
These enhancements are also available in SAP GUI.
Use of Scanned Receipts and Adding of Attachments
If you use optical archives for Travel Management, in expense reports you can display receipts that are scanned into the sys tem. When scanned receipts are
allocated to an expense report, the system shows them in the POWLs for employees, travel assistants, and approving managers.
Employees can add attachments to their expense reports (for example, the agenda of a convention). This can be done when creating an expense report or in the
POWL. Attachments are linked to the trip number and can be viewed by travel assistants and app roving managers.
Enhancements for Flight Reservations
New functions for flight reservations are listed below:
● You can determine whether the Amadeus reservation system should apply Value Pricer or Master Pricer in fare-driven flight availab ility queries . You do this
with the MASTERPRICER attribute in table TA20SWITCH.
● The system sorts best-price query results by p rice, but groups different flight combinations that have the same price. Within these groupings, you can
select any combination of outbound and return flights.
● If you have set up a di rect connection to a flight reservation system such as TRAVELfusion (in addition to GDS), the sys tem shows the available flights for
both reservation systems in the fare-driven flight availability list.
Enhancements in Bookings at Deutsche Bahn (DB)
Train reservations using NVS (Amadeus) have the following new functions:
● You can book tickets for multiple passengers. You can specify whether each individual passenger has a BahnCard. For international trips, you can enter the
age of each passenger, for example, to receive a discount for people under the age of 26.
● You can book tickets, reserve seats, or both.
● When booking a trip, you can request a Bahn-Tix. Then, prior to departure you can pick up the train ticket at any DB ticket machine for intercity rail traffic.
You can identify yourself at DB ticket machines with any of the following:
○ BahnCard
○ Credit card
○ Eurocheque card
○ The order number shown in the booking
Enhancements for Hotel Reservations
You can sort the hotels listed in the availability display according to different criteria such as price, star rating, or distance from an address.
Generic Interface to Rail Portals
As an alternative to using a global distribution system (GDS) to include rail connections in Travel Planning, you can instead use rail portals for this purpose.
Using SAP NetWeaver Process Integration, Travel Planning provides a generic interface for connections to rail portals. One such connection is the Deutsche
Bahn Corporate Portal (also referred to as Bahn Internet Booking Engine = BIBE).
Generic Interface to Flight Reservation Systems
As an alternative to using a global distribution system (GDS) to include flights in Travel Planning, you can instead use flight reservation systems for this purpose.
Using SAP NetWeaver Process Integration, Travel Planning provides a generic interface for connections to flight reservation systems. This enables you to book
flights with low-cost carriers (LCC) and Web fare deals on the Internet. Travel Planning displays the offers of flight reservation systems as part of the fare-driven
flight availability list, alongside the offers from a GDS.
Enterprise Services
Report programs and BAdIs (Business Add-ins) are available for the new enterprise services for the following process components:
● Expense and Reimbursement Management
● Travel Management
● Business Data Management
● Personnel Adminis tration
For more information, see HCM, Enterprise Services 01.
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 109 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 110/148
Travel Management 2
Technical Data
Technical name of business function FIN_TRAVEL_2
Type of business function Enterprise business function
Available as of SAP enhancement package 4 for SAP ERP 6.0
Technical use Human Capital Management
Application component Travel Management (FI-TV)
Directly dependent business function you also need to activate Travel Management (FIN_TRAVEL_1)
This business function encompasses the new and extended functions of the Travel Management (FI-TV) component described below.
This business function improves and simplifies the travel management process for customers who use SAP ERP 6.0 in their back -end system. Most new
features, such as the combined display of flights and rail or express expense sheets, are available with the Web Dynpro ABAP-based user interface only, which
was introduced with the Travel Management business function (FIN_TRAVEL_1).
The use of this business function provides the following business advantages:
Increased acceptance of the Employee Self-Service (ESS) Trips and Expenses for all bus iness units and employees
Reduced travel expenses through transparency and comparability of flight and rail connections Accelerated entry of travel expenses
Simplified expense report for employees who travel daily or frequently
Accelerated booking of trips and expense settlement in the event management process of the enterprise
Reduced processing costs for trips in conjunction with meetings and events
Additional advantages for the public sector
Travel request and travel expense report also available in ESS
Automated approval of travel requests and travel plans
Increased transparency of costs for managers
Faster reimbursement of expenses
Improved cash flow
Constraints
Unless indicated otherwise in the details that follow, the new or enhanced functions are available only in the Web Dynpro ABAP-based user interface.
Prerequisites
You have installed the following components from the version specified:
Type of Component Component Only needed for the following functions
Software component EA-HR 604 and SAP_HR 604
Portal content Business Package for Employee Self-Service 1.41
SAP Enterprise Services As of EA-HR 604, namespace
http://sap.com/xi/Travel/Global2
For you to be able to use the business function, the following criteria must be met:
You have configured the Travel Management (FI-TV) application component.
You have activated the Travel Management Extension (EA-TRV) enterprise extension in your back-end system.
You have installed the Business Package for Enterprise Self-Service 1.41.
You have activated the Travel Management (FIN_TRAVEL_1) bus iness function in your back-end system.
You have activated the Travel Management 2 (FIN_TRAVEL_2) business function in your back-end sys tem.
If you want to use the Worklist for Approving Managers in Manager Self-Service (MSS) of SAP NetWeaver Portal, you also need to install SAP enhancement
package 3 for SAP ERP 6.0 and Business Package for Manager Self-Service 1.3.
Features
Travel Requests
You can use the following new features in travel requests:
Travel Mediums and Estimated Costs to Be Approved
In travel requests you can determine the use of individual means of transportation and types of accommodations, thereby explicitly having their use be approved.
Similarly, you can have either the traveler, an administrator, or the system, enter various categories of estimated costs. This approach provides more accurate
information and transparency of costs, enabling approving managers to make qualified decisions when approving travel requests. For more information, see
Customizing for Travel Management under Travel Request Travel Request ESS Travel Mediums and Estimated Costs to Be Approved .
Standing Approval of Business Trips
In personnel master data, infotype Travel Privileges (IT 0017), you can configure a standing approval of business trips for certain trips for individual employees.
Enhancements for the Public Sector of Germany
Travel requests contain a range of new fields for the public sector of Germany. These include fields for official business (Dienstgeschaeft), different kinds of
mileage reimbursement, and car pooling.
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 110 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 111/148
Display of the Travel Request Form in Travel Expense Manager (Transaction PR05)
In Travel Expense Manager, administrators can display the form for travel requests that have been created, for example, by travelers in the Web Dynpro ABAP-
based user interface. This lets administrators reconcile approved facts with travel expense reimbursement data prior to a trip.
Enhancement of BOR O bject BUS2089
The Business O bject Repository object Employee Trip (BUS2089) is enhanced with additional methods that enable you to control workflows depending on the
means of transportation and types of accommodations, or estimated costs. Using the workflow as an aid, approving managers can make decisions about the
relevancy of "significant official interest" without having to go to a different application (public sector Germany only).
Constraints
If you use the new travel request functions, travel requests that have been created in the Web Dynpro ABAP-based user interface cannot be processed in
Travel Manager (transaction TRIP).
Travel Plans
You can use the following new features in travel plans:
Combined D isplay of Flight and Rail Connections
You can configure flight searches so that the system also queries the available rail connections and displays these in a combined display of flight and rail
connections. This improves comparisons with regards to travel expenses and travel times. When searching flights, employees can choose to do a comparison.
Furthermore, you can define that certain routes require the combined display of flights and rail connections.
The combined display of flights and rail connections is supported in the fare-driven flight availability only and requires a connection to the German rail authority
Deutsche Bahn (NVS).
For more information, see Customizing for Travel Management under Travel Planning Trip Rules and Profiles Trip and Class Rules Trip and Class Rules
for Flights Flight Trip Rules Flight Availability Query Control Define Mandatory Combined Flight/Rail Display .
Enhancements for Flight Reservations
The following new features are available for flight reservations:
Grid for Displaying Fare Availability in Travel Plans
You can configure the fare-driven flight availability so that the system displays an airfare grid above the available flight combinations. The columns of the grid
show the lowest airfares per provider, and the rows show the lowest fares for nonstop flights, flights with one stopover, and flights with two or more stopovers. In
the grid, users can filter the available connections by c licking the column and row headings or by click ing individual cells.
For more information, see Customizing for Travel Management under Travel Planning Process Control Dialog and Planning Control Travel Planning
Control Define Behavior for Price and Availability Queries .
Alternative Airports
For the fare-driven flight availability, you can define alternative airports for additional queries. This can be done differently for each destination. For example, you
can define Stuttgart as an alternative airport for Frankfurt for flights within Europe; or you can define Berlin as an alternative airport for overseas flights to the
United States or the Asia-Pacific region.
For more information, see Customizing for Travel Management under Travel Planning Trip Rules and Profiles Trip and Class Rules Trip and Class Rules
for Flights Flight Trip Rules Flight Availability Query Control Extend Query for Additional Airports .
Premium Economy Class
Some airlines have introduced a new booking class called "premium economy c lass," which is s ituated between business class and economy c lass. You can
spec ify the routes and the employees for which the premium economy class should be available. Employees can then choose economy class or premium
economy class when selecting flights. This does not app ly to fare-driven flight availability.
You can make the assignments for premium economy class in Customizing for Travel Management under Travel Planning Master Data Travel Service
Providers Flights Define Exceptions of Airlines for Determining Cabin Class .
You also can use travel profiles to assign premium authorizations. The Business Add-in (BAdI) required for this is located in Customizing for Travel
Management under Travel Planning Trip Rules and Profiles Travel Policy Travel Profiles Control and Evaluation of Availability Queries BAdI: Assign
Premium Authorization via Travel Profile .
Improved Display of Airfare Rate Terms
After a traveler successfully chooses the flight connections, the Check Selection step lists the following in summarized form:
Taxes/fees
Latest ticketing date (latest date on which the ticket must be issued)
Rebooking fees
Cancellation fees
If you use the Amadeus reservation system with Master Pricer, the flight availability display shows the rate terms per price segment when querying best
prices with price groups.
A prerequisite for both cases is that the reservation system provides the rate terms in a format that is readable by the system.
Expense Report
You can use the following new features in expense reports:
Express Expense Sheet
This new Web Dynpro ABAP-based app lication simplifies the entry of expenses for employees (for example, sales representatives) who typically travel daily
and settle their expenses once a month, every week, or in other, user-defined intervals. For more information, see Express Expense Sheet.
Enhancement of Expense Reports for the Public Sector of Germany
The Create Expense Report application is enhanced to accommodate the statutory and industry-specific requirements for the public sector in Germany.
The requirements for the public sector in Germany were already met in the back-end transactions, such as Travel Expense Manager (transaction PR05). All
functions needed by casual users are now also available in this application. This includes the public sector requirements at federal and state levels in G ermany.
The application also allows for linking trips to start work and trips to return from work with related separation allowance events.
Externally Created Bar Codes in Travel Expense Data Entry
If you use optical archiving for receipts in expense reports, you also can use bar codes that are created externally (for example, bar codes p reprinted on receipt
envelopes). In this case, the system prompts for the bar c odes when you save an expense report, upon which the employees manually record the bar codes
printed on their receipts. After the save, the system disp lays the recorded bar codes in the expense report under the scanned receipts.
You can set the conditions for recording bar codes through the use of a Business Add-In (BAdI). The BAdI also enables you to assign internally generated bar
codes to the reference table of the optical archive so that the assignment to the expense report occurs automatically after the receipts and the bar code are
scanned.
For more information, see Customizing for Travel Management under Business Add-Ins and User Exits in Travel Management Entry BAdI: Processing of
Bar Codes .
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 111 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 112/148
Adobe PDF Forms
A new PDF form (PTRV_EES_FORM) exists for Express Expense Sheets. You can use this form to display and print for a configured time period all expense
reports that have saved. New fields have been added to the existing PDF forms for travel requests, travel plans, and travel expense statements/expense reports,
and these forms have been optimized. For more information, see PDF-Based Forms in Travel Management.
Integration of Event Management
The following new features support the integration of Event Management systems with Travel Management systems:
New Service Interface
The Event Management system is able to use a new service interface to read the personnel master data relevant for managing participants from an SAP
system - for example, the personnel master data of employees who belong to a particular cost center. For more information, see SAP Library under
Enterprise SOA ES for SAP ERP SAP ERP enhancement package 4 for SAP ERP 6.0 Enterprise Services for SAP ERP Financials Travel
Management Travel P lanning Arrangement
New URL Parameters
The Event Management interface of Travel Management is enhanced with a range of new URL parameters. You can use these URL parameters when calling
the Web Dynpro ABAP-based applications of Travel Management for creating travel requests, travel plans, and expense reports to transfer travel data from the
Event Management system. For more information, see URL Parameters for Integration with Event Management.
Travel Management 3
Technical Data
Technical Name of Business Function FIN_TRAVEL_3
Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function
Available As O f SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 6.0
Technical Usage Human Capital Management
Application Component Travel Management (FI-TV)
Prerequisite Business Function Travel Management 2(FIN_TRAVEL_2)
This business function encompasses the new and extended functions of the Travel Management (FI-TV) component described below.
Unless specifically mentioned otherwise, the new or enhanced functions are available in the following user interfaces of Travel Management:
Web Dynpro ABAP-based applications
Transactions in SAP G UIThis business function provides the following bus iness advantages:
New history and automatic saving of versions for travel requests and expense reports
Improves transparency for users (regarding changes that other users, for example travel administrators, have made to their travel requests or expense
reports)
Protects the employee where changes to expense reports have been made that the employee does not accept
Meets the relevant legal requirements
Trip breaks and expense reports for several trips on the same day
Allows correct reports for several trips on the same day
Meets the relevant legal requirements of German taxation law
Restriction to contributions for business partners of particular industries
Ensures compliance with statutory regulations, for instance the Sarbanes-Ox ley Act
No additional solutions from other providers are required for compliance with statutory regulations
Highlights critical data in the expense report that you can evaluate
Definition of threshold values that determine when users have to submit a paper receipt
Reduces the chances of incorrect settlementEnsures compliance with statutory regulations, for instance the Sarbanes-Ox ley Act
Optimizes back-office operation
Cost comparison between expense reports and the related travel requests or plans
Improves the transparency of additional costs
Reduces the chances of incorrect settlement
Enables evaluations of unplanned costs or adherence to regulations
Country versions for the Czech Republic and Slovakia
Enables the settlement of travel and expenses in the Czech Republic and Slovakia
Allows the future import of legal changes using Support Packages, which you can download from SAP Service Marketplace.
Is also available in the Web Dynpro ABAP-based user interface
Integration
Integration with third-party online booking systems
If you activate the business functions Travel Management, Third-Party Travel Planning (FIN_TRAVEL_PLANNING_EXTERNAL) and Travel Management, Third-Party Travel Planning 2 (FIN_TRAVEL_PLANNING_EXTERNAL_2), you can use various third-party online bookings systems instead of SAP Travel
Management to book travel services.
Integration with the Shared Services Framework
If you activate the business function Travel Management, Enablement for Shared Services (FIN_SSC_TIC_1) you can integrate selected applications of SAP
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 112 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 113/148
Travel Management in your SAP Shared Services environment. This means that users can create service requests starting from these applications.
Integration of budg et periods in the cost assig nment
If you have activated business function PSM, Budget Period 2 (PSM_GEN_BUDPER_2) then budget periods are available in all travel management functions that
use cost assignments.
You can control the visibility of fields for the budget period in Customizing of Travel Management under Employee Self-Services Interface Configuration for
the Web Dynpro Interface in Travel Management Set Up Variable Layout for Account Assignment Objects .
Enhanced treatment of tax on sales or purchases (value added tax) in expense receipts
You can use this business function to use the enhanced treatment of tax on sales and purchase in expense receipts. Users can enter additional data for the
refund of value added tax (tax on sales/purchases) in the receipts.
This means you can meet, for example, the requirements of the EU directive for the refund of value added tax (COUNCIL DIRECTIVE 2008/9/EC of 12 February 2008 that stipulates detailed rules for t he refund of value added tax provided for in Directive 2006/112/EC, to taxable persons not established in the Member
State of refund but established in another Member State).
For additional information, see the Entry of VAT Refund Details function.
Integration into the Employee Self-Service (WDA)
If you activate the business function HCM, ESS with Web Dynpro ABAP (HCM_ESS_WDA_1), you can use the Employee Self-Service (WDA) in SAP NetWeaver
Portal and SAP NetWeaver Business Client (NWBC) for HTML.
To use the Travel and Expenses Employee Self-Service in SAP NetWeaver Business Client for HTML, assign the role ESS Single Role for Travelers
(SAP_FI_TV_WEB_ESS_TRAVELER) to the users. This role is integrated into the ESS role for Web Dynpro ABAP-based applications
(SAP_EMPLOYEE_ESS_WDA_1).
To use the Travel and Expenses Employee Self-Service in SAP NetWeaver Portal, you require the Business Package for Employee Self-Service (WDA) 1.50.
Prerequisites
You have installed the following components as of the specified version (or higher):
Type of Component Component Only Needed for the Following Functions
Software Component EA-HR 605 and SAP_HR 604
Portal Content Business Package for Employee Self-Service
1.41
If you use SAP NetWeaver Portal.
You have activated the Travel Management Extension (EA-TRV) enterprise extension in your back-end system.
You have configured the Travel Management (FI-TV) application component.
You have activated the Travel Management (FIN_TRAVEL_1) business function in your back-end system.
You have activated the Travel Management 2 (FIN_TRAVEL_2) business function in your back-end system.
You have activated the Travel Management 3 (FIN_TRAVEL_3) business function (this business function) in your back-end system.
Features
New history and archiving of forms
The history has been enhanced, and also logs the following information:
Reimbursement amount
Estimated costs
Number of receipts
If you activate logging of history, the system logs the changes to travel requests and expense reports. Users can display the history in the following user
interfaces:
Work centers for travelers, travel assistants, and approving managers on the Web Dynpro ABAP-based user interface of Travel Management
Transactions of the Travel Expense Report in SAP GUI; for example, in the Travel Expense Manager (PR05) or in the Travel Calendar (PR02)
If you have activated logging of history, you also can define that the system should automatically archive the forms for travel requests and expense reports when
certain events occur. For example, when a user changes the data for a travel request or expense report, the system writes a version document (a copy of the
form) to the optical archive. Users can use the history to access the versions.
If you do not activate logging of history, the system logs only the changes made to travel expense reports as it did in earlier releases (see History). In this case,
users can display the change history only in the transactions of the Travel Expense Report in SAP GUI.
You can define when the system archives a version in Customizing of Travel Management under Travel Expenses Define History and Archiving .
You can use the Business Add-In BAdI: Adjust Archiving Settings to override or enhance the default settings in Customizing. For more information, see
Customizing for Travel Management under Travel Expenses BAdI: Adjust Archiving Settings .
Storage of attachments
You can archive attachments to travel requests and expense reports in the Web Dynpro ABAP-based user interface as Business Documents. This function was
previously only available using Generic Object Services (GO S) in the Travel Expense Manager (PR05).
You can insert a file either as a simple attachment or as a business document. Business documents are different from simple attachments in the following ways:
The system stores business documents in an archive v ia the ArchiveLink. Simple attachments are stored by the system under content category SOFFDB in
the content repository assigned.
Business documents are classified by documentation type, for example as a travel document or as a travel costs receipt. You define the document types in
ArchiveLink Basic Customizing .
Trip breaks and expense reports for several trips on the same day
Users can insert breaks in their travel requests and expense reports that the system does not include when calculating the flat rates. Users have the option of
copying trip breaks to create expense reports with daily or weekly return (for example, for a training course). This enables you to correctly reimburse the
employees for several trips on the same day (in compliance with the local taxation laws).
To make it possible to insert trip breaks for a trip schema, you have to set the indicator Multiday Trip in schema and single field control of Travel Management .
You cannotuse the Multiple Trips/Day function available in previous releases at the same time.
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 113 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 114/148
Restriction to contributions to business partners of particular industries
You can track expenses that have been incurred for bus iness p artners of particular industries. In many industries this is mandatory, and must be recorded by the
system.
In Customizing for Travel Management , under Travel Expenses Dialog and Travel Expenses Control Dialog Control Field Control for Additional Receipt
Information , you can define that users can select a business partner as participant for a receipt. You can use the Business Add-In BAdI: Check If Maximum
Amount Exceeded for Business Partner to check whether the costs for a business partner have exceeded a certain amount.
The BAdI ensures compliance with statutory regulations, for instance the Sarbanes-Oxley Act in the USA. Based on these regulations, the entertainment
expenses that a pharmaceutical company pays for business partners that are health care providers should be restricted, for example.
Definition of threshold values that determine when users have to submit a paper receipt
You can define expense-type specific threshold values and so determine when a user has to submit a paper invoice. If a receipt exceeds a threshold value, the
user receives a warning message that informs him he must submit a paper receipt. If the user ignores the warning message, the system inserts a corresponding
comment in the PDF form of the expense report.
The PDF form for the expense report contains a summary of the receipts that cause violations:
Missing paper receipts required
Amounts exceeding the maximum rate
You can define the threshold values in Customizing for Travel Management under Travel Expenses Master Data Travel Expense Types Define Maximum
Rates and Default Values for Expense Types . This Customizing activity makes the following new amount types availab le:
Warning message if paper receipt is missing (manual receipt)
Warning message if paper receipt is missing (credit card receipt)
These amount types make it possible for you to define different threshold values for manual receipts and credit card receipts.
You can define the standard settings for the Paper Receipt Exists indicator in the various user interfaces of travel expenses in Customizing of Travel Management
under Employee Self-Services Interface Configuration for the Web Dynpro Interface in Travel Management Define Schema and Individual Field Control .
Cost assig nment for trip segments and receipts
In the dialog windows for the cost assignment of trip segments and receipts, users can reuse existing cost assignments that they have created for additional
destinations.
Cost comparison
You can activate the cost comparison between expense reports and the related travel requests or plans. When a user saves an expense report, the system
makes the following cost comparisons:
The system compares the total costs of the expense report with the estimated total costs of the related travel request or plan. If an expense report exceeds the
customer-defined maximum difference, the user has to enter a reason. In this case, the PDF form for expense reports displays how much the maximum is
exceeded and the reason of the user.
For a comparison between the expense report and travel plan, the system also compares the receipts with the bookings. If a receipt exceeds the customer-
defined maximum difference, the system issues either a warning or an error message. If there is an error message, the user has to enter a reason. In this case,
the PDF form for expense reports displays how much the maximum is exceeded and the reason of the user.
The cost comparison is available in the following applications:Travel Expense Manager (transaction PR05)
Expense Report in the Web Dynpro ABAP-based user interface (but not in the Express Expense Sheet)
You activate the cost comparison in Customizing of Travel Management under Travel Expenses Activate Cost Comparisons . You define the maximum
differences in the following Customizing activities:
Comparison of total costs
In Travel Management Customizing, under Travel Expenses Define Maximum Values for Cost Comparisons of Travel Expenses
Comparison of receipts and bookings
In Customizing for Travel Management under Travel Expenses Master Data Travel Expense Types Define Maximum Rates and Default Values for
Expense Types
Entry of trips abroad in the express expense sheet
Users can enter trips abroad in the express expense sheet, providing you have activated this function in Customizing. If a user enters a foreign destination in the
express expense sheet, the system requests the additional information that is required for trips abroad. Users can call the additional information using the More
Details pushbutton. The PDF form for for expense reports displays the additional information for trips abroad.
If you activate the entry of trips abroad in the express expense sheet, you can no longer use the trip calendar (PR02).
Negative Postings
If you have p ermitted negative postings in Financial Accounting, these are also valid when you reverse travel expenses. In this case a deb it posting reduces the
credit side of the account and a credit posting reduces the debit side of the account. For more information, see Canceling a Trip that has been Posted.
Country versions for the Czech Republic and Slovakia
You can use the country versions for the Czech Republic and Slovakia in the Travel Expense Reports and Expense Reports.
The following trip provision variants are available:
Trip provision variant Country More Information
18 Czech Republic (CZ) Country Version for Czech Republic
31 Slovakia (SK) Country Version for Slovakia
The following new features are available in both of these country versions:Reimbursement of pocket money
Reimbursement for the use of private vehicles
Rounding of currency amounts for cash payments
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 114 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 115/148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 116/148
For more information, see Customizing for Travel Management under Travel Planning Master Data Technical Control Parameters for Travel Planning
Access to External Reservation Systems Access Parameters for External Reservation Systems BAdI: Define Exit for Third-Party Travel Planning .
Replication of SAP Travel Management Master Data in a Third-Party Online Booking System
You can use the enterprise service Travel Planning Arrangement Out with service operation TravelPlanningArrangementEmployeeNotification_Out
to provide master data from SAP Travel Management to third-party online booking systems. You can use the Business Add-In BAdI: Mapping for
TravelPlanningArrangementEmployeeNotification to control the mapping of the outbound interface.
This business function includes the example imp lementation PTRM_SE_PROXY_GETTHERE, which adapts the mapping of master data to meet the requirements
of GetThere. You can copy the example implementation and adapt it to meet your requirements.
For more information about this enterprise service, see SAP Library on SAP Help Portal at help.sap.com SOA Enterprise Services for SAP ERP
Enhancement Package 2 for SAP ERP 6.0 Travel Management Travel Planning Arrangement Out .
New content for SAP NetWeaver Portal
SAP NetWeaver Portal contains a new page and a new iView, which enables the system to launch an online booking system. The Employee Self-Service role
has been enhanced accordingly.
For technical reasons, the portal content for third-party travel planning resides in the content administration of SAP NetWeaver Portal under Portal Content
Content Provided by SAP End User Content Employee Self-Service ERP 2005 EhP2 .
Support for Single Sign-On in SAP NetWeaver Portal
Single Sign-On (SSO) is a mechanism that spares users the trouble of entering a password for each system they log on to. With SSO, a user identifies him- or
herself only once and afterwards can log on to all systems that are part of the SSO environment.
In SAP NetWeaver Portal, the system can use SSO to log on the users of SAP Travel Management automatically to a third-party online booking system.
Before you can use Single Sign-On, you need to provide the public certificate (SAPLogonTicketKeypair-cert.pse) of your SAP NetWeaver Portal for the
third-party travel planning system.
For more information, see Single Sign-On to Non-SAP Sys tems and App lications.
More Information
Third-Party Travel Planning
Travel Management, Third-Party Travel Planning 2
Technical Data
Technical Name of Business Function FIN_TRAVEL_PLANNING_EXTERNAL_2
Type of Business Function Enterprise business function
Available As O f SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 6.0
Technical Usage Human Capital Management
Application Component Travel Management (FI-TV)
Prerequisite Business Function Travel Management, Third-Party Travel
Planning(FIN_TRAVEL_PLANNING_EXTERNAL)
You can use this business function to use the below-mentioned new functions for travel planning in third-party online booking systems.This business function provides the following bus iness advantages:
Optimization of the travel management process
Reduction of manual interfaces
Constraints
The new features are available only with the Web Dynpro ABAP-based user interface of SAP Travel Management.
Integration
Integration with GetThere
You can use this business function to use the following functions for integrating the GetThere online booking system by Sabre:
Additional example imp lementations of the Business Add-In BAdI: Define Exit for Third-Party Travel Planning
Program for synchronizing booking data with the GetThere database
Integration in the approval workflow
Integration with Amadeus e-Travel Management
Note
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 116 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 117/148
You can use this business function to use the following functions for integrating the Amadeus e-Travel Management online booking system:
An example imp lementation of the Business Add-In BAdI: Define Exit for Third-Party Travel Planning
Program for synchronizing booking data with the Amadeus e-Travel Management database
Integration in the approval workflow
Travel assistants can create third-party travel p lans for employees
Prerequisites
You have installed the following components as of the specified version (or higher):
Type of Component Component Only Needed for the Following Functions
Software component EA-HRGxx 605 and SAP_HRGxx 604
Portal content Business Package for Employee Self-Service
1.41 SP 04
If you use SAP NetWeaver Portal.
You have activated the Travel Management Extension (EA-TRV) enterprise extension in your back-end system.
You have configured the Travel Management (FI-TV) application component.
You have activated the Travel Management (FIN_TRAVEL_1) business function in your back-end system.
You have activated the Travel Management, Third-Party Travel Planning (FIN_TRAVEL_PLANNING_EXTERNAL) business function in your back-end system.
You have activated this Travel Management, Third-Party Travel Planning 2 (FIN_TRAVEL_PLANNING_EXTERNAL_2) business function in your back-end
system.
Features
This business function contains the following new and enhanced features:
Integration in Approval Workflow
You can use SAP Business Workflow WS77900173 to set up an approval workflow for third-party travel plans. This workflow is not activated in the standard
system.
The third-party online booking system must meet the following prerequisites:
For new or changed bookings, the third-party booking system first sets the status to Waiting for Approval and then awaits approval or rejection from the SAP
system before proceeding with the actual booking.
In Amadeus e-Travel Management , the users to which the status Waiting for Approval is to apply must be ass igned to a relevant Amadeus e-Travel
Management Community .
In GetThere, the users to which the status Waiting for Approval is to apply must be ass igned to a relevant GetThere Site.
For the approval p rocess, you can use the Business Workplace or, in SAP NetWeaver Portal, the universal worklist (UWL) of Manager Self-Service (MSS) with
SAP Business Workflow.
When a user has created or changed a third-party booking, the system does not trigger a workflow until the booking data between the third-party online booking
system and the SAP system has b een synchronized. The booking data can be synchronized as follows:
The user refreshes his or her personal object worklist (POWL) or the travel plan query in the POWL.
The SAP system executes a program for synchronizing the booking data with the database of the third-party online booking system (see the "Synchronizing the
Booking Data" section).
If, upon synchronizing the booking data, the system finds a third-party booking with the status Waiting for Approval , it triggers the workflow for this booking. The
workflow first sends a message to the approving manager.
Once the approving manager has rejected or approved the third-party booking, the SAP system notifies the third-party online booking system (the SAP system
calls the relevant Web service of the third-party online booking system).
If the booking is rejected, the third-party online booking system sets the booking status to Rejected , cancels the booking, and notifies the user.
If the booking is approved, the third-party online booking system sets the booking status to Purchase ( Amadeus e-Travel Management ) or Purchase PNR
(GetThere), makes the actual booking, and notifies the user.
Synchronizing the Booking Data
You can use the following programs to import new and changed data from third-party online booking systems GetThere and Amadeus e-Travel Management into
SAP Travel Planning:
Program GET_GETTHERE_PNR for synchronizing booking data with the GetThere database
Booking data must be synchronized because the GetThere Web service (that you use to import new and changed PNR data records) only returns those PNR
data records that have been changed within the last hour.
You can continue to use program GET_SABRE_PNR to synchronize booking data with the Sabre database.
Program GET_ETRAVEL_PNR for synchronizing booking data with the Amadeus e-Travel Management database
We recommend that you execute the program for synchronizing booking data once an hour.
Travel Assistants Can Create Third-Party Travel Plans for Employees
Users with the Travel Assistant role can create third-party travel plans for employees in their employee list. The prerequisite for this is that you have set up the
third-party online booking system for the travel assistants in the Office Find (TRVOF) feature.
When a travel assistant calls the third-party online booking system for an employee, the system logs the relevant employee on to the third-party online booking
system. The travel assistant works in the third-party online booking system using the identity of the employee.
If the travel assistant makes changes for an employee in the third-party online booking system, the SAP Travel Planning form displays the name of this travel
assistant as the person who last changed the data.
This function is currently available for Amadeus e-Travel Management only.
Recommendation
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 117 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 118/148
Role for SAP NetWeaver Business Client
The new role Traveler (SAP_FI_TV_WEB_TRAVELER_EXT_TP) enables users to use third-party travel planning in SAP NetWeaver Business Client. The role
has all authorizations of the role Traveler (SAP_FI_TV_WEB_TRAVELER), with the following exception: When a user with this role in SAP NetWeaver Business
Client starts Travel Planning, SAP NetWeaver Business Client executes a third-party travel p lanning solution, such as GetThere or Amadeus e-Travel
Management , instead of executing SAP Travel Planning.
Additional Example Implementations
With this business function, the following example implementations of the business add-in BAdI: Define Exit for Third-Party Travel Planning
(PTRM_EXTERNAL_TP_BADI_DEF) are available in the enhancement spot PTRM_EXTERNAL_TP_ENHSPOT:
Example implementation for the third-party online booking system GetThere
Example implementation PTRM_EXTTP_ENHSPOT_GETTHERE_V2 uses newer Web services from GetThere to import the list of new and changed PNR data
records from the GetThere database, and to read individual PNR data records from the GetThere database.
Example implementation for the third-party online booking system Amadeus e-Travel Management
Example implementation PTRM_EXT_TP_E_TRAVEL illustrates how you can integrate the third-party online booking system Amadeus e-Travel Management .
You can copy the example implementations and adapt them to meet your requirements.
More Information
Third-Party Travel Planning
Travel Management, Enablement for Shared Services
Technical Data
Technical Name of Business Function FIN_SSC_TIC_1
Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function
Available As O f SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 6.0
Technical Usage Human Capital Management
Application Component Travel Management (FI-TV)
Required Business Function Travel Management 3(FIN_TRAVEL_3)
With this business function you can integrate selected applications of SAP Travel Management in your SAP Shared Services environment. Users can createservice requests in these Travel Management applications.
In connection with SAP enhancement package 1 for SAP CRM 7.0, this business function supports the operation of a Travel Interaction Center (TIC) that runs in
SAP Customer Relationship Management (SAP CRM) For this, you must have activated business function Multifunctional Shared Service Interaction Center
(CRM_SHSVC) in the CRM system.
This business function provides the following business advantages in connection with the Travel Interaction Center:
Optimizes your business processes for trips and expenses
Improves service quality and the efficient resolution of problems
You can perform conventional functions, such as approving trips and further processing by travel administrators, in your shared services environment.
Integration
The service request is available in the following Travel Management applications:
Web Dynpro ABAP-based applications
Expense report
Express expense reportWork center for travelers
Work center for travel assistants
Work center for approving managers
These applications and their dialog windows contain the Service Request or Create Service Request pushbuttons, which ERP users can use to create or
search for service requests.
Transactions in SAP G UI
Travel Expense Manager (transaction PR05)
Travel Manager (transaction TRIP)
ERP users can create or find service requests using the menu bar of these transactions under Help Service Request .
Prerequisites
You have installed the following components as of the specified version (or higher):
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 118 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 119/148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 120/148
Technical Name of the Business Function FIN_FSCM_CCD
Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function
Available As O f SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP ERP 6.0
Technical Usage Strategic Enterprise Mgmt
Application Component ● SAP Dispute Management
(FIN-FSCM-DM)
● SAP Collections Management
(FIN-FSCM-COL)
● SAP Credit Management
(FIN-FSCM-CR)
Directly Dependent Business Function Requiring Activation in
Addition
FSCM Integration (FIN_FSCM_INTEGRATION)
Note that you do not need this additional business function for all
subfunctions.
Use
You can use this business function to make use of new functions in the following application components of SAP Financial Supply Chain Management:
SAP Dispute Management
This is the focus of the functional enhancement delivered with this business function. You have more flexible options for assigning items and customers to dispute
cases. This makes your dispute case processing more efficient. You can also define dependencies between dispute case attributes and attributes of the
customer line items assigned to the dispute case. You can use the advantages of this improved integration for targeted dunning, for example.
To simplify the daily work of the Dispute Manager, he has the option of simplified user interfaces in the form of a work center.
SAP Collections Management
In receivables processing, you can use the new function of SAP Dispute Management to add customer-disputed objects, such as invoices, to dispute cases.
SAP Credit Management
Here there are enhancements such as improvement of the log display, simulation of the credit check for an individual business partner direct in SAP Credit
Management, and the credit exposure display in the credit horizon. There are additional enterprise services for communicating with information providers.
Prerequisites
You have installed the following components as of the version mentioned:
Type of Component Component Is Only Needed for the Following Features
Software Component ● FINBASIS 602
● SEM_BW 602
SAP NetWeaver Business Intelligence (SAP
NetWeaver BI)
As of SAP NetWeaver 2004s Enhancements for SAP Credit Management. You
do not have to activate the business function.
Business Intelligence Content As of SAP NetWeaver 20 04s BI Content Add-O n 3
SP06
Enhancements for SAP Credit Management. You
do not have to activate the business function.
SAP NetWeaver Portal As of SAP NetWeaver 2004s ● Work Center of the Dispute Manager
● Work Center of the Credit Manager
Portal Content As of Business Package for Dispute Manager
(SAP ERP) 1.2
Work Center of the Dispute Manager
Portal Content As of Business Package for Credit Manager (SAP
ERP) 1.2
Work Center of the Credit Manager
SAP Enterprise Services As of FINBASIS 602, namespace
http://sap.com/xi/FSCM/Global
Services for SAP Credit Management
To be able to use this business function, the following prerequisites must be met in the individual components:
SAP Dispute Management
● You have configured the following appl ication components:
○ SAP Dispute Management
○ Accounts Receivable Accounting (FI-AR)
● You have activated the FSCM Functions (FIN_FSCM_CCD) bus iness function.
● You have activated the FSCM Integration (FIN_FSCM_INTEGRATION) business function in the Accounts Receivab le Accounting (FI-AR) system. However,
you do not need this for the work center of the Dispute Manager.
● You have made the necessary settings in Customizing for SAP Dispute Management. For more information, see the release notes of the business functions.
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 120 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 121/148
SAP Collections Management
● You have configured the following appl ication components:
○ SAP Collections Management
○ Accounts Receivable Accounting (FI-AR)
● You have activated the FSCM Functions (FIN_FSCM_CCD) bus iness function.
● You have activated the FSCM Integration (FIN_FSCM_INTEGRATION) business function in the Accounts Receivab le Accounting (FI-AR) system
● You have made the necessary settings in Customizing for SAP Collections Management. For more information, see the release notes of the business
functions.
SAP Credit Management
● You have configured the SAP Credit Management application component.
● You have activated the FSCM Functions (FIN_FSCM_CCD) bus iness function.
Features
This business function covers the following functions:
SAP Dispute Management
Increased flexibility for creating dispute cases
The Customer-Disputed Amount attribute has been added to the dispute case. In the dispute case, you can also display customer-disputed objects under the
linked objects.
You can assign an open or cleared item to any number of dispute cases as customer-disputed object. The customer-disputed amount can correspond to the
amount of the item or you can enter it manually. However, customer-disputed objects do not disp lay the close p rocess integration with Accounts Receivable
Accounting (FI-AR) as disputed objects do. In particular, in clearing transactions for customer-disputed items there is no change to the customer-disputed amount
in the dispute case.
You can also add a customer to a dispute case without having to assign an item. However, you can still enter a customer-disputed amount.
You can only add customer-disputed objects to a dispute case in individual p rocessing. You can do this in clearing transactions, the line item lis t, individual
document processing, and dispute case processing.
In the clearing transaction, the system recognizes when dispute cases exist for a customer. You can choose whether to add residual items to be created to an
existing dispute case or to create a new dispute case. In the first case, the system displays a prioritized selection list of dispute cases. In a mass processing
function, you can also subsequently assign open items to the existing dispute cases.
A customer calls before paying an invoice to dispute the invoice - either completely or partly. The responsible clerk in accounts receivab le can create a
dispute case immediately and assign the invoice with the customer-disputed amount as customer-disputed object. Later the customer makes the payment and
deducts the amount as notified. The clerk can assign the residual item that arises to the existing dispute case.
Definition of dependencies between dispute case attributes and attributes of the customer line items assigned to the dispute case.
Changes in a dispute case can trigger changes in the assigned line item. Depending on the status and reason of the dispute case, you can set a dunning block
in the assigned line item and remove it again. The removal can take place after a defined number of days in arrears. When the dispute case receives the status
To Be Collected, the system removes the dunning block again after a number of days.
Work Center for Dispute Manager
The work center for the Dispute Manager is a portal-based interface to support his daily work. It shows an overview of the dispute cases grouped by predefined
and personalized selection criteria.
For more information, see:
● Component SAP Dispute Management for FI-AR (FIN-FSCM-DM):
○ Dispute Case, Linked Objects section (changed)
○ Process Integration with Accounts Receivable Accounting (changed)
○ Creating Dispute Cases in Financial Accounting (changed)
○ Creating Dispute Cases from the Document Disp lay (changed)
○ Creating Dispute Cases from the Line Item List (changed)
○ Creating Dispute Cases during Clearing of Open Items (changed)
○ Assign Customer (new)
○ Adding Customer-Disputed Objects (new)
○ Removing Ob jects (new)
○ Creation of Proposal for Assignment of Open Items (new)
○ Processing of Proposal for Assignment of Open Items (new)
○ Displaying Dispute Cases from the Document Display and Change (changed)
○ Disp laying Dispute Cases from the Line Item List (changed)
○ Amounts in Disp ute Case, Customer-Disputed Amount section (new)
○ Document Changes from Dispute Cases (New)● Business Package for Dispute Manager (SAP ERP) 1.2 (new)
● Security guide on SAP Service Marketplace at service.sap.com/securityguide.
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 121 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 122/148
SAP Collections Management
The increased flexibility of SAP Dispute Management on creation of dispute cases is also an advantage in the receivables processing of SAP Collections
Management.
Using the BI Content, the collections specialist can make additional analyses, such as the degree of processing of his work list, or the due dates of his customers.
For more information, see:
● Component SAP Collections Management (FIN-FSCM-COL):
○ Invoices (changed)
○ Dispute Cases (changed)
SAP Credit Management
The following enhancements have been realized in SAP Credit Management.
● The log display has been improved to exp lain the calculation of the score.
● In SAP Credit Management, you can perform a simulation of the credit check for an individual business partner. This enables you to check quick ly whether
the selected check rule leads to the expected results.
● A credit exposure disp lay in the credit horizon has been added to the credit exposure display, based on the check rule ass igned to the business p artner.
This means that you see the credit exposure relevant for the dynamic credit check on the interface.
● You can retrieve updates of external credit monitoring information to update the rating of your business partners.
● You can obtain the ID, which an information provider uses for a business partner, from the information provider electronically .
For more information, see:
● Component SAP Credit Management:
○ External Credit Monitoring Information (New)
○ Search for ID of Business Partner at Information Provider (New)
FSCM Functions 2
Technical Data
Technical Name of Business Function FIN_FSCM_CCD_2
Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function
Available As O f SAP enhancement package 4 for SAP ERP 6.0
Technical Usage Strategic Enterprise Mgmt
Application Component SAP Collections Management (FIN-FSCM-COL)
SAP Credit Management (FIN-FSCM-CR)
SAP D ispute Management (FIN-FSCM-DM)
Directly Dependent Business Function Requiring Activation in
Addition
FSCM Functions (FIN_FSCM_CCD)
FSCM Integration 2 (FIN_FSCM_CCD_INTEGRATION)
This business function is closely linked with business function FSCM Integration 2 in the accounts receivable accounting system. With these two business
functions, you can use functions that contribute to greater flexibility and transparency in the SAP Financial Supply Chain Management components.
To process dispute cases and credit limit requests, Enterprise Services (ES) and Web interfaces are available. If you use several FI systems and a central SAP
Collections Management or SAP Credit Management, then functions are available for replicating customer master data from these FI systems to the business
partner master data of the central system. For the collection of receivables, you can consider the head office/branch office relationships of your customers, and
create targeted worklists.
Prerequisites
You have installed the following components as of the version given:
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 122 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 123/148
Type of Component Component Is Needed Only for the Following Features
Software Component FINBASIS 604
SEM_BW 604
SAP NetWeaver Business Intelligence (SAP
NetWeaver BI)
As of SAP NetWeaver 7.00 Enhancements for the head office/branch office
relationships in SAP Collections Management*
Bus iness Intelli gence content As of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 B I Content Add-On 4 Enhancements for the head office/branch office
relationships in SAP Collections Management*
SAP NetWeaver Portal or SAP NetWeaver
Business Client
As of SAP NetWeaver 7.00 or as of SAP
NetWeaver Business Client for the Business Suite
Web application of SAP Credit Management
Web app lication of SAP Dispute Management
Portal Content Business Package for Credit Manager 1.41 Web application of SAP Credit Management
Portal Content Business Package for Dispute Manager 1.41 Web application of SAP Dispute Management
SAP Enterprise Services As of SAP NetWeaver 7.01, software component
version FINBASIS 604, namespace
http://sap.com/xi/FSCM/Global2
Web application of SAP Credit Management
Web app lication of SAP Dispute Management
SAP Enterprise Services when using SAP
NetWeaver Process Integration
As of SAP NetWeaver 7.00, software component
version FINBASIS 604, namespace
http://sap.com/xi/FSCM/Global2
Customer application for processing credit limit
requests
Customer application for dispute case
processing
SAP NetWeaver Process Integration (UKMS
connection to SAP NetWeaver PI)
You require the following versions:
SAP NetWeaver 7.01 or higher
SAP NetWeaver 7.11 or higher
Master data synchronization for connecting
several FI systems to SAP Collections
Management
Master data synchronization for connecting
several FI systems to SAP Credit Management
You do not have to activate the business function for BI content.
To use this business function, the following prerequisites also have to be met:
You have set up the application components that you are using:
SAP Collections Management
SAP Credit Management
SAP Dispute Management
If you use SAP Collections Management or SAP Dispute Management, you have set up Accounts Receivable Accounting (FI-AR).
You have made the required settings in Customizing for all of the application components that you use. For additional information on specific Customizing for this
business function, see the related release note FIN_FSCM_CCD_2: Business Function FSCM Functions 2 (New)
(FSCM_604_CCD_2_M).
You have activated the following business functions:
FSCM Functions 2 (FIN_FSCM_CCD_2)
(available bus iness function)FSCM Functions (FIN_FSCM_CCD)
FSCM Integration 2 (FIN_FSCM_CCD_INTEGRATION)
(in the Accounts Receivable Accountiing sys tem)
Different from the information you can find under FSCM Functions (FIN_FSCM_CCD), activating business functionFSCM Integration
(FIN_FSCM_INTEGRATION) is not necessary if you activate the three above business functions.
If you only use the Enterprise Services and the Web interface for credit limit requests and you also have not connected FI-AR to your SAP Credit
Management, you do not need to activate business function FSCM Integration 2 (FIN_FSCM_CCD_INTEGRATION).
Features
This business function covers – in connection with business function FSCM Integration 2 – the following functions:
SAP Collections Management
Consideration of Head O ffice/Branch Office Relationships
If you have mapped head office/branch office relationships that exist at your customer in accounts receivable accounting, you can decide whether you want to
take them into consideration in the SAP Collections Management component. In addition to the existing option of creating worklist items for your collection
specialists for each head office, you can create them for each branch office as an alternative. You can distribute the processing of branch offices to several
collection specialists. This enables you to view and collect outstanding receivables for each branch office.
If you use the integration with application component SAP Dispute Management, you can create dispute cases for branch offices direct.
For more information, see Considering Head O ffice/Branch Office Relationships.
Master data synchronization for several FI systems
If you want to use a central SAP Collections Management system to collect receivables from several FI systems, then for the replication of customer master
data from several FI systems to the central system of SAP Collections Management you can use the connection of Unified Key Mapping Service to SAP
NetWeaver Process Integration (UKMS Connection to SAP NetWeaver PI).
Caution
Note
Note
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 123 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 124/148
This is also possible even if the number ranges of the customers from the relevant FI systems overlap, so that the customer numbers from a cross-system
view are not unique. In SAP Collections Management the system provides a unique number assignment when creating the business partner. For receivables
processing, it determines the correct assignment between the business partner and the customer in the corresponding FI system.
For more information, see:
Connection to SAP NetWeaver Process Integration
Configuration Guide for SAP Collections Management, which you can find at SAP Service Marketplace under http://service.sap.com/fscm
Security Guide for SAP Collections Management
SAP Credit Management
Work Center for the Cr edit Manager.
This portal-based interface supports the credit manager in carrying out his job. You can make the Work Center available to your employees either using SAP
NetWeaver Portal or SAP NetWeaver Business Client. It offers an overview of the blocked sales orders from Sales and Distribution (SD). The Credit Manager
also sees further information from the credit management data of the business partner. This enables him to decide whether to release or reject any particular
order. The work center also has views of the business partners that are blocked in SAP Credit Management, of business partners that are due for
resubmission, and of credit limit requests granted.
Web dynpro applications for the credit limit r equest
The Web dynpro ABAP-based applications for creating and changing credit limit requests offer an interface that the credit manager can call up from the Work
Center. A guided procedure takes you through the various steps for creating a credit limit request, and facilitates access even for occasional processors.
For more information, see:
Web dynpro applications for the credit limit request
Business Package for Credit Manager (SAP ERP) 1.4
Enterprise Services for Credit Limit Request
In the process component Credit Management are service operations for creating, changing, reading, and finding credit limit requests. Some of these service
operations are also used in the new Web interfaces for creating and changing credit limit requests.
For additional information, see the documentation for the Enterprise Services (ES) at the ES Workplace.
Master data synchronization for several FI systems
If you want to use a central SAP Credit Management for several FI or SD systems, then for the replication of customer master data from the FI or SD systems to
the central system of SAP Collections Managementand for synchronization, you can use the connection of Unified Key Mapping Service to SAP NetWeaver
Process Integration (UKMS Connection to SAP NetWeaver PI).
For more information, see:
Connection to SAP NetWeaver Process Integration
Configuration Guide for SAP Credit Management, which you can find at SAP Service Marketplace under http://service.sap.com/fscm
Security Guide for SAP Credit Management
SAP Dispute Management
Web dynpro applications for dis pute case processing
The Web dynpro ABAP-based appl ication for changing dispute cases features a streamlined user interface your employees can access either in SAP
NetWeaver Portal or SAP NetWeaver Business Client. While the regular user processes the dispute case using the existing complete interface, the Web
interface is mainly suitable for the occasional user. As it offers a less complex and streamlined interface with fewer functions, it simp lifies dispute case
processing for the user.
For more information, see:
Web dynpro app lications for dispute case processing
Business Package for Dispute Manager (SAP ERP) 1.4
Enterprise Services for Dispute Case Processing
In the process component Dispute Management are service operations for creating, changing, reading, and finding dispute cases. Some of these service
operations are also used in the new Web interfaces for changing dispute cases.
For additional information, see the documentation for the Enterprise Services (ES) at the ES Workplace.
Note
Note
Note
Note
Note
Note
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 124 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 125/148
FSCM Functions 3
Technical Data
Technical Name of Business Function FIN_FSCM_CCD_3
Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function
Available From SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 6.0
Technical Usage Strategic Enterprise Mgmt
Application Component SAP Collections Management
(FIN-FSCM-COL)
SAP Credit Management
(FIN-FSCM-CR)
SAP Dispute Management
(FIN-FSCM-DM)
Required Business Function FSCM Functions 2 (FIN_FSCM_CCD_2)
With this business function, you can use new functions in various application components of SAP Financial Supply Chain Management :
In SAP Collections Management, you can take into account that a business partner is managed in several collection segments or in several accounting
systems. Using this summary of the outstanding receivables, you can influence their priority in the worklists.
For receivables p rocess ing, you can c reate promises to pay with installments, send correspondence, and create notes at invoice or customer level.
You can now use SAP Credit Management without needing to install a separate server for using SAP NetWeaver Process Integration.
It is easier for you to navigate when forwarding a dispute case from SAP Dispute Management to an external application.
Prerequisites
You have installed the following components as of the version given:
Type of Component Component Required for the Following Features Only
Software Component FINBASIS 605
SEM_BW 605
In addition to both SAP Collections Management and SAP Dispute Management , you are using Accounts Receivable Accounting (FI-AR).
You have made the required settings in Customizing for all of the application components that you use. For additional information on specific Customizing for this
business function, see release note FIN_FSCM_CCD_3: Business Funct ion FSCM Functions 3 (New).
You have activated the following business functions in addition to this business function:
FSCM Functions 2 (FIN_FSCM_CCD_2)
FSCM Integration 3 (FIN_FSCM_CCD_INTEGRATION_3)
ERP, Integration with Claims and Funds Management (ERP_CF_INTEGRATION_1)You only need this business function for the SAP Dispute Management functions.
Improvements for SOA Reuse Functions
You only require this business function for WS-RM Support in SAP Credit Management .
Features
This business function covers the following functions:
Aggregation of business partners in SAP Collections Management
You can summarize the data of a business partner that is located in various collection segments. In this way, a collection specialist can gain an overview of all the
worklist items of this business partner. This still applies even if the items are in the worklists of different colleagues, or originate from several accounting systems.
The specialist is consequently better able to make a realistic assessment of the collection of receivables at a customer, and if necessary to centralise it.
For additional information about the individual functions that are available to the collection specialist in his worklist, see Processing Worklist Items.
Individual Functions for Receivables Process ing in SAP Collections Management
To respond to customers who wish to make payment but are experiencing financial bottlenecks, you can create and manage promises to pay also for installment
payments.
To facilitate your correspondence, you can send documents such as account statements, OI lis ts and individual letters during receivables processing. This also
applies to individual dunning notices. Once you have documented a customer contact, you can send the customer a summary by e-mail. You can create notes,
and decide whether you want to assign them to the customer or to an invoice. If you have customers with large numbers of invoices, or if several collection
spec ialists are involved, the ability to make specific assignments of notes makes further processing easier. You can also enter documents as an attachment at
various points, for example, to supplement a note or resubmission.
These functions are closely related to the FSCM Integration 3 bus iness function in the Accounts Receivable (FI-AR) system.
For more information, see:
Invoices (enhanced)
Promises to Pay (enhanced)
Create Promises to Pay (enhanced)
Updating Incoming Payments in Promises to Pay (enhanced)
Canceling Payments (enhanced)Evaluating Promises to Pay (enhanced)
Customer Contacts (enhanced)
Resubmissions (enhanced)
Notes (new)
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 125 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 126/148
Deletion of Notes (new)
WS-RM Support in SAP Credit Management
You can use SAP Credit Management without needing to install a separate server for using SAP NetWeaver Process Integration. This option is available not just
in a one system landscape but also if you are using central SAP Credit Management in a multiple system landscape, in which there is a separate system for
Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable (FI-CA) or several separate systems for Accounts Receivable Accounting (FI-AR). The messages are exchanged
using the Web Services Reliable Messaging (WS-RM) log that ensures both the transfer of messages and that they are received in the correct order. The use of
this technology enables simplified message exchange in particular for smaller companies with one or very few systems. The option of a point to point connection
for asynchronous enterprise services is available for the following operations:
http://sap.com/xi/FSCM/Global/CreditCommitmentNotification_In
http://sap.com/xi/PI/FIN/Operational/Global/CreditCommitmentNotification_Out
http://sap.com/xi/FICA/Global/CreditCommitmentNotification_Out
http://sap.com/xi/FSCM/Global/CreditPaymentBehaviourSummaryNotification_In
http://sap.com/xi/FICA/Global/CreditPaymentBehaviourSummaryNotification_Out
http://sap.com/xi/PI/FIN/Operational/Global/CreditPaymentBehaviourSummaryNotification_Out
http://sap.com/xi/FICA/Global/CreditWorthinessChangeInformation_In
http://sap.com/xi/FSCM/Global/CreditWorthinessChangeInformation_Out
http://sap.com/xi/FSCM/FICARatingReplicateQuery_In
http://sap.com/xi/FICA/FICARatingReplicateQuery_Out
http://sap.com/xi/FICA/FICARatingReplicateResponse_In
http://sap.com/xi/FSCM/FICARatingReplicateResponse_Out
It is not necessary to activate business function FSCM Integration 3 (FIN_FSCM_CCD_INTEGRATION_3) for this function.
Enterprise Services for SAP Credit Management
For integration with Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable (FI-CA), the following new service operation is available which you can use to request the data
for the payment behavior:
http://sap.com/xi/FSCM/Global2/CreditManagementAccountERPPaymentBehaviourSummaryByDebtorPartyQueryResponse_Out. For
additional information, see the documentation for the Enterprise Services (ES) at the ES Workplace.
Further, you can use the simplified transfer and display of the data for the payment behavior.
Credit Exposure Comparison in SAP Credit Management
You can compare the credit exposure between a sending system (FI-AR system, SD system) and the receiving system of SAP Credit Management , and
thereby recognize discrepancies early.
For more information, see:Documentation of program UKM_MASSDATA_RECONCILE. From the SAP Easy Access sc reen, choose Accounting Financial Supply Chain Management
Credit Management List Displays Reconciliation of Credit Exposure .
Monitoring of the Credit Exp osure (new)
Forwarding a Dispute Case from SAP Dispute Management to an External Application
To date it was only possible to transfer a dispute case to an external application using program UDM_PUBLISH_DISPUTE_CASES. There is now also a
pushbutton available in dispute case management. If the external application Claims Management in SAP Customer Relationship Management is active, you
can also navigate using a second pushbutton first to Claim Submission, and from there to Claim to process the claim.
FSCM IntegrationTechnical Data
Note
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 126 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 127/148
Technical Name of the Business Function FIN_FSCM_INTEGRATION
Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function
Available As O f SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP ERP 6.0
Technical Usage Financial Supply Chain Mgmt
Application Component ● SAP Bank Relationship Management
(FIN-FSCM-BNK)
● SAP Cash Management
(FIN-FSCM-CLM-CM)
● SAP Collections Management
(FIN-FSCM-COL)
● SAP Credit Management
(FIN-FSCM-CR)
● SAP Dispute Management
(FIN-FSCM-DM)
Directly Dependent Business Function Requiring Activation in
Addition
FSCM Functions (FIN_FSCM_CCD)
Note that you do not need this additional business function for all
subfunctions.
Use
You can use this business function to make use of new functions in the following components of SAP Financial Supply Chain Management:
● SAP Bank Relationship Management
This new component supports you in monitoring and releasing payment media in payment transactions with banks.
● SAP Cash Management
To simplify the daily work of the Cash Manager, he has the option of simplified user interfaces in the form of a work center.
● SAP Collections Management
In receivables processing, you can use the new function of SAP Dispute Management to add customer-disputed objects, such as invoices, to dispute
cases.
● SAP Credit Management
You can use enhancements, such as the work center for the credit manager.
● SAP Dispute Management
You can use brand new functions, such as the processing of customer-disputed objects. Customer-disputed objects are invoices, credit memos or
overpayments for which a customer has entered a complaint.
Prerequisites
You have installed the following components as of the version mentioned:
Type of Component Component Is Only Needed for the Following Features
Software Component ● FINBASIS 602
● SAP_APPL 602
● SEM_BW 602
SAP NetWeaver Business Intelligence (SAP
NetWeaver BI)
As of SAP NetWeaver 2004s Enhancements for SAP Collections Management.
You do not have to activate the business function.
Business Intelligence Content As of SAP NetWeaver 20 04s BI Content Add-O n 3
SP06
Enhancements for SAP Collections Management.
You do not have to activate the business function.
SAP NetWeaver Portal As of SAP NetWeaver 2004s● Work Center of the Cash Manager ● Work Center of the Credit Manager
Portal Content As of Business Package for Cash Manager (SAP
ERP) 1.2
Work Center of the Cash Manager
Portal Content As of Business Package for Credit Manager (SAP
ERP) 1.2
Work Center of the Credit Manager
SAP Enterprise Services As of SAP_APPL 602, namespace
http://sap.com/xi/APPL/Global2
Services of SAP Bank Relationship Management
SAP Enterprise Services As of SAP_APPL 602, namespace
http://sap.com/xi/PI/FIN/Operational/Global
Services for SAP Credit Management
Java Software Component SWIFT 602 as component of SAP Integration
Package for SWIFT
SAP Bank Relationship Management
To be able to use this business function, the following prerequisites must be met in the individual components:
SAP Bank Relationship Management
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 127 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 128/148
● You have configured the SAP Bank Relationship Management application component.
● You have configured the Payment Medium Workbench.
● You have activated the FSCM Integration (FIN_FSCM_INTEGRATION) business function.
● You have made the required settings in Customizing. For more information see the release note FIN_FSCM_INTEGRATION: Bank Relationship Management
(new).
SAP Cash Management
● You have configured the SAP Cash Management application component.
● You have activated the FSCM Integration (FIN_FSCM_INTEGRATION) business function.
SAP Collections Management
● You have configured the following appl ication components:
○ SAP Collections Management
○ Accounts Receivable Accounting (FI-AR)
● You have activated the FSCM Integration (FIN_FSCM_INTEGRATION) business function.
● You have activated the FSCM Functions (FIN_FSCM_CCD) business function in the Collections Management system
● You have made the necessary settings in Customizing for SAP Collections Management. For more information, see the release notes of the business
functions.
SAP Credit Management
● You have configured the following appl ication components:
○ SAP Credit Management
○ Accounts Receivable Accounting (FI-AR)
● To use the work center for the Credit Manager, you have activated this bus iness function FSCM Integration (FIN_FSCM_INTEGRATION).
● You have activated the FSCM Functions (FIN_FSCM_CCD) business function in the SAP Credit Management system
SAP Dispute Management
● You have configured the following appl ication components:
○ SAP Dispute Management
○ Accounts Receivable Accounting (FI-AR)
● You have activated the FSCM Integration (FIN_FSCM_INTEGRATION) business function.
● You have activated the FSCM Functions (FIN_FSCM_CCD) bus iness function in the dispute case processing system.
● You have made the necessary settings in Customizing for SAP Dispute Management. For more information, see the release notes of the business functions.
Features
This business function covers the following functions:
● SAP Bank Relationship Management
This new component supports you in payment transactions with your banks. For communication with the different interfaces of the banks, the component
provides a uniform user interface.
SAP Bank Relationship Management provides you with a workflow for the internal creation, processing, and release of payments. It also provides a
monitoring function for the status of the payments; the incoming account statements are also considered. To do this, SAP Bank Relationship Management
uses the exis ting Payment Medium Workbench and has a high integration with the payment programs of Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable
Accounting (FI-AP/AR).
For more information, see:
○ Documentation of the component SAP Bank Relationship Management
○ Component Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable Accounting (FI-AP/AR) under Payment Medium Workbench
○ Security guide on SAP Service Marketplace at service.sap.com/securityguide.
● SAP Cash Management
For more information for the work center of the Cash Manager, see Business Package for Cash Manager (SAP ERP) 1.2.
● SAP Collections Management
For more information, see the Documentation of the business function FSCM Functions(FIN-FSCM-CCD), "Features" section.
● SAP Credit Management
There is also a work center for SAP Credit Management. The work center for the Credit Manager is a portal-based interface that supports his daily work. It
offers an overview of the blocked sales orders from Sales and Distribution (SD). The Credit Manager also sees further information from the credit management
data of the business partner. This enables him to decide whether to release or reject any particular order. The work center also has views of the business
partners that are blocked in SAP Credit Management, of business partners that are due for resubmission, and of credit limit requests granted.
For more information about the work center, see:
○ Business Package for Credit Manager (SAP ERP) 1.2 (new)
○ Security guide on SAP Service Marketplace at service.sap.com/securityguide.
● SAP Dispute Management
For more information, see the Documentation of the business function FSCM Functions(FIN_FSCM_CCD), "Features" section.
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 128 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 129/148
FSCM Integration 2
Technical Data
Technical Name of Business Function FIN_FSCM_CCD_INTEGRATION
Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function
Available As O f SAP enhancement package 4 for SAP ERP 6.0
Technical Usage Financial Supply Chain Mgmt
Application Component SAP Collections Management (FIN-FSCM-COL)
SAP Credit Management (FIN-FSCM-CR)
SAP D ispute Management (FIN-FSCM-DM)
Directly Dependent Business Function Requiring Activation in
Addition
FSCM Functions 2 (FIN_FSCM_CCD_2)
FSCM Functions (FIN_FSCM_CCD)
This business function is closely linked with business function FSCM Functions 2 in the SAP Financial Supply Chain Management system. With these two
business functions, you can use functions that contribute to greater flexibility and transparency in the SAP Financial Supply Chain Management components.
To process dispute cases and credit limit requests, Enterprise Services (ES) and Web interfaces are available. If you use several FI systems and a central SAP
Collections Management or SAP Credit Management, then functions are available for replicating customer master data from these FI systems to the business
partner master data of the central system. For the collection of receivables, you can consider the head office/branch office relationships of your customers, and
create targeted worklists.
Prerequisites
You have installed the following components as of the version given:
Type of Component Component Is Needed Only for the Following Features
Software Component FINBASIS 604
SAP_APPL 604
SEM_BW 604
SAP NetWeaver Business Intelligence (SAP
NetWeaver BI)
As of SAP NetWeaver 7.00 Enhancements for the head office/branch office
relationships in SAP Collections Management*
Bus iness Intelli gence content As of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 B I Content Add-On 4 Enhancements for the head office/branch office
relationships in SAP Collections Management*
SAP NetWeaver Portal or SAP NetWeaver
Business Client
As of SAP NetWeaver 7.00 or as of SAP
NetWeaver Business Client for the Business Suite
Web application of SAP Credit Management
Web app lication of SAP Dispute Management
Portal Content Business Package for Credit Manager 1.41 Web application of SAP Credit Management
Portal Content Business Package for Dispute Manager 1.41 Web application of SAP Dispute Management
SAP Enterprise Services As of SAP NetWeaver 7.01, software component
version FINBASIS 604, namespace
http://sap.com/xi/FSCM/Global2
Web application of SAP Credit Management
Web app lication of SAP Dispute Management
SAP Enterprise Services when using SAP
NetWeaver Process Integration
As of SAP NetWeaver 7.00, software component
version FINBASIS 604, namespace
http://sap.com/xi/FSCM/Global2
Customer application for processing credit limit
requests
Customer application for dispute case
processing
SAP NetWeaver Process Integration (UKMS
connection to SAP NetWeaver PI)
You require the following versions:
SAP NetWeaver 7.01 or higher
SAP NetWeaver 7.11 or higher
Master data synchronization for connecting
several FI systems to SAP Collections
Management
Master data synchronization for connecting
several FI systems to SAP Credit Management
*Activating the business function is not required for BI content.
To use this business function, the following prerequisites also have to be met:
You have set up Accounts Receivable Accounting (FI-AR).
You have made the required settings in Customizing for all of the application components that you use. For additional information on specific Customizing for this
business function, see the related release note FIN_FSCM_CCD_INTEGRATION: Business Function FSCM Integration 2 (New)
(FSCM_604_INTEGRAT2_M).
You have activated the following business functions:
FSCM Integration 2 (FIN_FSCM_CCD_INTEGRATION)
(available bus iness function)
FSCM Functions 2 (FIN_FSCM_CCD_2)
(in the SAP Financial Supp ly Chain Management system)
FSCM Functions (FIN_FSCM_CCD)
(in the SAP Financial Supp ly Chain Management system)
Caution
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 129 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 130/148
Different from the information you can find under FSCM Functions (FIN_FSCM_CCD), activating business functionFSCM Integration
(FIN_FSCM_INTEGRATION) is not necessary if you activate the three above business functions.
If you only use the Enterprise Services and the Web interface for credit limit requests and you also have not connected FI-AR to your SAP Credit
Management, you do not need to activate business function FSCM Integration 2 (FIN_FSCM_CCD_INTEGRATION).
Features
For more information about the functions of this business function – in conjunction with business function FSCM Functions 2 – see FSCM Functions 2.
FSCM Integration 3
Technical Data
Technical Name of Business Function FIN_FSCM_CCD_INTEGRATION_3
Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function
Available From SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 6.0
Technical Usage Financial Supply Chain Mgmt
Application Component SAP Collections Management (FIN-FSCM-COL)
Required Business Function FSCM Integration 2 (FIN_FSCM_CCD_INTEGRATION)
FSCM Functions 3 (FIN_FSCM_CCD_3)
This business function is closely linked with bus iness function FSCM Functions 3 of the system in which SAP Collections Management is running. With these
two business functions, you can use the following functions for receivables processing:
Promises to pay with installments
Correspondence
Notes
PrerequisitesYou have installed the following components as of the version given:
Type of Component Component Required for the Following Features Only
Software Component FINBASIS 605
SAP_APPL 605
SEM_BW 605
In addition to SAP Collections Management , you are using Accounts Receivable Accounting (FI-AR).
You have made the required settings in Customizing for the application components that you are using. For additional information on specific Customizing for this
business function, see release note FIN_FSCM_CCD_3: Business Funct ion FSCM Functions 3 (New).
You have activated the following business functions in addition to this business function:
FSCM Integration 2
FSCM Functions 3 (in the system in which SAP Collections Management is running)
Features
For more information about the functions of this business function – in conjunction with business function FSCM Functions 3 – see FSCM Functions 3.
FSCM, Enablement for Financial Shared Services
Note
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 130 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 131/148
Technical Data
Technical Name of Business Function FIN_FSCM_SSC_AIC_1
Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function
Available as of SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 6.0
Technical Usage Strategic Enterprise Mgmt
Application Component SAP Collections Management (FIN-FSCM-COL)
SAP Dispute Management (FIN-FSCM-DM)
Required Business Function FSCM Functions 3 (FIN_FSCM_CCD_3)
FI, Enablement for Financial Shared Services (FIN_SSC_AIC_1)
Multifunctional Shared Service Interaction Center (CRM_SHSVC)
You can use this business function to use new functions for the integration of SAP Collections Management , SAP Dispute Management and Accounting
Interaction Center that run in SAP Customer Relationship Management (SAP CRM). This business function is, therefore, closely connected to the Multifunctional
Shared Service Interaction Center business function in the CRM system. In the Accounting Interaction Center , the following work centers are available that you
can use for processing Financial Shared Services in your company:
My worklist (Integration with SAP Collections Management )
All worklists (Integration with SAP Collections Management )
Receivables processing (Integration with SAP Collections Management )
Dispute case processing (Integration with SAP Dispute Management )
Prerequisites
You have installed the following components as of the version given:
Type of Component Component Is Needed Only for the Following Features
Software Component FINBASIS 605
SEM_BW 605
SAP Enterprise Services As of SAP Enhancement Package 1 for SAP
NetWeaver 7.0 , software component version
FINBASIS 604, namespace
http://sap.com/xi/FSCM/Global2
Web application of SAP Dispute Management
To use this business function, the following prerequisites also have to be met:
You are using the Accounting Interaction Center of SAP CRM in your company to implement Financial Shared Services. You are using at least SAP
Enhancement Package 1 for SAP CRM 7.0 for this.
In addition to both SAP Collections Management and SAP Dispute Management , you are using Accounts Receivable Accounting (FI-AR) in SAP ERP .
Software component FINBASIS is either in the same system as software component SAP_APPL or software component BBPCRM.
You have made the required settings in Customizing for all of the application components that you use. For additional information on specific Customizing for this
business function, see the related release note FIN_FSCM_SSC_AIC_1: Business Function FSCM, Enablement for FSS (New).
You have activated the following business functions:
FSCM, Enablement for Financial Shared Services (this business function)
FSCM Functions 3
FI, Enablement for Financial Shared Services (in the FI-AR sys tem)
Multifunctional Shared Service Interaction Center (in the CRM system)
For additional information on this business function, see the SAP Library for SAP CRM on SAP Help Portal under http://help.sap.com/crm SAP
CRM 7.0 for Enhancement Package 1 Application Help Business Functions (SAP Enhancement Package 1 for SAP CRM 7.0) Business Functions for
SAP Customer Relationship Management Multifunctional Shared Service Interaction Center .
Features
A user-friendly Web interface with integrated telephone is available to the AIC agent in the Accounting Interaction Center that supports him in the collection of
outstanding receivables and the resolution of dispute cases. He can easily navigate to the connected ERP systems, and access the required data.
For additional information about this business function – in connection with the Multifunctional Shared Service Interaction Center – see the SAP Library on SAP
Help Portal under http://help.sap.com/crm SAP CRM 7.0 for Enhancement Package 1 Application Help Interaction Center Interaction Center
WebClient Shared Services Framework Integration with SAP ERP .
FI, Enablement for Financial Shared Services
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 131 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 132/148
Technical Data
Technical Name of Business Function FIN_SSC_AIC_1
Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function
Available as of SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 6.0
Technical Usage Central Applications
Application Component Controlling (CO)
Financial Accounting (FI)
SAP Collections Management (FIN-FSCM-COL)
SAP D ispute Management (FIN-FSCM-DM)
Required Business Function FSCM Integration 3 (FIN_FSCM_CCD_INTEGRATION_3)
You can use the this business function to enable use of the Shared Services Framework functions, that are available cross-component in multiple SAP
applications.
In connection with SAP Enhancement Package 1 for SAP CRM 7.0, this business function in particular optimizes the setting up and operation of an Accounting
Interaction Center (AIC) that runs in SAP Customer Relationship Management (SAP CRM). It is therefore closely linked to the Multifunctional Shared Service
Interaction Center business function in the SAP CRM system.
Using this business function offers the following business advantages:
Reduced processing times for service requests and the resultant potential for savings
Integration of Financial Accounting (FI) and Controlling (CO) in the Shared Services Framework
AIC agents can process large numbers of service requests in the AIC user interface, due to direct access to business objects in ERP systems.
Reduction in the number of errors when processing service requests
Enhanced quality of service
With this business function, you can use the following functions in the Shared Services Framework:
Manual creation of service requests from an ERP system
Search for service requests from an ERP system
Start ERP transactions from the Interaction Center
Link ERP objects with service requests
Integration of SAP Collections Management with the Accounting Interaction Center
Integration of SAP Dispute Management with the Accounting Interaction Center
Irrespective of whether you use the Share Services Framework, this business function provides you with the option of connecting non-SAP systems and various
SAP systems to SAP Collections Management.
Prerequisites
You have installed the following components as of the version given:
Type of Component Component Is Needed Only for the Following Features
Software Component EA-APPL 605SAP_APPL 605
Software Component BBPCRM 701 Integration with the AIC
Software Component FINBASIS 605 * Integration of SAP Collections Management and
SAP Dispute Management with the AIC
Software Component FINBASIS 604 * Connection of non-SAP systems and various SAP
systems to SAP Collections Management
* Software component, in which SAP Collections Management and SAP Dispute Management run
You have set up the application components that you are using.
You have made the required settings in Customizing for all of the application components that you use. For additional information on specific Customizing for this
business function, see the related release note FIN_SSC_AIC_1: Business Function FI , Enablement for FSS (New) (FIN_605_AIC_1_M).
You have activated the following business functions in addition to this business function:
FSCM Integration 3 (FIN_FSCM_CCD_INTEGRATION_3)
Multifunctional Shared Service Interaction Center (CRM_SHSVC) in the system in which CRM runs.
You need this business function to integrate with the AIC. For additional information on this business function , see the SAP Library for SAP CRM on SAP
Help Portal under http://help.sap.com/crm SAP CRM 7.0 for Enhancement Package 1 Application Help Business Functions (SAP
Enhancement Package 1 for SAP CRM 7.0) Business Functions for SAP Customer Relationship Management Multifunctional Shared Service
Interaction Center .
FSCM, Enablement for Financial Shared Services (FIN_FSCM_SSC_AIC_1) in the system in which SAP Collections Management and SAP Dispute
Management run.
You require this business function if you use the integration of these two applications with the AIC.
The following prerequisites must be met for the users:
So that ERP users can create and find service requests from the ERP system, they must have a user with the same name in the CRM system, to which the
business role Occasional User (SSF_OCCUSER) is assigned.
So that AIC agents can call ERP transactions from the AIC and link ERP objects with service requests, they must have a user with the same name in the
ERP systems, to which the roles are assigned that authorize then to execute ERP transactions (transaction PFCG).
Features
Manual cr eation of service req uests from an ERP system
Service requests are used for quick reporting and resolution of problems and errors. Consequently, you can create a service request in the transactions for
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 132 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 133/148
Financial Accounting (FI) and Controlling (CO) direct, for example in the Change Vendor (FK02) or Display General Ledger Documents (FV53) transactions.
When you create a service request, the system opens it in the SAP CRM Interaction Center direct. It transfers contextual data, and gives you the option of
enclosing a screenshot. Moreover, you can link various ERP objects, for example, the vendor master record or the document.
The AIC agent in turn can later call up the linked objects by navigating direct from the service request to the ERP system.
Search for service r equests from an ERP system
In addition to the option of creating service requests direct from an ERP system, you can search for services requests. You can check their status and update the
service requests, without an AIC employee having to be active. You can choose whether you want to see only those service requests that have been created in
the ERP system in the UI of SAP CRM, or whether you want to see all of the service requests irrespective of where they were created.
Support for launching ERP transactions from the AIC
When you start an FI or CO transaction from the AIC, the ERP system calls a search screen, making it easier for the AIC agents to access the required data
records. The search screen already contains the data that is known from the account identification in the AIC (customer/vendor and company code).
Enhanced Generic O bject Services for linking ERP objects with service requests.
In many FI and CO transactions in the ERP system you can link individual business objects with a service request in the AIC, for example, the master data of a
customer or vendor, using Generic Object Services (GOS). AIC agents can use this link to start the transaction with the ERP object in the ERP system from a
service request.
Generic Object Services for linking ERP objects with service requests in the AIC are only available if an AIC agent has started the ERP transaction from the AIC,
and the account in the AIC has been identified and confirmed. If at the point when the ERP transaction was started from the AIC a service request had been
opened in the AIC, the system inserts the link in the business context of the service request. If no service request had been opened in the AIC, the system
inserts the link in the interaction records of the accounts currently confirmed in the AIC.
Fact Sheet for Customer and Vendor
The Accounting Interaction Center contains the account fact sheet that is used in financial scenarios as a support tool for communication with partners. It provides
context-related information about the communication partner, where the partner can be a customer or a vendor.
The fact sheet for the customer contains information about the special business context that ranges from purchasing volumes to the latest dispute cases for the
customer. The AIC agent is therefore able to access a complete picture of the current and past relationship with the communication partner in his daily work.
The fact sheet for the vendor contains data such as open invoices, payments, and master data. It assists the AIC agent in giving informed replies to inquiries from
the vendor.
Search for External Documents
The Accounting Interaction Center employee must be in a position to access information about the communication with the customer to date that is as complete as
possible. This includes documents that are stored in the optical archive.
The Find Document function of the CRM user interface gives the AIC agent the option of searching from one place for documents relevant to a business partner in
a series of back-end systems, and of displaying them if necessary.
Roles
Both accounting clerks from various SAP ERP applications and agents from the SAP CRM Interaction Center are involved in the Shared Services Framework
processes. All of those involved have to navigate between various SAP systems. Such navigation is supported by the following new roles:
Occasional User (SSF_OCCUSER)
This business role allows ERP users to create service requests from ERP systems, and to search for service requests.
Accounting IC Agent (IC_AIC_AGENT)
With this business role, agents in the AIC can process service requests from Financial Accounting and Controlling, execute the appropriate ERP transactions,
and link ERP objects with service requests.
AIC Manager (AIC_MANAGER)
AIC managers are IC managers who have the additional option of linking particular categories of service requests with particular categories of dispute cases.
Based on this, AIC managers can have particular dispute cases created automatically.
For additional information about this business function – in connection with the Multifunctional Shared Service Interaction Center – see the SAP Library on
SAP Help Portal under http://help.sap.com/crm SAP CRM 7.0 for Enhancement Package 1 Application Help Interaction Center Interaction
Center WebClient Shared Services Framework Integration with SAP ERP .
Connection of non-SAP systems and various SAP systems to SAP Collections Management
This function increases the range of accounting systems the data of which you can access with SAP Collections Management. You set up the connection with the
help of a substitute system that you connect to SAP Collections Management, and to which you transfer the required master and transaction data. In this way you
can centralize and standardize the processes for collecting open receivables, irrespective of the system architecture used in your company. In the standard
system, the sample loading procedureSAP_46C is available for an SAP system with Release SAP R/3 4.6C.
Without this business function you can only connect SAP systems where Accounts Receivable Accounting (FI-AR) has at least the status SAP R/3 Enterprise
4.70.
For more information, see:Connection of Non-SAP Systems and Various SAP Systems
Configuration Guide for SAP Collections Management, which you can find at SAP Service Marketplace under http://service.sap.com/fscm
Note
Note
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 133 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 134/148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 135/148
SAP Biller Direct Buy Side
Technical Data
Technical Name of Business Function FIN_FSCM_BD
Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function
Available as of SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP ERP 6.0
Technical Usage Biller Direct - FSCM
App lication Component SAP Biller Direct (FIN_FSCM_BD)
Directly Dependant Business Function Requiring Activation in Addition SAP Biller Direct (FIN_FSCM_BD)
Use
You can use this business function to enable your vendors, within SAP Biller Direct Buy Side, to upload bills via your portal, and then monitor the corresponding
account movements there.
Additional functions are available to the Web users of SAP Biller Direct.
Prerequisites
To be able to use the enhanced functions of SAP Biller Direct, you are using Accounts Receivable Accounting (FI-AR) or Contract Accounts Receivable and
Payable (FI-CA) in connection with an industry business solution.
To be ab le to use SAP Biller Direct Buy Side you are using Accounts Payable Accounting (FI-AP).
You activated the FIN_FSCM_BD (SAP Biller D irect) business function.
You have made the system settings as described in the Configuration Guide for SAP B iller Direct for FI-CA, SAP Biller Direct for FI-AR and SAP Biller
Direct Buy Side.
You have installed the following components as of the version mentioned:
Type of Component Component Is Needed Only for the Following Features
Software Component EA-APPL 602
SAP_APPL 602
Technical Component or Business Content As of SAP NetWeaver 7.0 BI Content Add-On 3
Support Package 06
Features
SAP Biller Direct Buy Side
The following functions are available to vendors within SAP Biller Direct Buy Side.
· Upload of bills i n XML format (optional) with attached documents in the portal
Depending on how you have configured accounts payable accounting (FI-AP) in the back-end system, the bills are either posted there direct or first parked.
· Disp lay of open bills in the portal
· Portal disp lay of payments made by the customer
SAP Biller Direct
You can connect SAP Biller D irect to various back-end systems and therefore display b ills from different SAP back -end systems to your Web users.
Moreover, as biller you can follow the behavior of your Web users in a monitoring cockpit in Business Intelligence (BI).
With SAP Biller Direct Web users can:
· Use a new layout with navigation tree on the left side of the screen in addition to the existing layout with navigation using tab pages and a header bar.
· Keep a clear overview by restricting the number of items shown in the Web appli cation under Open Items, Paid Bills , Payments and Credits.
· Make working with long lists easier, by filtering items on the tab pages O pen Items, Paid Bills, Payments and Credits us ing various selection parameters.
· Download other archived documents, such as exp ense reports, as a PDF from the optical archive, and not just bills .
· Display s tatus information, such as last logon, latest payments and latest master data change.
Biller Direct, Promise to Pay
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 135 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 136/148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 137/148
Type of Component Component Is Needed Only for the Following Features
Software Component SAP_APPL 605
BBPCRM 70 1
SAP_BS_FND 702
Features
Invoice Status
On the Open Bills page of the SAP Biller Direct Buy Side portal, there is a new column in the open invoices list which shows information on the status of each
invoice. The values displayed in this column are customizable and are based on the payment blocking status or posting status (posted, parked) of the FI
document concerned.
In addition, there is a new text field in the header area of the same page. This text field displays more general information on your accounts payable procedure and
is customizable per company code. A typical entry in this field could read 'We pay b ills on the last Thursday of each month'.
By displaying this information to vendors, you improve clarity and reduce the need for invoice-related inquiries.
Inquiries by Vendors
Vendors have two options for creating inquiries. In the first instance, on the Inquiries tab page of the SAP Biller Direct Buy Side portal, a vendor can create an
inquiry directly, without reference to a particular invoice. A customizable dropdown menu gives a list of predefined reasons for the inquiry. After assigning their
inquiry to one of these, the vendor can insert text in the Comment field and then send the inquiry. Once they have created an inquiry, a vendor can return to this
page to check the status of the inquiry over time, or to add additional comments.
A vendor can also create an invoice-related inquiry from the Open Bills tab page by selecting an invoice from the list of open bi lls and then click ing Create
Inquiry .
In both cases, the inquiry automatically initiates a service request in the CRM system, where it can be dealt with by an operative in your Shared Service Center.
Billing Consolidation Connector
Technical Data
Technical Name of Business Function FIN_FSCM_BCONS_CON
Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function
Available As O f SAP enhancement package 4 for SAP ERP 6.0
Technical Usage Central App lications
Application Component Billing Consolidation (FIN-FSCM-BC-CON)
Directly Dependent Business Function Requiring Activation in
Addition
Not relevant
You can use this business function to send outbound messages to SAP Billing Consolidation 2.0 , process inbound messages, and link messages received with
documents and IDoc files. Communication takes place using middleware such as SAP XI / PI or Transfer Client .
Integration
The processes Post Goods Receipt , Create Delivery and Create Billing Document are also involved in the business process.
Prerequisites
You have installed the following components as of the version given:
Type of Component Component Is Needed Only for the Following Features
Software Component SAP_APPL
SAP Enterprise Services As of software component version SAP_APPL
604, Namensraum http://sap.com/xi/APPL/EDX
JAVA software component SAP Java Crpyto Toolkit (J2EE Engine as of
Release 6.30)
To use this business function, the following prerequisites also have to be met:
You have activated the business function.
The necessary certificates have been installed.
The CRL is current.
The connections to the archive and middleware work.
You have made the following Customizing settings for Billing Consolidation Connector .
You have entered all of the partners involved in the business process in the master data.
You have defined the basic settings.
You have defined all inbound and outbound object types.
You have defined the partner profiles.
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 137 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 138/148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 139/148
clearing accounts, and table FDSR2 for the planning groups.) These totals record tables are then filled as part of the data regeneration.
See the notes in the documentation for the imp lementation tool. To do this, choose Help Application Help .
You can also use program RFFDFT604. However, we only recommend this for company codes relevant to Cash Management for which no settings were
made under Determine Account Assignments and Document Splitting. This is because the program only transfers the data from the old totals records
tables to the new ones, and the fields for the new account assignnments are not filled.
Distributed SAP Cash ManagementIf you are using distributed Cash Management (TR-CM link), all the systems need to be transferred to the central Treasury and Risk Management system.
Features
You can then assign the new account assignments when you create payment advice notes and noted items by choosing Cash Management Incomings
Memo Record Create (transaction FF63) and Extras Addtional Account Ass ignments.
The account assignments are not transferred to Cash Management from all the applications. The account assignments segment and profit center are not
transferred for purchase orders and purchase requisitions, for example.
Make sure that any account assignments not relevant to SAP Cash Management are not set as required entries in the planning type field status
definition, since the fields would not be displayed. To check this, choose Cash Management Structuring Manual Planning Define Planning Types
.
Update to SAP Cash Management
The totals records are now stored in the new totals record tables. All the account assignments not relevant to Cash Management are deleted.
Document Splitting
If you are using New General Ledger Accounting and have activated document splitting, you can also specify for the relevant account assignments that
document spl itting should be included in SAP Cash Management.
This means that when the Financial Accounting documents are updated to Cash Management, the document data is written to the totals records tables (FDSB2
and FDSR2) and the adjustment items from document splitting are copied to table FDSP. The adjustment items explain the additional entries in both totals
records tables .
Document splitting is used to split a document of EUR 100.00 into the segments SG1 EUR 70.00 and SG2 EUR 30.00. The following entries are made in
the tables:
Table Segment Planned Amount (FDWBT)
1 BSEG 100,00
Table View (Field CMVIEW) Segment Planned Amount (FDWBT)
2 FDSB2 Space = Entry View 100,00
3 FDSB2 1= Reset Entry View 100,00–
4 FDSB2 2 = Document Splitting
View (General Ledger View)
SG1 70,00
5 FDSB2 2 = Document Splitting
View (General Ledger View)
SG2 30,00
6 FDSP 1 = Reset Entry View 100,00–
7 FDSP 2 = Document Splitting
View (General Ledger View)
SG1 70,00
8 FDSP 2 = Document Splitting
View (General Ledger View)
SG2 30,00
1. The FI line item is posted in FI with an amount of EUR 100 .00.
2. The Cash Management totals record is updated.
3. When the document sp litting is updated, the totals record is reset from 2.
4. The first totals record is based on the document sp litting.
5. The second totals record is based on the document splitting.
6. Cash Managment adjustment items for 3:
7. Cash Managment adjustment items for 4:
8. Cash Managment adjustment items for 5:
The accumulated CM adjustment items must be zero or approximately zero when rounded.
The new Entry View parameter is now available for the cash position and liquidity forecast. If the parameter is set, the system displays the Cash
Management update without document splitting. This means that the only lines read from the totals record tables are those that are empty (space = entry
view) in the field view CMVIEW.
For open item accounts, the entries in table FDSP are deleted during clearing. If the bank accounts do not have open items, the entries are deleted when
you execute the IMG activity Reorganize Cash Management under Cash Management Tools .
See also: Account Assignments and Document Splitting
Note
Note
Example
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 139 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 140/148
In-House Cash Module Enhancements
Technical Data
Technical Name of Business Function FIN_INHOUSE_CASH_1
Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function
Available As O f SAP Enhancement Package 5 for SAP ERP 6.0
Technical Usage Financial Services
Application Component EA-FINSERV
Directly Dependent Business Function Requiring Activation in
Addition
Not relevant
With this business function, you can use various new functions in SAP In-House Cash to manage payments and streamline payment processing among
subs idiaries and with external partners. As well as imp roving your credit position, SAP In-House Cash enables you to maximize your interest accrual and c ash
surplus. You also get an overall view of subsidiary and group transactions and can minimize exposure during cash crunches, reduce processing times, and keep
bank transfer and transaction costs to a minimum.
Prerequisites
You have installed the following components as of the version mentioned:Type of Component Component Is Needed Only for the Following Features
Software Component EA-FINSERV 605
SAP_APPL 605
Features
A feature for cash concentration reference enables you to maintain a reference between the bank customer account (BCA) payment orders and the In-House
Cash payment orders. When the cash concentration run takes place, two payment orders are created - one from the BCA and another from In-House Cash.
These payment orders are now linked and the details are available in the logs of the In-House Cash payment order.
A feature for payment order reversal is available. With this feature, you can reverse payment orders for both cross b ank and external payments. On reversing
a cross bank payment order, the reversal of the generated payment order takes place. On reversing an external payment order, if the generated payment
request is cleared then the clearing document and the payment request is also reversed. There is a provision available which lets you enter the reason for
reversing the payment request and, if available, the clearing document.
You can unblock and post payment orders in bulk. The final posting of the payment order occurs only when confirmation is received from the external bank. The
addition of a dual control checkbox enables you to control the dual control setting when the In-House Cash account limit is exceeded.
A feature for unblocking and posting payment orders is available. With this feature, the final posting of a payment order happens only after a confirmation on the
clearing is received from the external bank. Payment orders are posted provisionally until an accepted items message is received from the bank, indicating
that the payment has been debited. On receiving the bank statement from the external bank, it is uploaded to determine if the payment for the corresponding
payment order is cleared. If it has been cleared, the particular payment is selected and unblocked so that it can be finally posted.
A dual control check feature is available. A flag (no dual) is used to prevent the payment order from going into dual control mode automatically when the account
limit exceeds. If the flag is checked, the payment order would fail to post and would not go to into dual control. If the flag is not checked, the payment order would
go to into dual control when the account limit exceeds.
SAP Treasury and Risk Management
The following business functions are available in the SAP Treasury and Risk Management area:
TRM: Hedge Accounting, New Financial Instruments, New Key Figures (FIN_TRM_LR_FI_AN)
TRM, Hedge and Exposure Management, New Financial Instrument (FIN_TRM_LR_FI_AN_2)
TRM, New Instruments, Enhancements Accounting, Reporting (FIN_TRM_LR_FI_AN_3)
TM: Integration in Funds Management (FIN_TRM_PSM_INTEGRATION)
Correspondence Framework
TRM, Correspondence Framework (FIN_TRM_CORR_FW)
TRM, Correspondence Framework 2 (FIN_TRM_CORR_FW_2)
Hedge Accounting for Positions (P-HA)
TRM, Hedge Accounting for Positions (FIN_TRM_INS_HM)
TRM, Hedge Accounting for Positions 2, Additional Scenarios (FIN_TRM_INS_HM_2)
TRM, Financial Risk Management for Commodities (FIN_TRM_COMM_RM)
TRM, Central Counterparty Clearing (Reversible) (FIN_TRM_CCC)
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 140 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 141/148
TRM: Hedge Accounting, New Financial Instruments, New KeyFigures
Technical Data
Technical Name of Business Function FIN_TRM_LR_FI_AN
Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function
Available As O f SAP enhancement package 3 for SAP ERP 6.0
Technical Usage Financial Services
Application Component Treasury and Risk Management (FIN-FSCM-TRM)
Directly Dependent Business Function Requiring Activation in
Addition
Financial Services (EA-FS)
With this business function, you can use various new functions in SAP Treasury and Risk Management (FIN-FSCM-TRM).
In the Hedge Accounting for Exposures area, the processes for saving and archiving logs for the effectiveness assessments as well as the hedging relationship
documentation have been enhanced. These developments make the process flows more transparent and support auditors with the audit trail.
The new commodities product group has been set up, which, together with the Triple Point front office system, can be used to link the physical side and paper
deal side of a commodity futures transaction. The integration with the analyzers enables you to run mark-to-market analyses as well as sensitivity analyses for the
commodity paper deals.
You can map the entire life cycle of listed options (normal style) and calculate their net present values using the Market Risk Analyzer .
In the case of money market transactions, you can enter and amortize premiums and discounts.
The determination of relative limits enables you to monitor and adhere to internal as well as external investment guidelines that may be required by insurance
controls.
You can calculate the key figure modified duration and the yield to maturity (actual rate of return) in one portfolio, which enables you to analyze interest
sensitivity.
The Portfolio Analyzer helps you determine your portfolio risk; the Sharpe ratio and Jensen's alpha help you better assess the quality of your portfolio yield that is
calculated for benchmarking purposes.
New accounting functions help you post intragroup transactions and impairments, and simplify your closing operations.
Prerequisites
You have installed the following components as of the version given:
Type of Component Component Is Needed Only for the Following Features
Software Component EA-FINSERV 603
SAP_APPL 603
Business Intelligence content SAP NetWeaver 7.0 BI Content Add-On 3 SP08 Only required if you want to use the BI Content
delivered with this b usiness function in SAP
Business Information Warehouse (BW).
You have activated the enterprise extension Financial Services (EA-FS).
You have activated the enterprise business function TRM: Hedge Accounting, New Financial Instruments, New Key Figures (FIN_TRM_LR_FI_AN).
If you are using the Transaction Manager and have activated the business function, you then need to make the necessary conversion steps in Customizing for
the Transaction Manager. To do this, choose Treasury and Risk Management Transaction Manager General Settings Tools Conversion Programs .
See also: For more information, see the release information FIN_TRM_LR_FI_AN: Required and Optional Migration Steps .
For information on activating the individual functions in Customizing, see the release information FIN_TRM_LR_FI_AN: TRM: Hedge Accounting, New Financial
Products, New Key Figures (New) and FIN_TRM_LR_FI_AN:Changes in the Structure of the IMG for TRM .
Features
Enhancements in Hedge Accounting for Exposures
To improve the transparency of the process flows in the Hedge Accounting for Exposures area, you can save effectiveness test logs in the database.
You can utilize your memory resources by archiving the logs.
To hedge a net investment for a foreign subsidiary, you can now also specify a money market transaction as a hedging instrument.
You can now also assign financial transactions to existing exposures.
Two fields added to the hedge plan (Grouping and Program) enable you to group hedging relationships to suit your requirements.
New Instruments
You can map the following commodity paper deals:
Commodity futures
Options on commodity futures
Commodity forwards
The system supports processing the financial transactions in the back office from the posting stage, to margin management, through to calculating the net
present values in the Market Risk Analyzer . The Analyzer can also execute mark-to market analyses and sensitivity analyses (VaR) for commodities.
Functions available for analyzing commodity paper deals include the net present value analysis (JBRX), key figure analysis (AISGENKF), and single value
analysis (profit and loss) (AISPL).
The agreement with Triple Point, providing a front office system, enables you to link the physical side and paper deal side of a commodity futures transaction.
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 141 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 142/148
You can map the entire life cycle of listed options (normal style). You can use the Exercise Rights function to map the exercise with delivery , exercise with
cash settlement, or the expiration for the following option categories:
Options on stocks
Options on bonds
Options on securities indexes
You can also calculate the net present values of these option categories using the Market Risk Analyzer .
When you enter a money market transaction (fixed-term deposit, cash flow transaction, interest rate instrument, Commercial Paper), you can now also use the
Nominal Amount field. The system uses the difference between the nominal amount and payment amount to generate a premium flow or discount flow. These
premium and discount flows can be amortized. This enables you to easily map loans issued to subsidiary companies that have not been completely
disbursed, for example. The system then posts the correct amortization amount automatically.
Enhanced Limit Reporting
Enhanced limit reporting in the Portfolio Analyzer enables you to define and monitor relative limits at portfolio level. This means that you can monitor and adhere to
internal as well as external investment guidelines that may be required by insurance controls.
Within the enhanced limit reporting function, you can navigate to individual transactions. You can check the book values and net present values of individual
transactions and also check limit utilization and limit rates on certain key dates. It is also possible to perform a comparative limit analysis in two portfolios. The
results database is used to calculate and save the data.
New Key Figures
In the Market Risk Analyzer, you can use the key figure analysis (AISGENKF) and results database (AFWKF_RA), (the results of which you can view using
the Analyzer Information System), to calculate in a portfolio the new key figures modified duration and yield to maturity (actual rate of return) for interest-bearing
instruments.
The Portfolio Analyzer helps you determine your portfolio risk by using the following new key figures to help you better calculate the quality of your portfolio yield
for benchmarking p urposes:Sharpe ratio
Jensen's alpha
Treynor ratio
Tracking errors
Information ratio
Sortino ratio
The key figures are calculated with the function Determination of Risk-Adjusted Measures (PAEPBM_RATIO).
New Accounting Functions for Financial Transactions and Positions
Intragroup trading
You can use this new function to view intragroup transactions in the system for financial transactions with the following product categories:
Stocks (010)
Investment certificates (020)
Bonds (040)
Bond with installment repayment (042)
Investment (160)
To ensure that the overall group result is not affected by intragroup transactions, you need to remove the intragroup transactions from the consolidated accounts.
The Edit Intragroup Transactions function clears profits and losses from the sales by generating clearing flows for the intragroup purchases according to the
profits or losses in the corresponding intragroup sale.
Enhancements Impairments
You can post impairments either with or without the reset function.
You can also record an impairment in foreign currency.
When you post impairment, you can choose to reset the foreign exchange results recorded during the OCI (equity) valuation.
You can convert the security impairment using either the foreign market exchange rate or the book exchange rate.
You can amortize an existing impairment.
In the function Market Values for Special Security Valuation you can now also enter an amount for the net present value in valuation currency.
Enhancements made to the foreign currency valuation of available for sale positions.
You can value monetary items of Available for ale (AfS) positions in a foreign currency so that currency translation differences resulting from changes in
amortized costs can be posted to the profit and loss account.
Other changes to the book value are entered in equity.
More Information
In the main release information FIN_TRM_LR_FI_AN: Hedge Accounting, New Financial P roducts, New Key Figures and in the detailed release notes, you can
refer to a list of the new and changed functions. For more information on the individual functions, see the SAP Library under SAP ERP Central Component
Accounting SAP Financial Supply Chain Management (FIN-FSCM) SAP Treasury and Risk Management (TRM) .
TRM, Hedge and Exposure Management, New Financial Product
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 142 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 143/148
Technical Data
Technical name of business function FIN_TRM_LR_FI_AN_2
Type of business function Enterprise business function
Available as of SAP enhancement package 4 for SAP ERP 6.0
Technical Usage Financial Services
Application Component SAP Treasury and Risk Management (FIN-FSCM-TRM)
Directly Dependent Business Function Requiring Activation in
Addition
Financial Services (EA-FS)
TRM: Hedge Accounting, New Financial Instruments, New Key Figures
(FIN_TRM_LR_FI_AN)
With this business function, you can use various new functions in SAP Treasury and Risk Management. New Exposure Management 2.0 enables you to manage
exposure items for both open commodity items and open currency items. In Hedge Accounting for Exposures, you can map the hedging of commodity p rice risks
using the corresponding hedging transactions in the Transaction Manager.
The complete integration with the analyzers enables you to run analyses for both net present value and value at risk for the exposure positions. To meet the
requirements for the hedging relationship effectiveness tests, in accordance with the accounting princip les IAS39 and FAS133 , you can now run retrospective
and prospective effectiveness tests in Hedge Accounting based on linear regression analyses for exposures, hedged items, and hedging instruments.
You can also use the new product category forward securities transaction, which has been fully integrated in the position management and accounting areas of
the Transaction Manager.
Integration
You can use forward securities transactions provided with this business function in Hedge Accounting for Positions as a hedging instrument to hedge market
price risks. Hedge Accounting for Positions is provided with the delivered bus iness function TRM, Hedge Accounting for Positions.
Prerequisites
You have installed the following components as of the version given:
Type of Component Component Is Needed Only for the Following Features
Software Component EA-FINSERV 604
SAP_APPL 604
You have activated the following business functions:
Financial Services (EA-FS)
TRM: Hedge Accounting, New Financial Instruments, New Key Figures (FIN_TRM_LR_FI_AN)
TRM, Hedge and Exposure Management, SWIFT (FIN_TRM_LR_FI_AN_2)
(available bus iness function)
For information on activating the individual functions in Customizing, see the release note FIN_TRM_LR_FI_AN_2: TRM, Hedge and Exposure Management,
SWIFT (new) and FIN_TRM_LR_FI_AN_2: Exposure Management 2.0 (New).
Features
Hedge and Exposure Management
In the new Exposure Management 2.0 area, you can create currency and commodity positions on which both Hedge Accounting for Exposures and the
analyzers are based. Open commodity items in Exposure Management can be hedged in Hedge Accounting for Exposures using commodity futures
transactions (commodity futures, options on commodity futures, and commodity forwards) from the Transaction Manager. For the operative exposure items,
you can run analyses for net present value and value at risk in the Market Risk Analyzer .
You can use the regression analysis to run retrospective and prospective effectiveness tests for exposures, hedged items, and hedging instruments. To test
hedging effectiveness, you can calculate the following parameters:
Gradient of the regression lines
Axis intercept of the regression lines
Coefficient of determination R²
t-Test
F-Test
The life cycle of forward securities transactions, comprising rollover, advance maturity, dividend adjustment, cash settlement, or physical delivery, can b e
continually mapped in the Transaction Manager, and integrated in position management, accounting, and risk management. You can map forward securities
transactions to the following product categories:
Stocks (010)
Investment certificates (020)
Bonds (040)
Investment (160)
To fulfill the P-GAAP requirements for group accounting involving an investment of over 50% in a company, the new position components Value Adjustment of
Gains1025, Value Adjustment of Losses,1026 and Original Value Adjustment 1027 have been integrated into position management.
To meet the disclosure requirements for financial instruments in accordance with IFRS 7 (as of 1/1/2007), you receive reports that take into account all the
financial transactions and objects in SAP Treasury and Risk Management and the exposure items. These are then evaluated with regard to the market risk.
See also: IFRS 7 – Reporting
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 143 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 144/148
TRM, New Instruments, Accounting Enhancements, Reporting
Technical Data
Technical Name of Business Function FIN_TRM_LR_FI_AN_3
Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function
Available As O f SAP enhancement package 5 for SAP ERP 6.0
Technical Usage Financial Services
Application Component SAP Treasury and Risk Management (FIN-FSCM-TRM)
Directly Dependent Business Function Requiring Activation in
Addition
TRM, Hedge and Exposure Management, New Financial Product
(FIN_TRM_LR_FI_AN_2)
With this business function you can use new functionality within the SAP Treasury and Risk Management which improves efficiency and fulfills legal
requirements in the area of position management and accounting including enhancements in reporting and straight-through processing.
You can map the entire life cycle of the new financial instruments forward loan purchase, fiduciary deposit and total return swap from start to end, icluding master
data management, valuation, postings and position management and calculate their net present values using the Market Risk Analyzer .
Prerequisites
You have installed the following components as of the version mentioned:
Type of Component Component Is Needed Only for the Following Features
Software Component EA-FINSERV 605SAP_APPL 605
You have activated the following business functions:
Financial Services (EA-FS)
TRM: Hedge Accounting, New Financial Instruments, New Key Figures (FIN_TRM_LR_FI_AN)
TRM, Hedge and Exposure Management, New Financial Product (FIN_TRM_LR_FI_AN_2)
TRM, New Instruments, Accounting Enhancements, Reporting (FIN_TRM_LR_FI_AN_3)
(available bus iness function)
For information on activating the individual functions in Customizing, see the release note FIN_TRM_LR_FI_AN_3: New Instruments, Accounting
Enhancements, Reporting (new).
Features
This business function covers the following functions:
New Financial Instruments
Management of the financial instruments forward loan purchase, fiduciary deposit and total return swap) from start to end within SAPTreasury and Risk
Management, including master data, valuation, postings, and position management.
Fiduciary Deposit (new product type 570 Fiduciary Deposit)
Fiduciary deposits are equivalent to asset swaps, in that they behave like a credit portfolio with an interest rate swap. The credit portfolio (the pool of assets) is
chosen by the depositor, who bears all its credit risk.
Forward Loan Purchase (new product type 790 Forward Loans)
A forward loan purchase is an agreement between two counterparties to enter into a loan contract. The loan is not paid out directly after the agreement but at a
later point in time. All the loan ingredients are fixed at the contract closure. Processing related to the new feature begins in Loans Management and continues in
the Transaction Manager of SAP Treasury and Risk Management (TRM). The approach is to build up the derivative (forward contract) in the TRM application
and reuse many functions of the product category 740. The loans contract is built up in the Loans Management module using existing functions.
Total Return Swap (new product type 640 Total Return Swap)
With this financial instrument, you can swap the total return of a single asset in exchange for periodic cash flows, or you can swap periodic cash flows for the
total return of a single asset. The periodic cash flow is typically a floating rate, such as LIBOR +/- a basis point spread, and a guarantee against any capital
losses. With a total return swap, the total return (cash flows plus capital appreciation or depreciation) is exchanged, and not just the cash flows. This newfinancial instrument allows the counterparties to swap the total return (cash flows plus capital appreciation or depreciation) of an asset or basket of assets in
exchange for periodic cash flows.
Accounting Enhancements
Enhancements in Single Position Management
You can use the portfolio as a new differentiation criterion for single position management.
You can use HIFO/LOFO as new consumption sequence procedure.
With HIFO (highest in, first out), the position that is sold is the one that has highest acquisition value.
With LOFO (lowest in, first out) the position that is sold is the one that has lowest acquisition value.
You can avail of different consumption sequences procedures depending on the business transaction category.
Manual Posting C onsiders Differentiation Criteria
The manual posting function (transaction FWBS) is able to post in securities account management indicating the differentiation criteria that is used for position
differentiation.
Derivation of Additional Account Assignments
During the consolidation process subassignments for certain group financial statement items are required. The subassignments must be delivered at the
posting point in the general ledger. On behalf of the new derivation tool you can fill the following target fields in the FI document with values:
Business Area
Trading partner's business area
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 144 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 145/148
Partner Profit Center
Profit Center
Partner Segment for Segmental Reporting
Segment for Segmental Reporting
Movement Type (Inventory Management)
Company ID of trading partner
Reference key for line item
This derivation tool is called when documents are being posted to FI. During posting the target fields mentioned above will get updated in the FI document
according to the defined derivation steps.
Year End Valuation with Reset FlowsFor year end valuation you now can opt to have it reset afterwards.
Retrospective SAC Amortization Method for MBS according to FASB91
This method is based on the cash flows with estimated prepayments embedded in those cash flows. Using the actual prepayments from the date of acquisition
to the reporting date and the expected future prepayments from the reporting date onward, a new effective yield is calculated from the date of acquisition. The
amortized acquisition value is adjusted to the amount that would have existed had the new effective yield been applied since acquisition. The difference
between the new amortized acquisition value and the actual amortized acquisition value is debited or credited to interest income.
Separating Posting and Paying
Simplifies and enhances the process of payments in SAP Treasury and Risk Management by enabling payments without posting the deal. It is possible to
post a flow without paying and vice versa. By separating the payment step from the posting step, you can initiate the payment first and the posting later,
enabling you to make urgent payments from financial transactions. When you want to see only the flows which are paid, you can use the new payment journal
(transaction TPM20A).
Rounding Rule for Currency Translation at Valuation
You can choose to round down the valuation amount in valuation currency after currency translation.
You can choose between the book rate and the market rate for the conversion of the amortization amount into valuation currency.
Special security valuation is now also possible for one step valuation procedures
Enhancements for Process Optimization
Additional Tab Pages in C lass Data
Two additional tab pages in class data (transaction FWZZ) are available:
One tab page has been p redefined by SAP and you can cus tomize the names and values of the available fields.
The other tab page can be created by using the BAdI: Additional Tab Page in Class Data(TPM_SEC_CUST_DATA).
New Authorization Check for Security Price Maintenance
The new check is based on the price types. This allows independent companies in one client, to share common market data with separate price types at the
same time.
Enhancement in End-of-Day Process ing
Within the Credit Risk Analyzer it is now possible to run the End-of-Day Processing (transaction KLNACHT) per company code.
Archiving Raw Exposures and Exposure Positions
Within Exposure Management 2.0 you can archive raw exp osures and exposure positions.
Enhancements in the Transaction Management
Flexible Conversion of Foreign Exchange Rates within the Transaction Management
You can use the rate type for currency conversion to local currency defined for the company code also in financial transactions, in case you don't want to use
the exhange rate type M for currency translation within the financial transactions.
Variable Rate/Price Calculation
The functions for variable interest calculation (transactions TI10, TI11, TI12, TI37, TJ05, TJ05_REV, TJ09) have been changed. Now you can adjust interest
rates and also security prices. The structure nodes are renamed to Variable Rate/Price Calculation.
New Business Application Progr amming Interface (BAPI) for Security Lending (BUS5770)
You can use this BAPI to create, change, reverse, rollover and give notice security lending transactions. You also can use the functions Get Detail and Prepare
Change Structure.
Reporting Enhancements
FAS 157 Reporting
FAS157 reports is compliance reporting of fair values of financial instruments. The report displays the fair values of financial instruments and the system is
able to classify the instruments in 3 levels.Accounting Analyzer
Positions and subpositions are now integrated as financial objects in the Risk Analyzer. Within the new Accounting Analyzer you can report the position
components of financal transactions and positions based on a specific granularity (portfolio hierarchy) with regard to Market Risk Analyzer and accounting key
figures. This is possible for all instruments in the area of securities.
Clearing Threshold Reporting (CTR)
Example
Examples can be found in the test case descriptions of the business function. Call transaction Switch Framework Customizing (SFW5) and then call the test
catalog with the same name for this business function TRM, New Instruments, Accounting Enhancements, Reporting (FIN_TRM_LR_FI_AN_3).
More Information
For more information, see release note FIN_TRM_LR_FI_AN_3: TRM, New Inst ruments, Accounting Enhancements, Reporting (New).
For more informationen, see the SAP Library under SAP ERP Central Component Accounting SAP Financial Supply Chain Management (FIN-FSCM)SAP Treasury and Risk Management (TRM) .
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 145 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 146/148
TM: Integration in Funds Management
Technical Data
Technical name of business function FIN_TRM_PSM_INTEGRATION
Type of business function Enterprise business function
Available as of Enhancement package 4 for SAP ERP 6.0
Technical Usage Financial Services
Application Component FIN-FSCM-TRM
Directly Dependent Business Function Requiring Activation in
Addition
Public Sector (EA-PS)
TRM: Hedge Accounting, New Financial Instruments, New Key Figures
(FIN_TRM_LR_FI_AN)
This business function enables you to seamlessly integrate financial transactions and positions from the Transaction Manager (FIN-FSCM-TRM-TM) into SAP
Public Sector Management (PSM). Financial transactions and positions can be assigned to funds and grants. When making postings to accounting, the fund and
grant data is also transferred to correctly reflect the investments on the financial statements at fund and grant level. The positions can be managed at the level of
the fund and grant so that condition-based flows, such as interest payments, can be automatically assigned to the corresponding funds and grants. The funds
transfer function enables you to change the investment relationship of various funds and grants to positions, without using external payment flows.
You can now also easily manage investments from investment pool participants in investment pools. The system supports the purchase and sale of pool
certificates as well as the issue of certificates by the investment pool.
Prerequisites
You have installed the following components as of the version given:
Type of Component Component Is Needed Only for the Following Features
Software Component EA-FINSERV 604
You have activated the following business functions:
Financial Services (EA-FS)
Public Sector (EA-PS)
TRM: Hedge Accounting, New Financial Instruments, New Key Figures (FIN_TRM_LR_FI_AN)
TM, Integration in Funds Management (FIN_TRM_PSM_INTEGRATION)
(available bus iness function)
You need to use SAP Public Sector Management (PSM). You need to make all the necessary settings for Public Sector Management and activate Funds
Managment (PSM-FM). To do this, in Customizing, choose Public Sector Management Funds Management Government Basic Settings Activate Global
Functions for Funds Management (PSM-FM) . You also need to activate the account assignment elements Fund and Grant . To do this, in Customizing for
Public Sector Management and choose General Settings for Public Sector Management Basic Settings: Account Assignment Elements Activate
Account Assignment Elements .
If you have not previously used the Transaction Manager, you need to make the required settings in Customizing for the Transaction Manager.
Required and Optional Migration Steps.
If you are currently using the Transaction Manager, you need to execute the required and optional conversion steps by choosing General Settings Tools
Conversion Progams . Here you set the corresponding migration category and conversion programs.
To enable the Transaction Manager to differentiate between the fund and grant positions, you need to make the following settings in Customizing for the
Transaction Manager:
Choose General Settings Accounting Settings for Pos ition Management Define and Assign Differentiations . You can then create differentiations
with the account assignment elements Fund and Grant as differentiation terms and assign them to positions.
You need to have made the necessary settings in the activities under Define Update Types and Assign Usages and Assign Update Types for Funds
Transfer by choosing General Settings Accounting Funds Transfer .
Choose Transaction Manager Securities Transaction Management Special Functions: Public Sector to Assign Transaction Types for Investment
Pool Participants and use the BAdI: Investment Pool Participant Transactions .
Features
When you create financial transactions, you can now assign one or more funds or grants.
Funds Transfer
For the majority of product types in the Transaction Manager, it is possible to transfer funds. The funds transfer enables you to transfer a position from a fund or
grant to another fund or grant. In the Money Market and Securities areas, you can also transfer parts of a position. Unlike the securities account transfer or
valuation class transfer, the funds transfer enables you to specify both the number of units and the value of the position to be transferred. If the funds are not
transferred at the book value of the position, price/rate gains and losses may be incurred. The system ensures that the transfer does not affect profit or loss for
the relevant company code and that the position components are transferred porportionally to the target position.
Invesment Pool Participants and Investment Pools
Investment pools are usually set up to group the financial resources of multiple investment pool participants, which can then be invested in this form in the
capital market. This realizes higher returns and simultaneously reduces administration costs. Investment pools and investment pool participants are
represented in the system by a fund or a combination of a fund and grant. The investment made by a participant in an investment pool is mapped in the
system using certificates p urchased by the investment pool participant and certificates issues b y the investment pool. The certificate needs to be created as a
security in the Investment Certificate category.
You can generate these financial transactions automatically. You can also delete generated transactions at any time. The transactions can be displayed with
their structure characteristics in an overview.
A BAdI is also available with which you can change the transaction conditions.
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 146 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 147/148
The standard reporting for the logical databases and the position list (transaction TPM12), flow list (transaction TPM13), and posting journal (TPM20) includes
the account assignment elements from SAP Public Sector Management.
See also: For more information, see Integration in Public Sector Management in the SAP Library, under Treasury and Risk Management Transaction
Manager General Information about the Transaction Manager .
Correspondence Framework
TRM, Correspondence Framework
Technical Data
Technical Name of Business Function FIN_TRM_CORR_FW
Type of Business Function Enterprise Business Function
Available As O f Enhancement Package 4 for SAP ERP 6.0
Technical Usage Financial Services
Application component SAP Treasury and Risk Management (FIN-FSCM-TRM)
Directly Dependent Business Function Requiring Activation in
Addition
TRM, Hedge and Exposure Management, new financial product
(FIN_TRM_LR_FI_AN_2)
You can use this business function to communicate with your business partners using SWIFT (MT3xx, MT5xx) or other channels such as fax or file via the new
correspondence monitor (transaction FTR_COMONI) and are supported in this with configurable automatic matching/confirmation processes.
Prerequisites
For you to be able to use this business function, the following prerequisites have to be met:
You have installed the following components as of the version given:
Type of Component Component Is Needed Only for the Following Features
Software Component EA-FINSERV 604
SAP_APPL 604
You have activated the following business functions:
Financial Services (EA-FS)
TRM: Hedge Accounting, New Financial Instruments, New Key Figures (FIN_TRM_LR_FI_AN)
TRM, Hedge and Exposure Management, new financial product (FIN_TRM_LR_FI_AN_2)
If you want to transfer old correspondence data (Customizing settings and application data) to the new function, you must execute the migration of data before
activating the business function.
See also: Migration of Correspondence Data
Information on the changes to Customizing and the area menu can be found in the release note FIN_TRM_CORR_FW: TRM, Correspondence Framework
(New).
Features
The previous correspondence functions have been replaced completely. The new correspondence functions enable you to generate correspondence objects for financial transactions and securities accounts both automatically and manually. You can use the new correspondence monitor (transaction FTR_COMONI) to
manage correspondence objects. At the same time, you are supported by Status Management and the automatic reconciliation and assignment process. You can
also determine whether the financial transaction status is automatically set to 'settled' in the automatic settlement function, based on the product type.
The system is preconfigured for the following SWIFT messages: You can also make changes to the existing settings and set up other formats.
MT300 Foreign Exchange Confirmation
MT320 Fixed Loan/Deposit Confirmation
MT395 Queries
MT399 Free Format Message
MT502 Order to Buy/Sell
MT509 Trade Status Message
MT515 Confirmation of Purchase/Sale
MT535 Statement of Holdings
MT536 Statement of Transactions
MT540 Receive Free
MT541 Receive against PaymentMT542 Deliver Free
MT543 Deliver against Payment
MT544 Receive Free Confirmation
MT545 Receive against Payment Confirmation
PUBLIC© 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.
Page 147 of 148
7/25/2019 Business Functions(Sap Enchancement Package 5 for Sap Erp6.0)
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/business-functionssap-enchancement-package-5-for-sap-erp60 148/148
MT546 Deliver Free Confirmation
MT547 Deliver against Payment Confirmation
MT548 Settlement Status and Processing Advice
MT566 Corporate Action Confirmation